R-93-07-08-9F - 7/8/1993RESOLUTION NO. A 93 -" 7 - "" J 9F
WHEREAS, the City of Round Rock has duly advertised for bids for
the purchase and installation of ballfield lights in Old Settlers Park
at Palm Valley, and
WHEREAS, Sports Facility Company has submitted the lowest and
best bid, and
WHEREAS, the City Council wishes to accept the bid of Sports
Facility Company, Now Therefore
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK,
TEXAS,
That the bid of Sports Facility Company is hereby accepted as the
lowest and best bid and the purchase and installation of ballfield
lights in Old Settlers Park at Palm Valley is hereby authorized.
RESOLVED this 8th day of July, 1993.
ATTEST:
KS/RP.SOLUT1ON
RS07083P
LAND, City Secretary
CHARLES CUL EF ER, Mayor
City of Round Rock, Texas
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Paragraph Tale
1 CONTENTS
2 DEFINITIONS
3 CONTRACTORS UNDERSTANDING
4 PROPOSALS
5 IRREGULAR PROPOSALS
6 WITHDRAWAL OR REVISION OF PROPOSALS
7 CORPORATE BIDDERS
8 INTERPRETATIONS
9 PRE QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS.
MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT
10 EQUIPMENT STIPULATION 4
11 SUBSTITUTIONS. OR APPROVED EQUAL' 4
CLAUSE
12 RETURN OF BID SECURITY 4
13 REJECTION OF BIDS 4
14 AWARD 4
15 CON SECURITY 4
16 CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS 4
INSURANCE
17 DATE OF CONTRACT 6
18 FAILURE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT 6
19 ASSIGNMENTS 6
20 SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION AND 6
COMPLETION
21 ORDER OF CONSTRUCTION 6
22 COST. I NFORMATION 6
23 SUBMITTAL OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTS 6
24 PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW DEEMED 6
INSERTED
25 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 7
26 CORRELATION OF DOCUMENTS 7
27 REFERENCE TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS 7
28 REFERENCE POINTS 7
29 RIGHT -OF -WAY 7
30 NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF 7
31 TAXES 7
32 SUB CONTRACTING 7
33 SEPARATE CONTRACTS 8
34 LAWS PERMITS. LICENSES. REGULATIONS 8
35 OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS 8
36 RIGHT -OF -ENTRY 8
37 ACCESS AND DRAINAGE 8
38 SANITARY CONVENIENCES 8
39 DEBRIS AND CLEAN -UP PRACTICES 8
40 SHOP DRAWINGS. SAMPLES. OPERATOR'S 8
INSTRUCTIONS. SERVICE AND PARTS
MANUALS
41 DRAWINGS SHOWING CHANGES DURING 9
CONSTRUCTION
42 MATERIALS EQUIPMENT SUPPLIES 9
SERVICES AND FACILITIES
43 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIALS AND 9
EQUIPMENT
44 QUALITY OF MATERIALS 9
45 CONTRACTOR S RESPONSIBILITY. IN PART. 9
UNDER THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
CPPyngn11988 FOR Engmeenng Inc
GENERAL CONDITIONS
Table of Contents
Page
1
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
Paragraph
46
47
48
49
Title
UNFAVORABLE WEATHER 10
SUNDAYS, HOL.DAYS AND OVERTI \lE 10
MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CON - RACTOPS 10
ACCIDENT PREVENTION- EMERGENCY 10
AUTHORITY TO ACT
50 PROTECTION OF WORK 10
51 PROTECTION OF PROPEP.:Y 10
52 PROTECTION OF PERSONS 10
53 USE OF EXPLOSIVES. DRIVING OP = EMOVA_ 11
OF PILES. WRECKING EXCAVATIO'. WORK
OR OTHER SIMILAR AND 8 OTENTIti LY
DANGEROUS WORK -
54 PATENTS. COPYRIGHTS AND ROYA_ IES
55 CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES 11
56 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - TIME AN ESSENTi:_ 11
ELEMENT
57 RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS 11
58 TEMPORARY SUSPENSIOX OF THE WORK 12
59 USE OR OCCUPANCY OF COMPLETED 12
PORTIONS
60 AUTHORITY OF ENGINEER 12
61 DECISIONS OF ENGINEER 12
62 PERSONAL LIABILITY OF ENGINEEEP 12
63 AUTHORITY AND DUTIES OF ENGI\EER'S 12
FIELD REPRESENTATIVES
64 CHANGED OR EXTRA WORK 12
65 CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COS' 14
66 EXTENSION OF CONTRACT PERIOC 14
67 CERTIFICATES WARRANTIES AND 14
GUARANTEES
68 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW AND TES - :NG OF 14
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
69 "GOOD REPAIR' PERIOD 15
70 REMEDY OF DEFECTS, DETERIORATION OF 15
DEPARTURE FROM STAN ;ARDS
71 VARIATION FROM ESTIMATED OUA \TITIES 15
72 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 15
73 PAYMENT WITHHELD 16
74 FINAL MEASUREMENTS 16
75 PAYMENT. USE OR OCCUPANCY OF WORK 16
NOT EVIDENCE OF PERFORMANCE
76 ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT 16
77 ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT 16
CONSTITUTES RELEASE
78 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CORRECT DEFICIENCIES 16
79 SUSPENSION OF WORK BY OWNER 16
80 RIGHT OF OWNER TO TERMINATE CONTRACT 17
81 CONTRACTS IN DEFAULT 17
82 PROCEDURE FOR DECLARING CONTRACT IN 17
DEFAULT
83 COMPLETION OF CONTRACTS IN DEFAULT 17
84 OWNER 5 REMEDIES CUMULATIVE AND NG\ 17
WAIVER
Page
Issue 11/88
2, DEFINITIONS.
The following terms when used in the Contract Documents shall
mean the following
A ADDENDA.
Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of
Bids which clarity. correct or change the bidding documents
or the Contract Documents
B. BID.
The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed
form setting forth the prices for the Work and services to be
performed
C. CHANGE ORDER.
Written order to the Contractor. signed by the Engineer. the
Owner and Contractor to show the approval of the Engineer.
the authorization of the Owner and the acknowledge-nent of
receipt by the Contractor to make a change in the Work or
an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time
D. CHANGE PROPOSAL REQUEST (CPR).
A request to the Contractor. by the Owner. through the Engineer
that the Contractor perform "Changed or Extra Work"
E. CONTRACT.
The written agreement between Owner and Contractor covering
the Work and services to be performed as provided for by the
Contract Documents
F. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
The Contract Documents consist of the Proposal. the Contract,
the Performance. Payment and Maintenance Bond. the
Conditions of the Contract (General. Special. Supplementary
and other cooditions as they may be titled). Information or
Instruction to'Bidders, all Specifications, Drawings and Plans,
Addenda. Change Orders when and as approvec by the
Engineer and the Owner. Nonce inviting Contractors to bid as
published and all proceedings of the governing body of the
Owner relating to the Work or improvements
G. CONTRACTOR.
Party contracting directly with the Owner to furnish and perform
all Work and services in accordance with the Contract
Documents
H DAY.
Unless otherwise defined shall mean "calendar" day
I. DRAWINGS.
The drawings which show the character and scope of the Work
to be performed and which have been prepared or approved
by the Engineer and are referred to in the Contract Documents
J. ENGINEER, ARCHITECT, ENGINEER- ARCHITECT OR
ARCHITECT- ENGINEER.
(1) Each of these terms shall mean HDR Engineering, Inc.
or an affiliate as otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents. or duly authorized representatives, such
representatives acting severally within the scope of the
particular duties entrusted to them. unless otherwise
provided in the Contract Documents
(2) Nothing contained rn the Contract Documents shall create
any contractual relationship between the Engineer and any
Contractor or any Subcontractor.
K. FIELD ORDER.
A written order issued by Engineer which orders minor changes
in the Work consistent with the intent of the Contract
Documents but which does not involve a change in the Contract
Price or the Contract Time.
L FURNISH or INSTALL or PROVIDE or SUPPLY.
Unless specifically limited in the context, the word "Furnish
or the word "Install" or the word "Provide" or the word "Supply
2
or any combination or similar directive or usage thereof shall
mean FURNISHING AND INCORPORATING IN THE WORK
including all necessary labor. materials. equipment. and
everything necessary to perform the Work indicated
M GENDER AND NUMBER.
References are made as if masculine in gender and singular
in number unless neuter gender is appropriate in the context.
however. the use of any gender shall be applicable to all genders
and the use of singular number shall include the plural and
conversely
N. GOOD REPAIR.
Good repair shall be construed to mean that any defect.
functional or structural deterioration (except that from ordinary
and reasonable use) which appreciably reduces the effective-
ness or efficiency of the Work or improvement for the purpose
intended. or any serious departure from the standards of
original construction described in the Contract Documents.
shall be remedied by the Contractor. Such remedy will be made
w■thout further cost to the Owner. including in part. all damages
caused by such defect. deficiency. deterioration or departure.
and by its repair. replacement or correction The requirements
of Good Repair shall include in part and not by limitation Site
and Drainage Work. Trench Conditions. Landscaping. Filling.
Retaining Walls, Rip -Rap. Revetments. Grading and other site
work activities
0. MAY.
Permissive
P. OWNER.
The public body or authority, corporation. assoc,atmn, firm or
person with whom the Contractor has entered into the
Agreement and for whom the Work is to be provided
0. PROJECT.
Total construction of which the Work covered by the Contract
Documents may be the whole or a part thereof
R. PROPOSAL
Prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work and services
to be performed
S. REFERENCE TO TRADE CONTRACTORS.
When only one principal contract exists for all Work covered
by the Contract Documents. reference to trades or to trade
contractors in the Contract Documents shall mean the various
construction crafts and such reference shall not create any
contractual relationship between the Owner and any trade
contractor with whom the principal contractor may subcontract
T. SAMPLES.
Samples are physical examples furnished or constructed by
the Contractor to illustrate materials, equipment. workmanship
or finishes. and to establish standards by which the Work will
be judged
U "SHALL" IMPLIED
In the interest of conciseness. some sentences. statements. and
clauses used in the specifications exclude any form of the verb
"shall" normally expressed en a verb phrase with verbs such
as "furnish. "'install: "provide: "perform;" "construct,' "erect,"
"comply." "apply," "submit." or similar "verb ". but any such
sentences. statements, and clauses shall be interpreted to
include the applicable form of the phrase"The Contractor shall"
and the requirements described therein shall be interpreted
as mandatory elements of the Contract
V. SHALL
Mandatory
W. SHOP DRAWINGS.
Shop drawings are drawings. diagrams. illustrations. certifi-
cates, test reports, schedules, performance charts. brochures.
shop layouts, fabrication layouts. assembly layouts. foundation
layouts, wiring and piping layouts. specifications and descriptive
Issue 11/88
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
literature required by the Contract Documents. which are
prepared by the Contractor or any Subcontractor, manufacturer.
supplier or distributor. and which illustrate some portion of
the Work.
X. SPECIFICATIONS.
Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written
technical descriptions of materials. equipment. construction
systems. standards and workmanship as applied to the Work
and certain administrative details applicable thereto
Y. SUBCONTRACTOR.
Party supplying labor and material or only labor for work at
the site of the project for. and under separate contract or
agreement with the Contractor Nothing contained in the
Contract Documents shall create any contractual relationship
between the Owner and any Subcontractor
Z SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION.
When the Work is sufficiently complete so it may be sale'y
conveniently and beneficially utilized by the Owner for all of
the purposes for which It was intended
AA. WILL
Mandatory
BB. WORK.
All materials. supplies and equipment incorporated or to be
Incorporated into the construction and all labor, operations and
services necessary to produce the construction. including in
part all testing. obligations duties and responsibilities
necessary to the successful completion of the construction
start up. and demonstration as required by the Contract
Documents
3. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING.
A It is understood and mutually agreed that by submitting a
Proposal the Contractor acknowledges that he has carefully
examined all documents pertaining to the Work, the location.
accessibility and general character of the site of the Work and
all existing buildings and structures within and adjacent to the
site. and has satisfied himself as t0 the nature of the Work.
the condition of existing buildings and structures, the
conformation of the ground, the character. quality and quantity
of the material to be encountered. the character of the
equipment. machinery. plant. and any other facilities needed
preliminary to and during prosecution of the Work the general
and local conditions, the construction hazards. and all other
matters. Including but not limited to the labor situation which
can In any way affect the Work under the Contract It Is further
mutually agreed that by submitting a Proposal the Contractor
acknowledges that he has satisfied himself as to the feasibility
of the Contract Documents for the construction of the Work
and that he accepts all the terms. conditions and stipulations
contained therein. and that he is prepared to work in peace
and harmony with other contractors performing work on the
site
B No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer. agent
or employee of the Owner or of the Engineer. or with the Owner
himself. either before or after the execution of the Contract.
shall affect or modify any of the terms. conditions. or other
obligations set forth In the Contract Documents
1 4. PROPOSALS.
A Proposals must be submitted on forms furnished by the Owner
or the Engineer and endorsed as provided In the Contract
Documents
B Proposals must be submitted filled out with Ink or typewriter.
and without erasure, interlineation or changes, and If not made
in accordance with the Contract Documents. will be subject
to rejection as irregular The Owner reserves the right to waive
any irregularities or informalities
C. Proposals shall be made in the name of the principal and If
a copartnership. the names of all partners shall be given
Exact post office address s`.all be given In all cases If Proposals
are submitted by an agent. satisfactory evidence of agency
authority must accompany the Proposal
5. IRREGULAR PROPOSALS.
A Proposals shall be considered irregular and may be rejected
for the following reasons unless otherwise provided by law
(1) If the Proposal form furnished to the bidder by the Owner
or the Engineer Is not used or is altered
(2) If there are unauthorized additions or conditional bids. or
Irregularities of any kind which may tend to make the
Proposal Incomplete. indefinite. or ambiguous as to Its
meaning
(3) If the bidder adds any provisions reserving the right to
accept or reject any award. or to enter Into a contract
pursuant to an award
(4) If the unit or lump sum prices contained in the bid schedule
are obviously unbalanced either In excess or below the
reasonable cost analysis values
(5) If the bidder fads to insert a unit price for every pay nem
Indicated except in the case of authorized alternate pay
items
(6) If the bidder falls to complete the Proposal In any other
particulars where information rs requested so bidder's
Proposal may be properly evaluated
6 The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all buds and to
waive irregularities or Informalities as may be deemed best and
In the Owners Interest
6. WITHDRAWAL OR REVISION OF PROPOSALS.
A A bidder may. without prejudice to himself. withdraw a proposal
after it has been deposited with the Owner. provided the request
for such withdrawal is received by the Owner. In writing or
by telegram. before the time set for Opening proposals
Telephonic communications shall not be accepted Alter
opening of bids. no proposal may be withdrawn by the bidder
for a period of 30 days or as otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents or provided by law
B Any bidder may modify his bid by telegraphic communication
at any time prior to the scheduled time for opening proposals.
provided such telegraphic communication is received by the
Owner prior to the opening of proposals. and. provided further.
the Owner is satisfied that a written confirmation of the
telegraphic modification over the signature of the bidder was
mailed prior to the opening of proposals The telegraphic
communication should not reveal the bid price but should
provide the addition or subtraction or other modification so
that the final prices or terms shall not be known by the Owner
until the sealed bid is opened If written confirmation is not
received within two days after the scheduled time for opening
proposals, no consideration will be given to the telegraphic
modification
7. CORPORATE BIDDERS.
Corporate bidders to be eligible to enter into the Contract with
the Owner shall be qualified to do business In the State where
the Work will be performed Bidders shall comply with all applicable
licensing requirements Foreign corporations which have not
domesticated or otherwise become licensed in the State where Work
will be performed shall obtain a permit to do business In such
State pursuant to that State's requirements
8. INTERPRETATIONS.
3 a bidder Intends to submit a bid for Work and 0 In doubt as
to the true meaning of any part of the proposed Contract
Documents. he may submit to the Engineer a written request for
an interpretation thereof. The bidder submitting the request will
be responsible for Its prompt and actual delivery Any interpretation
of such documents will be made by addendum duly issued. and
3 Issue 11 /88
a cony of such addendum will be mailed or delivered to each binder
rece.ving a set of such documents Neither the Engineer, nor the
Owner will be responsible for any other exp:anations or
interpretations of such documents which anyone presumes to make
on behalf of the Owner
9. PRE- QUAUFICATION OF BIDDERS, MACHINERY AND
EQUIPMENT.
A
B.
The Owner reserves the right to request a (inane al statement.
together with a statement of past experience. personnel.
machinery and equipment available to perform the proposed
Work from any bidder considered for award of a Contract
Failure or refusal to furnish such a statement or statements.
or failure to provide a satisfactory statement of flnanc el
responsibility shall constitute a basis for drsgcalifymg any
bidder
The Owner also reserves the right to require evidence of
satisfactory operation of any equipment offerec and to be
incorporated into the Work
1Q EQUIPMENT STIPULATION.
A. COST OF CHANGES
In all Contracts where equipment is furnished. due to the lack
of standardization of equipment as produced by the various
manufacturers. it may become necessary to make m.nor
modifications in the structures. buildings, piping. mechanical
work. electrical work. accessories. controls. or other work to
accommodate the particular equipment offered Tne Contrac-
tor's bid or ce for any equipment offered shall incl„ de the cost
of making any necessary changes as well as the cos; of
Preparing detailed drawings showing such changes subject to
the approa' of the Engineer
B. MAJOR EQUIPMENT.
The Contractor shall list major equipment on the Poposal form
as specd'ed Cost of major equipment items listed shal' be
included In total project base bid
C ALTERNATE MAJOR EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall list and bid major equipment as specified
in the tots project base bid He may offer alternate equipment
by manufacturers not listed in the specifications as qualified
suppliers. provided
(1) A procedure for major equipment prequalification is not
included in the specifications
(2) The alternate equipment will perform the same function.
Is of comparable quality. substance. design and efficiency
and will fit within the space limitations of the structure
The Engineer shall evaluate the offered alternate equipment
and on the basis of his opinion. shall recommend
equipment in the best interest of the Owner
(3) The Contractor shall list any alternate equipment offered
and show the difference in cost. either as an addition or
a deduction to the base bid for that particular equipment
alternate Equipment offered as alternate equipment shall
be considered and, if accepted. shall be substituted for
the base bid equipment price for determining both the
successful bidder and the Contract price Any alternate
equipment offered shall be accompanied by the detailed
drawings and specifications, showing all changes in the
structures. buildings. piping. mechanical work. electrical
work. accessories, controls, or other work. necessary to
accommodate the equipment as well as drawings.
specifications. operating data. and complete criteria of the
equipment which is offered as an alternate
D. OTHER EQUIPMENT.
See "Or Approved Equal" Clause
11. SUBSTTTUTIONS, "OR APPROVED EQUAL" CLAUSE.
A Whenever the Contract Documents call for an article or an
item of material or equipment which Is not listed as Major
Equipment and which is defined by describing a proprietary
product. or by using the name of a manufacturer. vender. trade
name. catalogue number or other reference. the tern "or
approved equal'. d not inserted. shall be implied The soecif,c
articles. materials, or equipment mentioned shall be understood
as Indicating the type, function. minimum standard of design.
efficiency. and quality desired. and shall not be cons: in
such a manner as to exclude products of comparable
substance. quality. design. function. and efficiency The
Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Contract
Documents relative to approval of material and eq., pme01
before incorporation Into the Work
5 The Contractor may request approval of substitute a•ticles,
materials or equipment The Engineer shall evaluate the elides.
materials and equipment offered and on the bass of his
opinion. shall make recommendations pertaining there:: in the
best interest of the Owner In the event of approval a written
Addendum or Change Order, as appropriate. will be iss_ed
12. RETURN OF BID SECURITY.
Bid secur.ty of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained
until the Contract is executed or rejection made by the Owner
Other bid security will be returned only after the canvass and
tabulation of bids is completed
13. REJECTON OF BIDS.
The Owner reserves the right to reject any bidder If Invest gamin
of such bidder falls to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is :'openly
qualified to carry out the oc'igations and to complete the Work
contemplated by Contract Documents Any or all bids :.ill be
rejected d there is reason to believe that collusion exists a
the bidders
14. AWARD.
The Owner will proceed without unnecessary delay to consider
the Proposals and reserves the right to reject any or all Proposals.
to pass uoon the regularity or waive any irregularity or infc•ma)Ity
of the bidders and the acceptability of the Surety offered Date
of award is date of formal Owner decision to award the Contract
to the selected bidder
15. CONTRACT SECURITY.
A Coincident with the execution of the Contract. the Cc-?actor
shall furnish a surety bond (form attached) in an amount at
least equal to 100% of the Contract Price as security for the
following
(1) The faithful performance of the Contract and the terms.
conditions and stipulations contained therein,
(2) To indemnify and hold the Owner and Engineer harmless.
(3) Payment of all laborers and mechanics for labor performed.
(4) Payment for all materials and equipment furnished and for
all materials and equipment used or rented .n the
performance of the Contract. and
(5) Maintenance of said Work or improvements in Good Repair
for minimum period of one (1) year. unless a !hinge period
Is otherwise specified in the Contract Documents. or
required by law. from the date of final acceptance of the
Work by the Owner,
B The Surety on such bond shall be satisfactory to the Owner
and shall be a duly authorized surety company listed on the
Treasury Department's most current list (Circular 570 as
amended) licensed to do business in the State where the Work
will be performed
18. CONTRACTOR'S AND SUBCONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE.
A The Contractor shall not commence Work under the Contract
until he has obtained at his expense all Insurance required
by the Contract Documents. and such Insurance has been
approved by the Owner. nor shall the Contractor allow any
Subcontractor to commence Work on any Subcontract until
the same Insurance requirements have been complied with by
4 Issue 11/88
each Subcontractor Such insurance shalt remain in full force
and effect on all phases of the Work. whether or not the Wcrx
is occupied or utilized by the Owner. until all Work under the
Contract is completed and has been accepted by the Owne•
Any insurance endorsements necessary to pe•mit prior
occupancy or use of any completed or partially completed
Portions of the Work by the Owner she!' be secured by the
Contractor
B Nothing contained in the insurance requirements shall be
construed as limiting the extent of the Contractor's respons:
bility for payment of damages resulting from his operations
under the Contract Contractor agrees that he alone shall be
completely responsible for procuring and maintaining full
insurance coverage as provided herein or as may be otherwise
required by the Contract Documents Any appro,al by the
Owner or Engineer shall not operate to the contrary
C Any insurance bearing on adequacy of performance shall be
maintained after completion of the Project for the tuft
maintenance period
D The Contractor shall procure and shall maintain for the period
of the Contract the following types of insurance In the form.
minimum limits and amounts herein specified or as may be
otherwise required by the Contract Documents Any deduct.
ibles associated with such insurance shall be soie'.y for the
account of and the responsibility of the Contractor
(1) WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION INCLUDING OCCUP..-
TIONAL DISEASE. AND EMPLOYER'S LIABILITY INSU-
RANCE The Contractor shall mamta,n during the life cf
his Contract Statutory Workmen's Compensation Insurance
and Occupational Disease Disability Insurance in str c:
accordance with requirements of the most current and
applicable State Workmen's Compensation Insurance Laws
for all of his employees to be engaged in Work under h s
Contract and in case any Work is sublet. the Contractc•
shall require each Subcontractor similarly to provide
Workmen's Compensation and Occupationa' Disease
Disability Insurance for the latter's employees engagec
such Work unless such employees are covered by the
protection afforded by the Contractor's Insurance In case
any class of employees engaged in hazardous Work under
his Contract is not protected under the Workmen
Compensation Statute. the Contractor shall provide. and
shall cause each Subcontractor to provide. adequate
Employer s Liability Insurance for the protection of his
employees not otherwise protected
(2) PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE
(Note "Indemnity" clause hereinafter) The Contractor shaft
procure and shall maintain during the life of his Contract
full Commercial General Liability Insurance coverage This
coverage shall provide protection from claims for damages
for personal Injury and bodily injury including in part
sickness disease. or death and from claims for damages
to property. which may arse directly or indirectly out of,
or in connection with. the performance of Work under the
Contract by the Contractor. or by any of his Subcontractors.
or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of
them. or under the control of either of them. and the
minimum amount of such insurance shall be as follows
unless higher minimum amounts are otherwise required
by the Contract Documents'
a "Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance in an
amount not less than One Million (51.000.000) Dollars
per occurrence for damages arising out of personal
injury property damage. and bodily injury. including
in part sickness. disease. or death and subject to an
annual aggregate limit of Two Million ($2.000000)
Dollars. The aggregate limit is to apply on a per job
basis
b. The Property Damage portion of this coverage shall
not exclude coverage for explosion. collapse. and
underground exposures In addition. where Como eted
Operation Insurance coverage is applicable. such
coverage shall be maintained after completion and
acceptance of the Project for the full maintenance
period
(3) AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSU-
RANCE The Contractor shall procure and shall ma ^tam
during the life of his Contract. Comprehensive Automobile
Liability and Property Damage Insurance coverage on all
self - propelled vehicles used in connection with the
Contract. whether owned. non - owned, or hired The ha: I ity
limits shall be not less than One Million 151.000600)
Dollars for injury or death of one person and in an amount
not less than One Million (51.000000) Dollars in any one
occurrence. and Property Damage limits of not less than
One Million 151.000.000) Dollars m any one occurrence.
or One Million (5 1.000000) Dollars combined single' mit
(4) GUNNER'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY POLICY. The Contractor
shall. at his expense. provide the Owner with an Owner's
Protective Liability Policy naming the Owner as the named
insured. with the Engineer. and each of their officers. agents
and employees as additional insureds under that policy.
said policy to protect said parties from claims which may
arise from operations under the Contract This coverage
shall be in the same company which provides the
Contractor's liability insurance coverage. and in the same
minimum amounts
(5) CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY COVERAGE Each and eery
policy for liability insurance carried by each Contractor and
Subcontractor will include coverage for liability assvned
under contract sufficiently broad to insure the provswn
titled "Indemnity' hereinafter set forth
(6) INDEMNITY. To the extent permissible by law. the Contractor
shalt protect. defend indemnify and save harmless the
Owner. the Engineer. and their officers. agents. and
employees. from and against suns. actions claims. tosses.
liability or damage of any character. and from and ago nst
costs and expenses. including in part attorney fees.
incidental to the defense of such suits. actions. cla ms.
losses. damages or liability on account of injury, disease.
sickness. including death. to any person or damage to
property. including in part the loss of use resulting
therefrom. based upon or allegedly based upon any act.
omission or occurrence of the Contractor or his employees.
agents. subcontractors or suppliers, or anyone else under
the Contractor's direction and control. (regardless if caused
in part by a party indemnified hereunder). and arising out
of, occurring in connection with. resulting from. or caused
by the performance or failure of performance of any Work
or services called for by the Contract. or from cond : ons
created by the performance or non - performance of said
Work or services.
This indemnity shall not extend to liability ansng o_t of
the preparation by the Engineer of the design or
specifications for the Owner or the giving of written
directions or instructions by the Engineer as may be
required by the Contract Documents. provided the g wing
of such written instructions or directions is the sole
proximate cause of the injury or damage should it occur.
(7) BUILDER'S RISK INSURANCE In addition to such Property
Insurance coverage which the Contractor elects to carry
for his own protection. he shall procure and shall maintain
for the life of the Contract. Builder's Risk Insurance and
Installation Floater Insurance coverage Such coverage
should be on a Special Perils (All Risk) basis including
theft of building materials upon the full insurable value
of all portions of the Work which is the subject of the
Contract and subject to a loss for which these policies
give protection. and shall include completed Work and Work
in progress This coverage shall be with an insurance
company or companies acceptable to the Owner Such
5 Issue 11/88
coverage may have a deductible clause but amount of
deductible shall not exceed Ten Thousand Dollars
(01 0000001 providing. the Contractor shall assume and
pay such deductible
a Such insurance shall Include as Additional Named
Insured the Owner. the Engineer. and each of their
officers, agents. and employees. Subcontractors and
Subsubcontractors of the Contractor: and any other
party with an insurable Interest designated by the
Owner as an Additional Named Insured. all as their
Interests may appear
b An original and a certified copy of the policy of
insurance required herein shall be furnished to the
Engineer as provided under "Evidence of Insurance
Coverage" hereinafter
(8) BOILER AND /OR MACHINERY INSURANCE Boiler and/
or Machinery Insurance. where appropriate and necessary.
shall be procured and maintained by the Contractor until
the Work has been completed and accepted by the Owner.
EVIDENCE OF INSURANCE COVERAGE Before commencement
of any Work. the Contractor shall submit written evidence that
the minimum insurance required by the Contract Documents
has been obtained Such written evidence shall be in the form
of a Certificate of Insurance (see attached form) executed by
the Contractor's insurance carrier shoving such policies in
force for the specified period or by furnishing a copy of the
actual policy or policies Each cert.ficate shall contain an
endorsement or statement waiving right of cancellation or
reduction in coverage unless 60 days prior written notice is
given to the Owner by registered or certified mad
(1) The Contractor shall furnish an 01191501 and a certified copy
of Builder's Risk Completed Value Insurance coverage to
the Engineer. one copy of whicn shall be for the Owner
and one copy for the Engineer
(2) An original and a certified copy of the Owner's Protective
Liability Policy shall be furnished to the Engineer. one copy
of which shall be for the Owner and one copy for the
Engineer
WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Contractor and Owner mutually agree
to waive all rights against each other and against the Engineer
for damages caused by fire and other perils to the extent covered
by Builders Risk Insurance as required herein The Contractor
shall require similar waiver by each of his Subcontractors and
Sub - subcontractors
G Contractor shall automatically renew any policy which expires
during the performance of his Contract and notify the Owner
and Engineer by appropriate certificate of such renewal prior
to expiration date
17. DATE OF CONTRACT.
A formal written Contract will be entered into by the parties and
1 • be binding upon the Owner when approved and executed by the
Owner
18. FAIWRE TO EXECUTE CONTRACT.
Should the successful bidder fail to execute the Contract and furnish 23.
bond or bonds satisfactory to the Owner to validate the same within
10 days after award of Contract. his bid security shall be forfeited
to the Owner as liquidated damages
1 19. ASSIGNMENTS.
The Contractor shall not assign the whore or any part of the Contract
or any monies due or to become due thereunder without the written
consent of the Owner and of the Surety on the Contractor's bond
A copy of such consent of Surety. together with a copy of the
assignment, shall be filed with the Owner and the Engineer In
case the Contractor assigns all or any pan of any monies due
or to become due under the Contract. the instrument of assignment
shall contain a clause substantially to the effect that It is agreed
that the right of the assignee In and to any monies due or to become
due to the Contractor shall be sub;ect to prior claims and liens
of at persons. firms and corporations for services rendered for
the payment of all laborers and mechanics for labor performed
for the payment of all materials and equipment furnished and for
payment of all materials and equipment used or rented In the
performance of the Work called for in. the Contract. and for the
payment of any liens. clams, or amounts due the Federal. State
or loca• governments or any of their funds
20 SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION AND COMPLETION.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer within 10 days after
awaro of Contract. or as may be otherwise requested by the
Engineer. a schedule shaving the order in which the Contractor
proposes to carry on the Work and at a rate sufficient to successfully
complete all of the Work set forth in the Contract Documents within
the Contract Period Such schedule shall show the dates at which
the Contractor will start and complete the several parts of the Work,
the order of construction and delivery dates of critical materials
and equipment and the dates for startup and demonstration of the
systems Thus schedule shall be binding on the Contractor and
shall be complied with by the Contractor unless. for good cause
shown. a modification thereof is approved by the Owner and the
Engineer Any request for modification of the schedule shall be
made in writing to the Owner through the Engineer for approval
21. ORDER OF CONSTRUCTION.
A The order of construction as determined by the Contractor will
be followed except where the Engineer determines that such
order would not be In the best interest of the Owner or the
general public. however such right to determine the best interest
of the Owner shall not give rise to any duty on the part of
Eng:neer to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor
or any other party Neither Owner nor Engineer shall be liable
for any additional cost incurred by the Contractor as a result
of such determination. provided, such determination was not
arbitrary or capricious.
B Where the Owner's operations require specific sequencing of
the Work. such sequencing requirements as provided for by
the Contract Documents shall be followed
22. COST INFORMATION,
Where a Contract is awarded on a lump sum basis. the Contractor
shall file with the Engineer a balanced price segregation of his
lump sum bid Into items similar to the various subdivisions of the
general and detailed specifications. the sum of which shall equal
the lump sum bid The cost of various materials shall be furnished
upon request of the Engineer. and such data will then be used
as a basis for making monthly estimates
When a Contract is awarded on an estimated quantity - unit price
basis. the unit price for the Work shall include costs for all labor.
mechanics. superintendence. tools. materials. equipment and all
utilities, transportation and services necessary to perform and
complete said Work. and work Incidental thereto in a workmanlike
manner. as described In the drawings. specifications and other
Contract Documents. Work described in the Contract Documents
but not Identified in the listing of unit price items shall be considered
Incidental to unit price work listed and Included as a part thereof,
together with all Contractor overhead and profit to accomplish the
unlisted items
SUBMITTAL OF REQUIRED DOCUMENTS.
Contractor shall submit copies of all required documents No Work
shall be commenced until insurance forms. bonds, and related
documents. have been executed and approved. No requests for
payment shall be made until Schedule of Construction and
Completion. Cost Information and Materials and Equipment Lusts
have been submitted and approved
24. PROVISIONS REQUIRED BY LAW DEEMED INSERTEQ
Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to
be inserted in the Contract shall be deemed to be Inserted herein
and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though It were
included herein If. for any reason, any such provision Is not inserted
m the Contract. or i5 not correctly inserted, then upon application
6 Issue 11/88
of either party. the Contract shall forthwith be physically amended
to make such insertion or correction
25. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
A The Engineer will provide the Contractor with up to four sets
of Drawings and Specifications after the execution of the
Contract If additional Drawings and Specifications are
required. the Contractor shall compensate the Engineer for
same
B When in the opinion of the Engineer. revised partial Drawings
and Specifications are required to clarify or reflect authorized
changes or additional work, the Engineer will provide two conies
of such revisions to Contractor Additional copies requires must
be paid for by Contractor Contractor shall immediately post
such revisions to his record set of Contract Documents
C The Drawings and Specifications are the property of the
Engineer. and are furnished to the Owner and Contractor for
the construction of Work under the Contract only
D The data given in the Specifications and shown on the Drawings
is believed to be accurate but the accuracy is not guaranteed
The Contractor must take all levels. locations. measurements.
and verify all dimensions on the fob site prior to construction
and adapt his Work into the exact construction Scale
measurements taken from Drawings are not considered for
more than reference
E Drawings showing the details of the Work specd:ea are
designated "Drawings" or 'Plans " and together with the
Specifications form an integral part of the Contract Documents
26. CORRELATION OF DOCUMENTS.
A Drawings. and specifications are cooperative and complemen-
tary Portions of the Work which can best be illustrated by the
Drawings may not be included in the Specifications and
portions best described by the specifications may not be
depicted on the Drawings All items necessary or incidental
to completely construct or erect the Work shall be furn shed.
whether called for in the Specifications or shown on the
Drawings Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not
shown on the Drawings. or anything shown or mentioned on
the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications. shall
be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both
B Information or Instructions for Bidders and Spec•al or
Supplementary General Conditions shall take pnonty over
General Conditions. large scale Drawings shall take precedence
over small scale Drawings In case of disagreement between
the Drawings and Specifications, or within either document 32. SU
itself. the better quality or greater quantity of Work resulting A
in a greater cost shall be estimated and included in the Bid
and Contract Price and the matter drawn to the Engineer's
attention for decision
27. REFERENCE TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS.
Any reference to standard specifications in any of the Contract
Documents shalt always imply the latest edition of such standard
specification or specifications available at time Notice inviting
Contractors to bid is published unless otherwise indicated However.
no provision of any referenced standard specification. manual or C.
code (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the
Contract Documents) shall be effective to change the duties and
responsibilities of Owner. or Engineer. or any of their consultants.
agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract
Documents. nor shall 1 be effective to assign to Engineer. or any
of Engineer's consultants. agents or employees. any duty or D
authority to supervise or direct the furnishing or performance of
the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility
contrary to the provisions of paragraph 45.
28. REFERENCE POINTS.
The Engineer shall provide a baseline and a datum bench mark
reference point. If the Contractor. through willfulness or
carelessness. removes. causes or allows such points to be removed E
before the prosecution of Work requires 11, the replacing of such
line and elevation points shall be done at the expense of the
Contractor.
A For building and plant type work the Contractor shall. at his
own expense. employ a registered engineer or licensed land
surveyor acceptable to the Owner to g.ve to the Contractor
lines and elevations for the Contractors use in constructing
the Work The registered engineer or licensed land surveyor
shall furnish to the Engineer. through the Contractor. a signed
plat certifying to the location and elevations of the Work
indicating ties and closure to the Engineer's baseline and datum
bench mark
B For construction other than building and plant type work. the
Contractor shall be responsible to set all additional line and
grade references for the Work
29. RIGHT -OF -WAY.
The Owner shall furnish all land and right -of -way for the
performance of the Work required by the Contract Documents
1 Contractor shall confine his operations to the right -of -way
furnished
33 NOTICE AND SERVICE THEREOF.
Where the manner of giving notice is not otherwise provided for
in the Contract Documents, any notice to the Contractor from the
Owner relative to any pan of the Contract shall be m writing and
considered delivered and the service thereof completed. when said
notice is posted. by certified or registered mail. to the Contractor
at the address given in the Contractors proposal. or at the last
business address known to him who gives the notice. or delivered
in person to the Contractor or his authorized representative on
the site It is mutually agreed that such nonce shall be sufficient
and acequate
31. TAXES.
A The Contractor shall. without additional expense to the Owner.
pay all applicable Feaeral. State and Local taxes of every kind
and character, except taxes and assessments on the real
property comprising the site of the Protect, and such taxes
shall be considered incidental and included rn the total bid
8 The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with statements
certifying payment of any sales. use or excise tax and such
other documents as may be necessary for the Owner to make
request for tax refund as provided by applicable law Five copies
of such statements and documents shall be furnished to the
Owner before final payment on the Contract is made to the
Contractor. or at earlier times if so directed by the Owner
BCONTRACTING.
The Contractor may utilize the services of specialty Subcon-
tractors only on those parts of the Work which, under normal
contracting practices. are performed by such specialty
Subcontractors.
B The Owner reserves the right to approve Subcontractors for
any Work The Contractor. r1 requested by the Owner. shall
submit to the Owner the proposed award and such information
as the Owner may require.
The Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the Owner for
the acts and omissions of his Subcontractors. and of persons
either directly or indirectly employed by them. or under their
control, as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly
employed by him.
The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted
in all Subcontracts relative to the Work to bind Subcontractors
to the Contractor by the terms of the Contract Documents
insofar as applicable to the Work of Subcontractors. and to
give the Contractor the same power as regards terminating
any Subcontract that the Owner may exercise over the
Contractor under any provision of the Contract Documents
Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any
contractual relationships between any Subcontractor and the
Owner or Engineer.
7 Issue 11/88
33. SEPARATE CONTRACTS.
A The Owner reserves the right to award other contracts in
connection with the Owner's Project The Contractor shall affore
other contractors reasonable opportunity for the mtroductior
and storage of their materials. machinery. equipment supplies
and the execution of their work. and shall properly connec:
and coordinate his Work with the work of others
B If any pan of the Contractor's Work depends upon, the wort
of any other contractor for proper execut on or results. the
Contractor shall inspect and promptly report in writing to the
Engineer any lack of progress or defects in the othe•
contractors's work that renders it unsuitable for prope
execution or results Failure on the part of the Contractor to
so Inspect and report shall constitute an acceptance of the
other contractor's work as fit and proper for the reception c
the Contractor's Work
C To Insure the proper execution of his subsequent Work. the
Contractor shall measure existing work and shall at once report
m writing to the Engineer any mcapatibility between the existing
work and the Work anticipated by the Contract Documents
34. LAWS, PERMITS, LICENSES, REGULATIONS.
A The Contractor in the execution of the Work shall conform to
all applicable Federal and State laws. municipal ordinances anc
the rules and regulations of all authorities having jur,sdiction
over construction of the Work. Including m part all constructior
codes and safety codes which may apply to (1) performance
of the Work. (2) protection of adjoining and adjacent property
(3) maintenance of passageways. guard fences or othe'
protective facilities. and shall obtain and pay for al, permits
licenses and approvals necessary for the construction of the
Work and give all required notices
B Contractor shall arrange for all inspections required by Federa
State. Municipal or other authorities having lawful jur sdlctior
and pay all fees and costs Incurred at no additional expense
to the Owner
35. OPERATIONS AND STORAGE AREAS.
A All operations of the Contractor (including storage of materials
supplies and equipment) shall be confined to areas aothonze:
by the Owner The Contractor shall be liable for any and a'
damages caused by him to such premises
8 The Contractor shall hold and save the Owner. free and harmless
from liability of any nature or kind arising from any use trespass
or damage occasioned by his operations on premises of third
persons
C. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the care and
storage of materials, supplies or equipment delivered on the
Work site or purchased for use thereon Stored materials.
supplies or equipment shall be carefully and continuously
protected from damage or deterioration in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and so located so as to
facilitate Inspection by the Owner or the Engineer or both
The responsibility for the care and storage of materials, supplies
or equipment shall be with the Contractor whether such
materials, supplies or equipment are furnished by the
Contractor or by the Owner Storage of materials. supplies or
equipment shall not unduly interfere with the progress of the
Contractor's Work or the work of any other contractor
36. RIGHT -OF- ENTRY.
Contractor shall provide the Owner Engineer. or representatives
of governmental agencies proper facilities for access to the Work
wherever It Is In preparation or progress
37. ACCESS AND DRAINAGE.
The Contractor shall keep a sufficient clear area around fire hydrants
to permit their full and effective use He shall keep natural drainage
and water courses unobstructed or provide other equal courses
effectively placed
38. SANITARY CONVENIENCES.
The Contractor shall furnish the necessary sanitary conveniences.
properly secluded. for the use of workers during construction and
these conveniences shall be maintained in a manner that w,11 be
inoffensive and in compliance with Federal. State and local health
and sanitation requirements
39. DEBRIS AND CLEANUP PRACTICES.
A The Contractor shall maintain general cleanup practices to keep
all streets. alleys. sidewalks. or other premises as free from
materials and debris as the character of the Work will permit.
and upon completion of any part of the Work. shall. within
reasonable time. remove all surplus material and debris. and
leave right -of -way and premises in a condition equal to or better
than preconstructron condition acceptable to the Owner. unless
otherwise specified in the Contract Documents Under no
circumstances shall the Contractor allow any conmhon to exist
which creates a nuisance. fire hazard. dust or an environment
Injurious to health or safety. or an attraction for children.
animals. birds. rodents. during or after construction
B Failure to comply with this provision, alter due and proper notice
has been given by the Owner or his agent. will be sufficent
grounds for the Owner to proceed to clean up such material
and debris. make repairs. and charge same to the Contractor,
who hereby agrees to the provisions as set forth herein.
411 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, OPERATOR'S INSTRUCI1ONS,
SERVICE AND PARTS MANUALS.
A The Contractor shall furnish all Shop Drawings and Samples
as defined under Paragraph 2. entitled "DEFINITIONS" which
are required by the Contract Documents Shop Drawings of
equipment and devices offered by the Contractor for review
of the Engineer shall be in sufficient detail to adequately show
construction and operation Shop Drawings submitted as herein
provided by the Contractor and reviewed by the Engineer for
conformance with the design concept shall be executed in
conformity with the Contract Documents unless otherwise
required by the Owner.
B Unless otherwise specified the Contractor sha I provide a
minimum of one reproduceable and one print of all subm,nal
information
C Work performed In connection with the fabrication. manufac-
ture. shipment or purchase of material or equipment prior to
review as specified shall be at the Contractor's sole risk and
responsibility
D Shop Drawings and Samples shall be accompanied by letter
of transmittal which shall give a list of the numbers and dates
of the submittal, and shall be in the form required by the
Engineer Contractor shall duplicate this form Shop Drawings
shall be complete rn every respect and bound in sets
E The Contractor shall submit all Shop Drawings and Samples
sufficiently In advance of construction requirements to allow
ample time for checking. correcting. resubmitting and
rechecking and to avoid any delay in progress of the Work
F Shop Drawings or Samples submitted shall be marked with
the name of the Project. numbered and bear the stamp of
approval of the Contractor as evidence that the Shop Drawings
and Samples have been reviewed and approved by the
Contractor Any Shop Drawings or Samples submitted without
this stamp of approval will not be considered and will be
returned to the Contractor for resubmission 11 the Shop
Drawings or Samples show variation from the requirements
of the Contract. the Contractor shall call such variation to the
Engineer's attention in his letter of transmittal in order that.
if acceptable and Engineer gives written approval to the
variation. suitable action may be taken for proper adjustment.
otherwise the Contractor will not be relieved of the respon-
sibility of executing the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents. even though such Shop Drawings or Samples have
been otherwise reviewed
8 Issue 11 /88
G. By approving and submitting Shop Drawings and Samples the
Contractor thereby represents that he has determined and
verified all field dimensions and measurements, field
construction crnena. materials. catalog numbers and similar
data. and that he has reviewed. approved and coordinated such
submittals with the requirements of the Work and the Contract
Documents
H If a Shop Drawing or Sample, as submitted. mdlcates a variation
from the Contract requirements as set forth in Subparagraph
F above. and the Engineer finds same to be In the interest
of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change
rn the Contract Price or time for performance. he may apc•ove
the Shoo Drawings or Samples: provided however. such
departure is slight in nature and does not affect the design
concept of the Work
I. All items of standard equipment shall be the latest model at
time of delivery.
J When Shop Drawings are submitted for the purpose of showing
the installation in greater detail. their review shal not excuse
the Contractor from requirements shown on the drawings and
specifications
K Shop Drawings and Sample submittals not conforming
completely with the above requirements will be returned to
the Contractor. wrthout action. for resubmrnal and the resu'trng
delay shall be entirely the responsibility of the Contractor
L The Engineer's check and review of Shop Drawings and
Samples. specnccatrons and descriptive literature submitted by
the Contractor will be only for general conformance with des'gn
concept, except as otherwise provided, and shall not be
construed as
(1) Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements,
(2) Relrevrng the Contractor of the responsrbility for any error
in details. dimensions or otherwise that may exist in such
submittals,
(3) Constituting a blanket approval of dimensions. quern ties,
or details of the matenai or equipment shown. or
14) Approving departures from additional details or rnstruc-
tlons previously furnished by the Engineer Such check
or review shall not relieve the Contractor of the full
responsibility of meeting all of the requirements of the
Contract Documents
M Bound operator's instructions shall be furnished by the
Contractor for equipment furnished under the Contract that
is specifically listed or that is consrdered to be of a special
or complex nature Operator's instructions shall include. in part.
detailed lubrication drawings showing type and frequency of
lubrication Detailed parts drawings shall show location. name
and catalog numbers of parts
N Bound service and parts manuals shall be furnished by the
Contractor for all items of standard manufacture
0. Unless otherwise specified. 4 sets of operators instructions.
service and parts manuals shall be provided
P. All operator instructions. service and parts manuals shall be
bound in permanent binders satisfactory to the Engineer and
shall be furnished to the Owner before final acceptance of the
installation by the Owner.
41. DRAWINGS SHOWING CHANGES DURING CONSTRUCTION
Contractor shall post and keep current a complete set of Contract
Documents. including all Addenda. Change Orders and pertinent
data on the Project site at all times Throughout the progress of
construction. the Contractor shall maintain a careful up -to -date
record of all changes on the Plans and Drawings during actual
construction Upon completion of the Work. and prior to acceptance
9
by the Owner. the Contractor shall file with the Engineer one set
of complete Drawings with all changes and Contractor's field
construction notes neatly and legibly recorded thereon Such
Drawings shall mdreate in part the exact routing. if changed from
Drawing location. of sewer. water, gas chemical piping. fuel oil
tanks and piping. fire protection piping and any other major burred
utility piping. and routing of burred electrical feeder cab'es and
changes to routing of conduit runs which are buried or concealed
in concrete slabs Such information may be used to prepare record
Drawings for the Owner
42. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, SUPPLIES, SERVICES AND
FACILJ'I1ES.
A It is understood that. except as otherwise specifically stated
in the Contract Documents. the Contractor Shall provide and
pay for all materials. labor. tools, equipment. supplies.
machinery, equipment rental, water, heat. light. fuel. power.
transportation. superintendence. temporary construction of
every nature and all other services and facilities of every nature
whatsoever necessary to execute. complete and deliver the Work
in a workmanlike manner within the specified time
B No materials. equipment. or supplies for the Work shall be
purchased by the Contractor or by any Subcontractor subject
to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract
or other agreement by which an interest rs retained by the
seller
4.3. 1M1ORKMANSHIP,MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT.
A All Work done and all material and equipment furnished by
the Contractor shall be new and unused and strictly conform
to the Contract Documents Competent labor. mechanics and
tradesmen shall be used on the Work Experienced manufac-
turer's representatives shall be used to supervise the installation
of equrpment as may be required by the Engineer. Any special
tools or equipment which may be required for the Work shall
be provided by the Contractor '
B The acceptance at any time of materials or equipment by or
in behalf of the Owner shall not be a bar to future rejection
if they are subsequently found to be defective. inferior in quality.
or uniformity. to the material or equipment specified or are
not as represented to the Engineer or Owner
44. QUALITY OF MATERIALS.
In the absence of detailed Specifications. all materials shall conform
to the latest standard of the American Society for Testing Materials
available at the time Notice inviting Contractors to bid r5 published
unless otherwise indicated
45. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY, IN PART, UNDER THE
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
The Contractor agrees that the following are the Contractor's
responsibility, In part. under the Contract Documents.
A The Contractor shall have charge of and be responsible for
the entire Work under the Contract until its complet on in a
good and workmanlike manner and final acceptance by the
Owner Any imperfect. damaged, destroyed or unfaithful Work
included in the Contract Documents shall be corrected before
or upon request of the Owner or the Engineer.
B. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal, State. County.
District and Municipal Laws. Ordinances, (files. Regulations.
Construction Codes and Safety Codes relating to or applicable
to the Work. and shall furnish certrfrcatron of comptrance at
completion of the Work on request of the Engineer or the Owner
C The Contractor shall perform all Work and furnish all supplies.
materials. machinery. equipment. mechanics, tools. plant.
works, labor. transportation. superintendence. testing. facilities.
services. means. methods, techniques. insurance and utilities.
except as otherwise specified in the Contract Documents.
necessary or proper to perform and complete all Work required
by and m accordance with the Contract Documents Contractor
shall pay all taxes incidental to performing said Work and
furnishing such items
Issue 11 /88
D. The Contractor alone shall be completely responsible for
(1) All construction means. methods. techniques. sequences
and coordination of all Work and services under the
Contract Documents. except where specific requirements
are set forth in the Contract Documents:
(2) All conditions at the Project site. including in pa- safety
of all persons and property.
(3) The supervision. direction and control of all Work and
services under the Contract Documents. and
(4) All safety procedures and precautions necessary in
connection with the Work and services
E. These responsibilities of the Contractor shall apply continu-
ously and shall not be limited to normal working hours Review
of construction by the Owner or the Engineer shall not relieve
the Contractor of such responsibilities
F The Contractor shall furnish. erect. maintain. and remove all
construction plant and all temporary works and facilities as
may be required to perform the Contract
G The Contractor alone shall be fully responsible for the safety.
efficiency. and adequacy of his plant. works. machinery.
equipment. facilities and appliances. and for any damage which
may result from their failure or their improper construction.
maintenance or operation
' 46. UNFAVORABLE WEATHER.
During unfavorable weather or cold weather or weather unsuitable
for proper execution of the Work in a first-class manner, al! Work
affected by such condition must be stopped and properly protected
from possible damage Contractor shall be responsible for the extent
and cost of protection of the Work in progress and of completed
York and shall be responsible for the cost of any damage to the
Work. as repair or replacement
1 47. SUNDAYS, HOLIDAYS AND OVERTIME.
Any Work necessary to be performed after regular working hours.
on Sundays. or Legal Holidays. shall be performed without acd.tional
expense to the Owner unless otherwise provided in the Contract
Documents
48. MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTORS.
If. through acts or neglect on the part or the Contractor. any other
contractor or subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage to his work.
the Contractor agrees to settle with such other contractor or
subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other contractor
or subcontractor will so settle If such other contractor or
subcontractor asserts any claim against the Owner on account
of any damage alleged to have been so sustained. the Owner shall
notify the Contractor who shall indemnify and save harmless the
Owner against such claims and for any costs in connection with
such claims
1 49. ACCIDENT PREVENTION- EMERGENCY - AUTHORITY TO ACT.
Precaution shall be exercised by the Contractor at all times for
the protection of all persons. Work and property at the Project
site or adjacent thereto and hazardous conditions shall be guarded
against or eliminated In an emergency affecting the safety of life
or property. the Contractor shall in a diligent manner and without
special instruction or authorization from the Engineer or Owner.
act to prevent such threatened loss. damage or injury Contractor
shall notify the Engineer and the Owner immediately thereafter
Any compensation claimed by the Contractor on account of
emergency work affecting the safety of life or property. other than
the Contractor's Work or property. shall be determined as provided
under the "Claims for Extra Cost" provisions of the Contract subject
to the approval of the Owner and Engineer
5Q PROTECTION OF WORK.
The Contractor, at no additional expense to Owner. shall at all times
safely guard and protect the Work and all material. equipment, etc..
to be incorporated into the Work. provide. erect and maintain
suitable barriers around all excavations or obstructions to prevent
accidents: and provide, place and maintain during the nigrt.
sufficient lights. signals and signs for this purpose on or near the
Work The Contractor shall at all times. until its completion a-d
final acceptance. protect his Work. apparatus. equipment and
material from accidental or any other damage inctud rig in part.
damage by weather. and make good any damages thus occurr.ng
at no additional cost to the Owner
61. PROTECTION OF PROPERTY.
A The Contractor, at no additional expense to the Owner. shall
at all times (1) safely guard the Owner's property and abutting
or adjacent property from injury. loss or damage m connect on
with the Work, (2) protect by false work braces. shoring or
other effective means. all buildings. foundations. walls. fences
and other property along his line of Work. or affected directly
by his Work, including, but not limited to the Owner's property
against damage. (3) cover or otherwise protect stockpiles of
materials to avoid damage to any property from such materia S.
(4) repair, replace or make good any such damage. loss or
injury. unless such is caused directly by the Owner or his 0.:ly
authorized representatives
8. The Contractor shall exercise care to protect from injury all
water and sewer pipe Imes. gas mains. telephone cables. electric
cables, service pipes. and other utilities or fixtures which may
be encountered during the progress of the Work All utilities
and other service facilities or fixtures d damaged. shall be
repaired by the Contractor without additional compensation.
C The Contractor shall personally check and verify utility
mformatron on the Drawings Where existing utilities or
structures are shorn on the Drawings. they are believed to
be accurate but are not guaranteed to be such or that these
are the only utilities or structures in the construction area
Protection is the sole responsibility of the Contractor ano he
must satisfy himself as to the existence and location of all utilmes
and structures.
D The Contractor shall give written notice at least 48 hours be ire
breaking ground, to all persons. superintendents. inspectc.s.
or those otherwise in charge of property. streets. water, gas,
or sewer pipes, telephone or electrical cables, railroads or
otherwise. who may be affected by the Contractor's operat on.
in order that they may remove any obstruction for which they
are responsible and have a representative on the Project s.te
to see that their property is properly protected.
62. PROTECTION OF PERSONS.
A The Contractor shall
(1) At all times protect the lives and health of his emplop_es
under the Contract.
(2) Take all necessary precautions to prevent accidents or
injury and to insure the safety of all persons on. about.
adjacent to or in the vicinity of the Project site.
(3) Comply with all applicable provisions of Federal. State and
Municipal safety and health laws. building codes. and safety
and health recommendations of Trade Associations
(4) Erect and properly maintain at all times. as required by
the conditions and progress of the Work all necessary
safeguards for the protection of persons and shall post
danger signs warning against the hazards created in part
by features of construction such as protruding nails. rod
hoists, well holes, elevator hatchways. scaffolding. window
openings. stairways and falling materials
(5) Designate a responsible member of his organization on
the Work site whose duty shall be the prevention of
accidents.
(6) Provide scaffolding. ladders. or other safeguards for the
protection of those having Right -of -Entry during field
review and observation of the Work
10 Issue 11/88
B Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the 'Williams -
Steiger Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970', including
any amendments thereto and rules and regu'auons issued
pursuant thereto applicable to the Work and performance of
the Contract Where a State in which Work is performed has
passed legislation bearing on Occupational Safety and Health,
such legislation and amendments thereto together with rules
and regulations Issued pursuant thereto shall be complied with
by the Contractor
53. USE OF EXPLOSIVES, WINING OR REMOVAL OF PILES.
WRECKING. EXCAVATION WORK OR OTHER SIMILAR AND
POTENTIALLY DANGEROUS WORK.
A When the use of explosives driving or removal of piles.
wrecking. excavation work or other similarly potentially
dangerous work is necessary for the prosecution of the Work.
the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care so as not to
endanger life or property The Contractor shall be fully
responsible for any and all damages, claims and for the defense
of any actions against the Owner resulting from the prosecution
of such work
6, The Contractor shall notify each public utility company or other
owner of property having structures or improvements in
proximity to the site of the Work. of his intent to perform
potentially dangerous work Such notice shall be given
sufficiently in advance to enable the companies or other owners
of property to take such steps as they may deem necessary
to protect their property from injury Such notice shall not re ieve
the Contractor of responsibility for any damages. cla ms or
the defense of any actions against the Owner resulting from
the performance of such work
C All explosives shall be stored in a secure manner and all storage
places shall be marked clearly "EXPLOSIVES-KEEP OFF . and
shall be in the care of competent watchmen at 3 times
54. PATENTS. COPYRIGHTS AND ROYALTIES.
A The Contractor shall protect. defend. Indemnify and save
harmless the Owner. the Engineer. and each of their off cers.
agents. and employees. from liability of any nature or 'kind.
including cost and expenses for. or on account of. any patented
or unpatented Invention. process. article or appl.ance
manufactured or used in the performance of the Contract.
Including its use by the Owner. or the Owner's officers. agents.
or employees. unless otherwise specifically stipulated in the
Contract Documents
B If the Contractor uses any design. device or materials covered
by letters patent or copyright. he shall provide for such use
by suitable agreement with the Owner of such patented or
copyrighted design. device or material. It is mutually agreed
and understood. that. without exception. the Contract Paces
shall Include all royalties or costs arising from the use of such
design. device or materials. in any way involved In the Work.
The Contractor and his Surety shall indemnify and save
harmless the Owner of the Work from any and all claims for
infringement by reason of the use of such patented or
copyrighted design. device or materials or any trademark or
copyright in connection with the Work and shall indemnify
the Owner for any cost. expense or damage which It may be
obliged to pay by reason of such infringement at anytime during
the prosecution of the Work or after completion of the Work
C. The Contractor shall pay all royalty and license fees
55. CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES.
A The Contractor shall provide and maintain. continually on the
Project site of the Work during its progress. adequate and
competent superintendence of all operations for and in
connection with the Work The Contractor shall provide a
capable superintendent acceptable to the Owner Such
superintendent shall be able to read. write and speak English 57.
fluently and shall be authorized to receive instructions from
the Engineer Said superintendent shall have authority to see
that the Work is carried out in accordance with the Contract
Documents and rn a first class. thorough and workmanlike
manner in every respect
B Incompetent. disorderly. intemperate or incorrigible employees
shall be dismissed by the Contractor or his representative when
requested by the Engineer or the Owner. and such persons
shall not again be permitted to return to the Work without the
written consent of the Owner
C The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold the Owner
harmless from any and all loss or 'damages arising out of
jurisdictional labor disputes or other labor troubles of any kind
that may occur during the construction and performance of
the Contract
D The Contractor shall provide at the request of the Owner such
reasonable Information about his employees as may be
necessary. Including in part. name. address and socia' security
number.
56. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES - TIME AN ESSENTIAL ELEMENT.
A It is mutually understood and agreed by and between the parties
to the Contract that rn the execution of the same. time is an
essential element of the Contract. and it Is important that the
Work be pressed vigorously to completion
B The Contractor agrees that said Work shall be prosecuted
regularly. diligently. and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress
as will unsure full completion thereof within the time specified
It is expressly understood and agreed. by and between the
Contractor and the Owner. that the time for the completion
of the Work set forth in the Contract Documents is a reasonable
time for delivery of equipment and materials and completion
of the Work as specified
C
D
E
The time of commencement and completion of the Work fixed
by the Owner and set forth in the Contract Documents will
determine and be known as the "Contract Period"
11 Contractor shall neglect fail or refuse to complete the Work
within the Contract Period, then for each calendar day that
any Work shall remain uncompleted after the end of the Contract
Period. the amount per calendar day specified in the Proposal
form will be assessed by the Owner. not as a penalty but as
a predetermined and agreed liquidated damage
The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between
the Contractor and the Owner because of the impracticability
and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual
damages the Owner would sustain in the event the Work is
not completed within the Contract Period
F Extensions of time granted by the Owner in accordance with
the provisions of "Extension of Contract Period" shall not waive
liquidated damages unless such extensions granted by the
Owner specifically provide for the waiving of liquidated damages
during and over such period of time extension. Due account
however will be taken of any adjustment in the Contract Period
when the Owner determines that the cause for such adjustment
is unforeseeable, beyond the control of. and without the fault
or neglect of the Contractor.
G The Owner shall have the right to deduct said liquidated
damages from any money In the Owner's hands. otherwise
due, or to become due. to said Contractor. and to sue for and
recover any additional compensation for damages for non-
performance of the Contract at the time stipulated and provided
for in the Contract Documents
H, The assessment of liquidated damages for failure to complete
the Work within the Contract Period shall not constitute a waiver
of the Owner's right to collect any additional damages which
the Owner may sustain by failure of the Contractor to carry
out the terms of his Contract.
RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS.
Whenever Work is done by the Owner's employees or by other
contractors which is continguous to Work included in the Contract
Documents. the respective rights of the various interests involved
11 Issue 11 /8E
shall be established by the Engineer to secure the completion of
the various portions of the Work in general harmony
58. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF THE WORK.
The Engineer shall have authority to recommend that the Owner
suspend the Work. wholly or rn part. for such period or per
of time as the Engineer may deem necessary due to unsuitable
weather or such other conditions considered unfavorable for the
suitable prosecution of the Work. including in part failure of the
Contractor to supply labor, materials or equipment meeting the
requirements of the Contract Documents. or failure to carry out
instructions or 10 perform provisions of the Contract Documents
considered favorable for the orderly or suitable prosecution of the
Work The right to recommend suspension of the Work however.
shall not give rise t0 any duty on the part of Engineer to exero se
this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other party Dur 0g
periods of suspension. the Contractor shall properly protect the
Work from possible injury
58. USE OR OCCUPANCY OF COMPLETED PORTIONS.
A. The Owner shall have the right to take possession of. use or
Occupy any completed or partially completed pompns of the
Work, notwithstanding the time for completing the ensue Work
or any portions may. or may not. have expired Such tak,ng
possession. use or occupancy shall not be deemed an
acceptance of any Work until all Work has been completed
in accordance with the Contract Documents If such prior use
or occupancy occurs during the Contract Period and increases
the cost of. or delays the Work. the Contractor will be granted
such extra compensation or extension of time. or both. as the
Engineer may recommend. subject to the approval of the Ow-ter
8 Consent of Surety and endorsement from the Insurance career
or carriers permitting prior occupancy or use of any Completed
or partially completed portions of the Work by the Owner maII
be secured by the Contractor Contractor and his Surety hereby
agree that such consent shall not be unduly withheld
80 AUTHORITY OF ENGINEER.
A The Engineer. through us duly authorized representatives. shall
furnish engineering or architectural services during constr,jc-
bon of the Work as an agent of the Owner to the extent provided
in the Contract Documents He shall observe and review the
Work in the process of construction or erection Compliance
with the Contract Documents shall be the Contractor's
responsibility notwithstanding such observation or review The
Engineer has authority to recommend suspension of the Work
by the Owner when it appears such suspension may be
necessary to accomplish the proper implementation of the
intent of the Contract Documents The authority to observe.
review or recommend suspension of the Work. or exercise such
other authority as may be granted by the Contract Documents.
shall not be construed or interpreted to mean supervision of
construction, which is the Contractor's responsi bihty, nor make
the Engineer responsible for providing a safe place for the
performance of Work by the Contractor or by the Contractor's
employees, or those of suppliers or Subcontractors, or for
access. visits. use. work. travel. or occupancy by any other
person The Engineer shall also have the authority to reject
any Work. materials. or equipment which do not conform to
the Contract Documents and to decide technical questions
which arise in the execution of the Work
8 The Engineer shall determine the amount. quality. acceptability,
and fitness of the several kinds of Work. materials. equipment
and supplies which are to be paid for under the Contract and
shall decide questions which may arise in relation to said Work
and its compliance with the Contract Documents The
Engineer's estimates and decisions shall be final and
conclusive. except as otherwise expressly provided In case
any question shall arise between the parties to the Contract
relative to the Contract Documents. the determination or
decision of the Engineer shall be a condition precedent to the
right of the Contractor to receive any money or payment for
Work under the Contract affected in any manner or to any extent
by such question
C. The Engineer shall decide the meaning and Intent of any portion
of the Contract Documents where the same may be found
obscure or be in dispute
61. DECISIONS OF ENGINEER.
The Engineer. through Its duly authorized representatives. shall
within a reasonable time after presentation, make decisions in
writing on claims between the Contractor and Owner
62. PERSONAL LIABILITY OF ENGINEER.
In carrying out any of the prwisions of the Contract or In exercising
any power or authority granted thereby. there shall be no liability
upon the Engineer or 1s duly authorized representatives. either
personally or as an official of the Owner, it being understood that
in such matters they act as agents and representatives of the Owner
63. AUTHORITY AND DEITIES OF ENGINEER'S FIELD
REPRESENTATIVES.
A. Field representatives of the Engineer may be stationed on the
Project site to report to the Engineer as to the progress of
the Work the manner in which it is being performed. and also
to report whenever it appears that material furnished and Work
performed by the Contractor fail to fulfill the requirements of
the Contract Documents The representative may direct the
attention of the Contractor to such failure or infringement but
such construction review shall not relieve the Contractor from
any obligation to furnish acceptable materials or to provide
completed construction in a safe and satisfactory manner rn
every particular
B In case any dispute arises between the Engineer's field
representative and the Contractor, as to materials furnished or
the satisfactory performance of the Work. the representative
shall have the authority to reject matenais or recommend
suspension of the Work by the Owner until the question and
issue can be referred to and deeded by the Engineer Such
authority. however. shall not give rise to any duty on the part
of Engineer's field representative to exercise this right for the
benefit of Contractor or any other party Field representatives
are not authorized to revoke. alter. enlarge. relax or release
any requirements of the Contract Documents nor to issue
Instructions contrary to the Contract Documents Field
representatives shall in no case act as foremen. superintend-
ents. or perform other duties for the Contractor or interfere
with the management of the Work by the Contractor
C All condemned Work shall be promptly taken out and replaced
by satisfactory Work. and all condemned materials shall be
promptly removed from the vicinity of the Work Should the
Contractor fall or refuse to comply with instructions in this
respect the Owner may withhold payment. proceed to declare
the Contract in default. or both
D Re- examination of questioned Work may be ordered by the
Engineer with prior written consent of the Owner. and if so
ordered, the Work must be uncovered by the Contractor If
such Work was performed in accordance with the Contract
Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of re- examination
and replacement If such Work was not performed in
accordance with the Contract Documents. the Contractor shall
pay such cost. unless he shall prove that defect In the Work
was caused by others than the Contractor or his Subcontractors
or anyone else under the Contractor's direction and control,
and in the event the Owner is at fault. the Owner shall pay
such cost
E Any defective materials or workmanship may be rejected by
the Engineer at any time before the final acceptance of the
Work. even though the same may have been previously
overlooked and estimated for payment.
84. CHANGED OR EXTRA WORK.
A The Owner, through a Change Order prepared by the Engineer,
reserves the right at any time during the progress of the Work
to make necessary alterations of. deviations from. additions to
or deletions from the Contract, or may require the performance
of extra Work not covered by the Contract Documents. but
12 Issue 11/88
forming a part of the Work contracted for. provided however.
the Contractor shall not proceed with any such Changed or
Extra Work without a Change Order.
The nature and extent of the proposed Changed or Extra Work
shall be defined In writing with a Change Proposal Request
(CPR) by the Engineer and submitted with a written request
to the Contractor to indicate any change in construction
contract cost or time for the proposed Changed or Extra Work
The Contractor shall return the Change Proposal Request (CPR)
to the Engineer with a detailed cost breakdown The Engineer
may then submit the Change Proposal Request (CPR) to the
Owner with a recommendation regarding acceptance
If the Owner accepts the Change Proposal Request (CPR). the
Engineer will notify the Contractor and prepare a written
Change Order If the Owner does not accept the Change
Proposal Request (CPR), the Engineer will notify the Contractor
and the proposed Changed or Extra Work shall not be done
The Change Proposal Request (CPR) is not a CHANGE ORDER
and work is not authorized until a formal CHANGE ORDER has
been executed by the Owner,
Changed or Extra Work shall in no way invalidate the Contract
or the Contractors bond. but the difference in cost shall be
added to or deducted from the amount of the Contract. as
the case may be Adjustments. if any in the amounts to be
Paid to the Contractor by reason of any such Changed or Extra
Work shall be determined by one of the following methods
in the order as listed
(1) MethodA
Unit prices contained in the Contractor's Proposal for the
same type or class of Work
(2) Method B
By an acceptable unit price proposal from the Contractor
(3) Method C
By an acceptable lump sum price proposal from the
Contractor
(4) Method D
If neither Method B nor C can be agreed upon before the
Changed or Extra Work is started. then the Contractor shall
be paid the "actual field cost' of the Work plus 15 percent
B Whenever any Changed or Extra Work is to be done. for which
unit prices for the same type or class of Work are contained
in the Contract Documents. such Work shall be done and will
be measured and paid for pursuant to "Method A" hereinabove
set forth and the applicable portion of the Contract Documents
C Methods B and C shall include an itemized cost breakdown
for the material and labor involved. and a maximum of 15
percent for overhead and profit shall be allocated to the
Contractor or Subcontractor which actually performs the Work
In determining the amount payable to the Contractor an
additional 5 percent may be added to the amount payable to
a Subcontractor if the Subcontractor actually performed the
Work. but no "pyramiding' or additional percentage will be
authorized for any Work done by a Sub - subcontractor
D Resort will not be had. in any case. to Method 0 until negotiation
has been entered into by the parties hereto under Methods
B, or C as hereinabove set forth
E. When any change or extra Work is performed under Method
D. the term "actual field cost" of such change or extra Work
is hereby defined to be and shall include
(1) The actual payroll cost of all workers such as foremen.
equipment operators. mechanics. and laborers. for the time
spent actually performing the change or extra Work
(2) All materials and supplies incorporated in the Changed or
Extra Work
(3) All machinery and equipment for the t me actually employed
or used in the performance of the Changed or Extra Work
based on the appropriate State Department of Highway's
Equipment Schedule in force at the date of the Change
• Order
(4) Any transportation charges necessarily incurred in
connection with any equipment authorized by the Engineer
for use on said Changed or Extra Work but which is not
already on the site
(5) All power. fuel. lubricants water. and similar operating
expenses as well as other expendable materials
(6) All incidental expenses incurred as a direct result of such
Changed or Extra Work. including payroll taxes and a
prorate portion of premium on the Performance. Payment
and Maintenance Bond. and. where the premiums therefore
are based on payroll costs. on Public Liability and Property
Damage Insurance. Workmen's Compensation Insurance
and Occupational Disease Disability Insurance. Builder's
Risk. and other insurance required by the Contract
(7) No repairs. replacements or other forms of overhead
expense shall be included in "actual field costs'
F The Engineer may direct the form in wrtich the accounts of
the actual field costs shall be kept ant may also specify in
writing, before the Work commences. the method of doing the
Work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment. if
required. which shall be used in the performance of any
Changed or Extra Work under Method D. In the event that
machinery and heavy construction equipment are required for
such Changed or Extra Work, the authorization and basis of
Payment for the use thereof shall be stipulated in the Change
Order
G The 15 percent of the "actual field cost' to be paid to the
Contractor or Subcontractor. as applicable. shall cover and be
full compensation for the profits. overhead. general superin.
tendence. and field office expense. and all other elements of
cost not embraced within the "actual field cost' as herein
defined In determining the amount payable to the Contractor
an additional 5 percent may be added to the amount payable
to a Subcontractor if the Subcontractor actually performed the
Work. but no "pyramiding" or additional percentage will be
authorized for any Work done by Sub•subcontractors
H Daily reconciliation of materials and labor shall be made and
signed by the Engineer and the Contractor's Superintendent
I. No claim for any Changed or Extra Work of any kind will be
allowed unless the Work is ordered and approved by a Change
Order.
J No anticipated profits will be allowed for Work deleted
K The Contractor shall furnish satisfactory bills. payrolls and
vouchers covering all items of cost and when requested by
the Owner. give the Owner access to accounts relating thereto
L. Any Changed or Extra Work may be ordered by the Owner
through the Engineer by means of a Change Order without
invalidating the Contract and shall be considered a part of
the Contract. subject to all of its terms, conditions. stipulations.
review. guarantees. and tests. and may be performed without
notice to the Surety on the Contractor's bond The Contractor
and Surety hereby agree to these provisions
M The Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work not
Involving an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract
Time. which are consistent with the overall intent of the Contract
Documents These may be accomplished by a Field Order and
shall be binding on Owner, and also on Contractor who shall
perform the change promptly If Contractor believes that a Field
13 Issue 11/88
Order justifies an increase in the Contract Price or Contract
Time. Contractor shall make a claim under "Cla.ms for Extra
Cost' before doing the Work
65. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST.
A In case any instructions. either oral or written, aooear to the
Contractor to involve a Changed or Extra Work for which. in
his opinion. he should receive extra compensation. he stall
make a written request to the Engineer for a Change Order
authorizing such change or extra Work Should a differe ^ce
of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute a change
or extra Work. or concerning the payment thereof. and the
Engineer requires its performance under the Contract
Documents. the Contractor shall proceed with the Work after
presenting written notice of claim for extra cost to the Owner
through the Engineer and shall keep an accurate account of
the - 'actual field cost' thereof as provided for in Method D
under Changed or Extra Work The Contractor wilt thereby not
waive any right he might have to compensation for the claimed
extra cost in connection with a change or extra Work The
matter will be submitted to the Owner for final determinaton
as to whether or not a change or extra Work was involved.
and if so. the amount due to the Contractor
8. Any claims for extra cost pursuant to thus section. together
with supporting documents and receipts must be filed wth
the Engineer within 15 consecutive calendar days after
performing the Work for which extra cost Is claimec The Owner
shall have the right to reject any claim for extra cost if the
foregoing procedure is not followed.
C In giving verbal instructions. the Engineer shall have author ty
to make minor changes that do not involve extra cost or time
of performance and are not inconsistent with the des gn
concept and purposes of the contracted Work: but otherwse.
except in an emergency endangering life or property no change
or extra Work shall be performed without a Change 0rcer
approved by the Engineer and the Owner. and no claim for
extra cost shall be valid unless so approved. except as otherw se
provided herein
66. EXTENSION OF CONTRACT PERIOD.
A The Contractor expressly covenants and agrees that in
undertaking to complete the Work within the Contract Perod
fixed in the Contract Documents, he has taken into cons d-
eration and made allowances for all delays and hindrances
incidental to such Work. whether growing out of delays in
securing materials or workers. or otherwise
B Should the Contractor be delayed in the prosecution and
completion of the Work by any cause beyond his control. he
shall have no claim or right of action for damages from the
Owner for any such cause or delay. unless the cause or delay
is the result of fraud or active interference by the Owner The
Contractor will in such case be granted an extension of the
time specified for completion of the Work as the Owner may
award in writing on account of such delay. provided. however.
that claim for such extension of time is made by the Contractor
to the Owner. through the Engineer. in writing. within 10
consecutive calendar days from the time when the alleged
cause for delay arises The Owner reserves the right to withhold
granting of any time extension until the stipulated Contract
Period is about to expire
C The Owner. at the Owners sole discretion. may waive the above
requirements and grant extensions of time for any reason or
reasons the Owner deems valid
D Time extensions. however. will not be granted for rain, wind.
flood or other natural phenomena of normal intensity for the
locality where Work is performed For purpose of determining
extent of delay attributable to unusual weather phenomena. a
determination shall be made by comparing the weather for at
least any continuous one -fourth Of the Contract Period involved
with the average of the preceding 5 year climatic range during
the same time interval based on US Weather Bureau statistics
for the locality where the Work is performed
14
E An extension of the Contract Period may be granted cy the
Owner for any of the following reasons
(1) Additional Work resulting from a mod.f.catron cf the
Contract Documents for the Project
(2) Any preference. priority or allocation orde• duly iss..ed by
the Government
(3) Unforeseeable cause beyond the control and without the
fault or negligence of the Contractor. including. Lit not
restricted to acts of God which are unusual weather
phenomena. or acts of the public enemy. acts of the Owner.
acts of another contractor in the performance of a contract
with the Owner. fires. epidemics. quarantine restrictions
industry -wide strikes. freight embargoes and severe
weather as provided above.
(4) Delays of a Contractors Subcontractors or sucpliers
occasioned by any of the causes specifies in (2) a ^d (31
hereof
F Provided. however. the Contractor shall not fy the Owner
through the Engineer of the alleged cause of such de ay as
hereinbefore required The Owner shall ascerta n the facts and
the extent of the delay with the assistance of the Engineer
G No extension of the Contract Period will be allowed for va'iation
between Contract quantities and actual quantities which cannot
be predetermined and which amount is more or less than 25%
of the Contract quantities
67. CERTIFICATES. WARRANTIES, AND GUARANTEES.
Contractor shall provide a minimum of 6 copies of any wa•ranty.
guaranty or certificate as may be required by the Contract
Documents to the Owner through the Engineer prior r the
acceptance of the Work by the Owner
68. CONSTRUCTION REVIEW AND TESTING OF MATERIALS AND
EQUIPMENT.
A During the progress of the Work. it shall be subject to the
review and observation of the Engineer The Contractc• shaft
afford every reasonable facility and assistance to the Engineer
to make such review If any Work is covered up without anraval
or consent of the Engineer it must. if required by the Eng neer.
be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense
6 The fact that the Engineer is on the Project site shall not be
taken as an acceptance of the Contractor's Work or relieve
the Contractor from performing the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents. Contractor shall notify the Engineer
upon completion of his Contract. and the Work shall be given
final construction review by the Engineer. and any tests and
re -tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer If all pans of the
Work are acceptable and substantially comply with the Contract
Documents. a recommendation of final acceptance will be
made by the Engineer to the Owner If parts of the Work are
not acceptable and require additional Work by the Contractor
to complete the project. necessitating additional review.
calculations. or redesign by the Engineer. the cost or such
additional reviews. calculations. or redesign including time.
travel and lodging. shall be paid for by the Contractor to the
Owner who will reimburse the Engineer. The Owner may offset
said monies by deducting that amount from the payments due
the Contractor
C Contractor shall submit to the Engineer. at least 7 days in
advance of construction and without charge. samples or
specifications of materials he proposes to use and shall not
use these materials until he has received approval from the
Engineer
D Contractor shall furnish tests and reports on tests of all materials
and equipment called for in the Contract Documents The
testing laboratory must be approved by the Owner and the
Contractor shall pay the cost of the tests. and necessary retests.
Issue 11/88
including all transportation charges and other direct cos:s
unless otherwise provided by the Contract Documents
E All tests and retests. unless otherwise provided. shall be in
accordance with the pertinent sections of the latest edition
of the Standards applicable to the material or dev ces to be
tested A partial fist of the principal societies referred to arc
their abbreviations follow
AA S HTO
ACI
AISC
ANSI
ASHRAE
A S TM
A WWA
CS
ISA
FS
NEC
NEMA
UL
American Association of State Highway are
Transportation Officials
American Concrete Institute
American Institute of Steel Construction
American National Standards Institute
American Society of Heating. Refrigeration arc
As Conditioning Engineers
American Society for Testing Matena•s
American Water Works Association
Commerical Standards
Instrument Society of America
Federal Specifications
National Electric Code
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
Underwriters Laboratories Inc
F All parts of the Work and improvements shall conform to the
standards of construction as given in detail under the various
Items of the Contract Documents. and if they do not conform.
shall be made to do so by rebuilding or replacing or otherwise
as instructed by the Engineer or Owner, without further cos
to the Owner before acceptance shall be made
G II after the commencement of the Work the Engineer determines
that any Work requires special inspection. testing. or appro‘a
not otherwise provided for, the Engineer will. upon written
authorization from the Owner. instruct the Contractor to order
such special inspection. testing. or approval. and the Contractor
shall give timely notice of its readiness and of the date arrange:
so the Engineer may observe such inspecting testing, cr
approval If such special inspection or testing revea 5 a failure
01 the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract
Documents or with respect to the performance of the Wors
with laws. ordinances, rules. regulations or orders of any public
authority having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall bear all costs
thereof, Including the Engineer's additional services made
necessary by such failure
H Required certificates of inspection testing or approval shall be
secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered by him to
the Engineer
69. "GOOD REPAIR" PERIOD.
A The Contractor hereby agrees to keep all Work constructed
under the Contract in Good Repair for a minimum period of
one (1) year unless a longer period is otherwise specified in
the Contract Documents, from the date of acceptance of the
Work by the Owner No provision of the Contract Documents
shall be valid which limits the "Good Repair" period to less
than one (1) year from the date of acceptance of the Work
by the Owner
B It is intended that this provision shall apply whether or not
bond is required. as a personal obligation of the Contractor
C The obligations of the Contractor as herein provided shall be
M addition to and not in limitation of any obligations imposed
upon him by special guarantees required by the Contract
Documents or otherwise prescribed by law
71 REMEDY OF DEFECTS, DETERIORATION OR DEPARTURE FROM
STANDARDS.
A If. m the opinion of the Owner. a defect exists. or functional
or structural deterioration takes place. or serious departure from
the standards of original construction exists In the Work or
improvements as stated In the definition of "Good Repair ". the
Owner or the Owner's representative shall so notify the
Contractor by registered or certified letter mailed to the address
given in the Contractor's proposal. or to the Contractor s last
business address known to him who gives the notice. and a
copy of such nonce will be sent to the Surety 11 is mut..ally
agreed that such notice shall be sufficient and adequate_ If
the Contractor shall not proceed to remedy such def sits.
deficiencies. deterioration or departures as are called PP his
Mention in the notice within 10 consecutive calendar days
after ma ling of notice, the Owner shall cause the repa rs to
be made as the Owner deems best. and the entire cost thereof
shall be paid by the Contractor or his Surety or deducted from
any amounts as are due to the Contractor from the Owner
The Owner may remedy defects or cause repairs to be made
in any part of the Work in accordance with this procedure
without declaring the Contract in default as stipulate: in
Paragraphs 81. 82 and 83 or terminating the Contract as
provider- under Paragraph 80
B In lieu of remedying defects. deterioration or departure `rom
standards. Owner may choose to accept the defective pc-:ion
of the Work The Owners acceptance of such defective pc ^ion
of the Work is expressly conditional on the Contractor prow ding
an adequate reduction in the Contract Price, or If after final
acceptance. Contractor providing an adequate cash payment
to Owner
71. VARIATION FROM ESTIMATED QUANTITIES.
The Contractor may reasonably expect a variation in estimated
quantities such that the total payment for the completed Work may
range from 75 to 125 percent of the total amount of the Contract
based on the estimated quantities The Contractor will nc: be
allowed any claims for anticipated profits. for loss of prof is or
for any damages because of a difference between the estimate of
any !tern and the amount of the item actually required or for the
elimination of any part of the Work. Funds for construction cf the
Work herein contemplated are limited, The Owner reserves the ••ght
to eliminate or reduce the items of the Proposal or any of the Work
as may be required to bring the cost of the Work within the limits
or available funds
72. PROGRESS PAYMENTS.
A Where progress or monthly payments are permissible b; law.
and pro.ided for by the Contract Documents such payments
in the amount indicated in the Contract Documents sr'I be
paid unless otherwise provided by law
8 When monthly progress payments are authorized. the
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer an itemized application
for payment on forms approved by the Engineer. supported by
such data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment as
the Owner or the Engineer may require
C If payments are to be authorized on account of materials.
supplies and equipment not incorporated In the Work. but
delivered and suitably stored at the Project site and necessary
for the orderly prosecution of the Work. the Contractor shall
furnish with his application for payment bills of sale, bills of
lading. invoices. or such other evidence as may be appropriate
and satisfactory to the Engineer and the Owner that establ.shes
(1) Actual cost. Including transportation to the Project site. of
such materials. supplies and equipment.
(21 Title thereof in Owner upon payment,
(3) Appropriate insurance coverage to protect the Owner's
interest therein upon payment
D The Contractor warrants that title to all materials. supplies and
equipment covered by an application for payment. whether
Incorporated in the Work or not. will pass to the Owner. soon
receipt of payment by the Contractor. free and clear of all liens.
claims. security Interests or encumbrances. and that such
materials. supplies or equipment furnished or Installed comply
with the applicable requirements of the Contract Documents
15 Issue 11/88
E. The passing of title to the Owner as herein provided shall not
be construed as relieving the Contractor of the sole and
complete responsibility for
(1) The care and protection of the materials. supplies.
equipment and Work for which payment has been made
(2) The restoration of any damaged or destroyed Work.
materials, supplies or equipment Such responsibiLty shall
continue until all Work under the Contract has been
completed by the Contractor and accepted by the Owner
F. Under no circumstances shall payment constitute a waver of
the Owner's right to require the Contractor to fulfill ab of the
terms and conditions of his Contract
73. PAYMENT WITHHELD.
A The Engineer may recommend withholding payment or. on
account of subsequently discovered evidence. may nullify the
whole or part of any application for payment to such extent
as may be necessary to protect the Owner from loss on account
of any one or more of the following
(1) Defective Work not remedied
(2) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable
filing of claims by other panes against the Contractor
(3) Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to
Subcontractors or for labor. materials. equipment or for
equipment rental
(4) A reasonable doubt that the Contract can be completed
for the balance then unpaid
(5) Damage to another Contractor
(6) Failure or refusal by the Contractor to comply with an
instruction of the Engineer within a reasonable time
(7) Unsatisfactory prosecution of the Work
(8) Liquidated damages payable by the Contractor.
(9) Any other violation of or failure to comply with the provisions
of the Contract Documents
8 When the above grounds are removed. payment shall be made
for amounts withheld because of them The right to withhold
payment however. shall nor preclude the Owner from his right
to declare the Contractor in default of his Contract for any
of the reasons stipulated under "Contracts in Default'
74. FINAL MEASUREMENTS.
Final measurements. on unit price contracts, will be made by the
Engineer. and the Contractor shall at his own expense provide help
and other assistance as may be required for making same, 78.
75. PAYMENT, USE OR OCCUPANCY OF WORK NOT EVIDENCE OF
PERFORMANCE.
No progress or final payment. nor any partial or entire use or
occupancy of the Work or improvement. nor acceptance thereof.
by the Owner shall be evidence of the performance of the Contract
or construed to be acceptance of defective Work or improper
materials. either wholly or in part The Contractor's obligation to
perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents shall be absolute.
78. ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT. 79.
A As soon as the Work has been substantially and satisfactorily
completed. the Engineer will make a final estimate and prepare
a certificate stating that the Work provided for under the Contract
has been completed in substantial compliance with the
Contract Documents and is recommended for acceptance by
him under the terms and conditions thereof. with stated
qualification. if any. and the balance found to be due the
Contractor according to the terms of payment shall be paid
by the Owner within 30 days after the date of the 1 nal estimate.
provided, however. if any applicable Municipal Ordnance. State.
County. District. or Federal law designates the manner of f.nal
payment. it shall be followec in lieu of the manner of f.nal
payment outlined above
B Prior to receiving final payment. the Contractor d anc as
requested by the Owner or by the Engineer. shall file with Ine
Owner. (1) a receipt showing payment in full, or 12) a we ver
of claim and hen. from earn Subcontractor. materialman
supplier. manufacturer and dearer for all labor. ep.apment and
material used or furnished by each on the Wcrc and (3) a
complete release of all claims and liens which ma/ have ar sen
under the Contract In lieu thereof, the Owner may req_est
and the Contractor shall file statements showing the balance
due on all accounts The manner in which settlement is made
by the Owner with the Cortractor shall not release the
Contractor or his Surety under the payment pro.sions o1 his
bond
77. ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT CONSTITUTES RELEASE.
A. The acceptance of final payment by the Contractor shall operate
as a release to the Owner and to the Engineer of all cla ms
and liens by the Contractor for all Work and services furnished
in connection with the Contract and for every act and neglect
of the Owner or of the Engineer. and others relating to or aris.ng
out of the Work under the Contract. except for clan's previously
made in writing and still unsettled
B No payment. final or otherwise. shall operate tc release the
Contractor or his Surety from any opiigatiors under the
Contract or under the Performance. Payment anc Maintenance
Bond. including. but not limited to any one or more of the
following
(1) Obligations arising from or relating to latent cefects
(2) Faulty Work or material appearing after any payment
(3) Failure of the construction materials equipment or fixtures
to perform efficiently in accordance with the • equirements
of the Contract Documents
(4) Unsettled claims
(5) Claims for non - payment o' laborers mechar cs. material-
men or suppliers. m for equipment used or rented
(6) Claims under the maintenance requirements orovidec for
by the bond or "Good Repa.r" requirements of the Contract
Documents or any special guarantees proviced for under
the Contract Documents
(7) Claims for any other obligations otherwise prescribed by
law
OWNER'S RIGHT TO CORRECT DEFICIENCIES.
If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the Work properly
in accordance with the Contract Documents. the Owner. after 10
consecutive calendar days following written notice to the Contractor
and his Surety. may without pre ;i.dice to any other remedy the
Owner may have, and without declaring the Contract in default
or terminating the Contract, correct such deficiencies in Work
intended to become a permanent part of the Protect. anc may deduct
the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the
Contractor or the entire cost thereof shall be paid by the Contractor
or his Surety.
SUSPENSION OF WORK BY OWNER.
The Owner reserves the right to suspend and reinstate execution
of the whole or any part of the Work contractec for without
invalidating the provisions of the Contract in any way Orders for
suspension or reinstatement of the Work will be issued by the Owner
to the Contractor in writing
16 Issue 11/88
8O RIGHT OF OWNER TO TERMINATE CONTRACT.
Should it appear at any time that the Work is not being prosecuted
with sufficient competence or rapidity to insure the proper
completion of the Work within the stipulated time. and. if after 10
consecutive calendar days following written notice to the Contractor
and the Surety, he fails to increase the quality or the quantity of
his Work. or both. the Owner reserves the right to annul and cancel
the Contract and relet the Work or any part thereof, or at the Owners
option to complete it by day labor The Contractor shall not be
entitled to any claims for damages on account of such annulment.
and he will be held liable for costs and expenses incurred in reletting
or otherwise completing the Work under the Contract All money
due the Contractor will be retained until the Work is completed
and all expenses and costs have been deducted and any money
due the Owner, after such deductions have been made. shall be
paid by the Contractor or his Surety who hereby agree to these
• prOuISiOn5
81. CONTRACTS IN DEFAULT.
The Owner may declare the Contract in default for any one or more
of the following reasons as determined by the Owner in his sole
discretion
A Failure to complete the Work within the Contract Period or any
proper extension thereof granted by the Owner
B Failure or refusal to comply with an instruction of the Engineer
within a reasonable time
C Failure or refusal to remove rejected materials. equipment or
supplies
D Failure or refusal to remedy anew any defective or unacceptable
Work
E Bankruptcy or insolvency or the making of an assignment for
the benefit of creditors
F Failure to provide a qualified super.ntendent. or sufficient and
competent workers or Subcontractors to carry on the Work
in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner, or failure to prosecute
the Work in accordance with the agreed schedule of
completion
G Failure to provide proper materials equipment or supplies
H Disregard or violation of any important provisions of the
Contract Documents as determined by the Engineer
I. Disregard of laws. ordinances. rules, regulations or orders of
any public body having jurisdiction, or the violation of any
construction or safety codes
82. PROCEDURE FOR DECLARING CONTRACT IN DEFAULT.
The Owner may declare the Contract in default by giving written
notice to the Contractor and his Surety to that effect. Said notice
shall contain the reason or reasons for default and shall fix a day
certain. not less than 10 consecutive calendar days after the date
• of said notice. when the Contract shall be declared in default. unless
the Contractor or his Surety remedies the default to Owner's
satisfaction or makes satisfactory arrangement with the Owner for
115 remedy prior to the day certain fixed in said notice of declaring
the Contract in default The Owner may, at its sole option, extend
the day certain for declaring the Contract in default without
prejudice to the Owner's right to thereafter declare the Contract
in default If the Contractor or his Surety tail to remedy the default
or to make satisfactory arrangements for its remedy prior to the
dale set for declaring the Contract in default. or any extension
thereof. the Contract shall be declared in default
83. COMPLETION OF CONTRACTS IN DEFAULT.
A If for any reason a Contract is declared in default. the Surety
shall have the right to take over and perform the Contract.
provided, however. it the Surety does not commence
performance thereof within 10 consecutive calendar days after
date of notice to the Contractor and his Surety that the Contract
has been declared in default, the Owner. without process or
action at law. may take over all or any portion of the Work
and complete it at Owners option. ether by re'etting or by
day labor, for the account and at the expense of the Contractor
B Whether the Surety takes over and completes the Contract.
or the Owner takes over and complexes it by resetting cr by
Say labor. the Contractor and his Surety shall be liable to the
Owner for any cost in excess of the original. Contract price
expended in completing the Work, including in part. any d rect
and indirect costs and professional services, and any liquidated
damages stipulated in the Proposal form, togey'er with such
other damages which the Owner may suffer on accou-: of
the Contractor's nonperformance of his Contract The Owner
may waive such portion of the liquidated damages as may
accrue after the Work is in condition for the safe. conven.ent
and beneficial use or occupancy by the Owner for all of the
purposes for which it was intended.
C In the event the Owner takes over the Work and prosecutes
the same to completion, either by relemng or py day !apor.
the Contractor shall peaceably relinquish possession of said
Work or the parts thereof specified in the above notice of
declared default to the Contractor and his Surety
D The Owner may. at Owners option and al a rental which is
considered reasonable. take possess on of and utilize in
completing the Work such materials. appliances equipment.
tools. plant. and machinery on the site of the Worn and su table
therefore until the Work is complete
E Alt money due the Contractor will be retained „no! the Work
is completed and a'i expenses and costs have been deducted
and any money due the Owner after such seductions or
adjustments have been made as herein provided shall be paid
by the Contractor or his Surety who hereby agree to all
provisions herein
F Neither the Owner, Engineer. nor any of their officers, agents
or employees shall be in any way liable or accccntable tc the
Contractor or his Surety for the method by which the completion
of the said Work, or any portion thereof may be accompl shed
or for the price paid therefore Should the cost of Contract
completion. including all proper charges. be less than the
original Contract Price. the amount so saved s'-all be pad to
the Contractor
G The Owner. notwithstanding the method used in completing
the Contract. shall not forfeit the right to recover damages from
the Contractor or his Surety for the Contractors fa•lure to timely
complete his entire Contract The Contractor shall not be
entitled to any claim for damages on account of the method
used by the Owner in completing the Contract
H Maintenance of the Work shall continue to be the Contractor's
and his Surety's responsibilities as provided for in the bond
or "Good Repair' requirements of the Contract Documents or
any special guarantees provided for under the Contract
Documents or any other obligations otherwise prescribed by
law
84. OWNER'S REMEDIES CUMULATIVE AND NONWANER,
No right or remedy conferred upon or reserved to the Owner by
the Contract shall be considered exclusive of any other remedy
or contractual right, but the same shall be distinct. separate and
cumulative. and shall be in addition to every other remedy existing
at law or in equity or by statue. and every remedy given by the
Contract to the Owner may be exercised from time to time as often
as the occasion may arise. or as may be deemed expedient No
delay or omission on the part of the Owner to exercise any right
or remedy arising from any default on the part of the Contractor
shall impair any such right or remedy or shall be construed to
be a waiver of any such default or an acquiescence thereto or
otherwise affect the right of the Owner to enforce the same in
the event of any subsequent breach or default by the Contractor
17 Issue 11/88
II 00805 -1
II 01 92820 SECTION 00805 01
02 02
03 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS 03
' 04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
II 08 1.01 MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 08
09 09
10 A. In Paragraph 2. DEFINITIONS, after subparagraph BB. WORK, 10
' 11 add the following subparagraph: 11
12 12
13 "CC. CONTRACT PERIOD. The time period commencing 13
II 14 on the date of issuance of Notice to Proceed 14
15 and concluding after expiration of the number 15
16 of days defined in the Contract Documents for 16
17 the satisfactory completion of the work." 17
II 18 18
19 In Paragraph 2. DEFINITIONS, modify subparagraph R. PROPOSAL, to read as 19
20 follows: 20
I 21 21
22 All references to "Proposal" in the General Conditions shall be read as 22
23 "Bid"." 23
' 24 24
25 B. In Paragraph 10. EQUIPMENT STIPULATION, after the paragraph 25
26 number and title, delete all text in subparagraph C. and 26
27 substitute the following: 27
II 28 28
29 "See Sections 00100 and 01062." 29
30 30
31 C. In Paragraph 11. SUBSTITUTIONS, "OR APPROVED EQUAL" CLAUSE, 31
32 after subparagraph B., add the following subparagraph: 32
33 33
II 34 "C. Comply with Section 01640 for specific methods of 34
35 requesting approval." 35
36 36
37 D. In Paragraph 15. CONTRACT SECURITY, subparagraph A., delete 37
II
38 "Coincident with the execution . security for the 38
39 following" and substitute the following: 39
40 40
' 41
42 "Coincident with the execution of the Contract, the Contractor shall 41
furnish Performance and Payment Bonds as security for the items listed 42
43 below. The Performance Bond must include a modification to provide for 43
II 44 maintenance of the completed work as described in item (5), below." 44
45 45
46 E. Replace Paragraph 16, CONTRACTORS & SUBCONTRACTORS INSURANCE, with the 46
47 following: 47
II 48 48
49 "A. Contractor shall carry insurance in the following types and amounts 49
50 for the duration of this Contract, which shall include items owned by 50
' 51 Owner in care, custody and control of Contractor prior and during 51
52 construction and warranty period, and furnish Certificates of 52
53 Insurance along with copies of policy declaration pages and all 53
' WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
II 01
02
03
' 04
05
06
I 07
08
09
10
I 11
12
13
I 14
15
16
I 17
18
19
20
I 21
22
23
' 24
25
26
I 27
28
29
30
I 31
32
33
I 34
35
36
1 38
38
39
40
I 41
42
43
II 44
45
46
48
I 48
49
50
' 51
52
53
1
II
00805 -2
policy endorsements as evidence thereof: 01
(1) Statutory Worker's Compensation and minimum 5100,000 02
Employers Liability Insurance. 03
(2) Commercial General Liability Insurance with minimum limits of 04
5500,000 per occurrence and 51,000,000 Aggregate or 5500,000 for 05
this designated project and 5100,000 Fire Damage. 06
(3) Automobile Liability Insurance for all owned, nonowned and 07
hired vehicles with minimum limits for Bodily Injury of $250,000 08
for each person and $500,000 for each occurrence and Property 09
Damage limits of 5100,000 or Combined Single Limit of $600,000. 10
(4) On all new or remodeling building projects: All Builders 11
Risk Insurance for insurable building projects shall be insured 12
in the amount of the contract price for such improvements. Owner 13
and Contractor waive all rights against each other for damages 14
caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered by Builders 15
Risk Insurance required under this section, except as to such 16
rights as they may have in the proceeds of such insurance. 17
Contractor shall require similar waivers by Subcontractors and 18
Sub - subcontractors. 19
(5) Owner and Contractor's Protective Policy. The Contract shall 20
provide and maintain during the life of this contract and until 21
all work under said contract has been completed and accepted by 22
the Owner, and Owner's and Contractor's Protective Policy which 23
co- insures the Owner and the Owner's agents and employees with 24
the same Commercial General Liability coverage as described 25
above, entitled "Commercial General Liability Insurance." 26
B. When offsite storage is permitted, policy will be endorsed for transit 27
and offsite storage in amounts sufficient to protect property being 28
transported or stored. 29
C. This insurance shall include, as insured, City of Round Rock, 30
Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub - contractors in the work, as their 31
respective interest may appear. 32
D. If insurance policies are not written for amount specified in 2. and 33
3. above, Contractor is required to carry an Excess Liability 34
Insurance Policy for any difference in amounts specified. 35
E. Contractor shall be responsible for deductibles and self insured 36
retentions, if any, stated in policies. Any self insured retention 37
shall not exceed ten percent of minimum required limits. All 38
deductibles or self insured retentions shall be disclosed on 39
Certificate of Insurance required above. 40
F. Contractor shall not commence work at site under this Contract until 41
he has obtained required insurance and until such insurance has been 42
reviewed by Owner's Contract Administration Office. Contractor 43
shall not allow any Subcontractors to commence work until insurance 44
required has been obtained and approved. Approval of insurance by 45
Owner shall not relieve or decrease liability of Contractor 46
hereunder. 47
G. Insurance to be written by a company licensed to do business in the 48
State of Texas at the time policy is issued and acceptable to Owner. 49
H. Contractor shall produce an endorsement to each effected policy: 50
(1) Naming City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street, Round Rock, 51
Texas 78664 as additional insured (except Worker's Compensation 52
and Builders Risk). 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 (2) That obligates the insurance company to notify Joanne Land, City 01
02 Secretary, City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street, Round Rock, 02
03 Texas 78664 of any and all changes to policy 30 days prior to 03
04 change. 04
05 (3) That the "other" insurance clause shall not apply to Owner where 05
06 City of Round Rock is an additional insured shown on policy. It 06
07 is intended that policies required in this agreement, covering 07
08 both Owner and Contractor, shall be considered primary coverage 08
09 as applicable. 09
10 I. Contractor shall not cause any insurance to be canceled nor permit 10
11 any insurance to lapse during term of this Contract or as required in 11
12 the Contract. 12
13 J. If Contractor is underwritten on a claim -made basis, the retroactive 13
14 date shall be prior to, or coincident with, the date of this Contract 14
15 and the Certificate of Insurance shall state that coverage is claims 15
16 made and also the retroactive date. Contractor shall maintain 16
17 coverage for duration of this Contract and for two years following 17
18 completion of this Contract. 18
19 K. Contractor shall provide the City annually a Certificate of Insurance 19
20 as evidence of such insurance. It is further agreed that Contractor 20
21 shall provide Owner a 30 day notice of aggregate erosion, an advance 21
22 of the retroactive date, cancellation and /or removal. 22
23 L. It is also agreed that Contractor will invoke the tail option at 23
24 request of Owner and Extended Reporting Period (ERP) premium shall be 24
25 paid by Contractor. 25
26 M. Owner reserves the right to review insurance requirements of this 26
27 section during effective period of the Contract and to make 27
28 reasonable adjustments to insurance coverages and their limits when 28
29 deemed necessary and prudent by Owner based upon changes in statutory 29
30 law, court decisions or the claims history of the industry as well as 30
31 Contractor." 31
32 32
33 F. In Paragraph 20. SCHEDULE OF CONSTRUCTION AND COMPLETION, at 33
34 the beginning of the existing text add, "A. ", and add the 34
35 following new text: 35
36 36
37 "B. Within 14 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, submit for 37
38 approval a critical path type schedule. Account for 38
39 schedule of Subcontracts. Include proper sequence of 39
40 construction, various crafts, purchasing time, shop 40
41 drawing approval, material delivery, equipment 41
42 fabrication, startup, demonstration, and similar time 42
43 consuming factors. Show on schedule as a minimum, 43
44 earliest starting, earliest completion, latest starting, 44
45 latest finish, and free and total float for each task or 45
46 item. 46
47 47
48 Evaluate schedule not less than monthly. Update, 48
49 correct, and rerun schedule and submit to Engineer in 49
50 triplicate with pay application to show rescheduling 50
51 necessary to reflect true job conditions. When 51
52 shortening of various time intervals is necessary to 52
53 correct for behind schedule conditions, indicate steps to 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
00805 -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01600 -1
01 91H30 SECTION 01600 01
02 02
03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Scheduling of product delivery. 11
12 2. Packaging of products for delivery. 12
13 3. Protection of products against damage from: 13
14 a. Handling. 14
15 b. Exposure to elements or harsh environments. 15
16 16
17 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 17
18 18
19 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 19
20 the Contract. 20
21 21
22 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 22
23 23
24 C. Payment: 24
25 1. No payment will be made to Contractor for equipment or materials not 25
26 properly stored and insured or without approved shop drawings. 26
27 a. Previous payments for items will be deducted from subsequent 27
28 progress estimate(s) if proper storage procedures are not 28
29 observed. 29
30 30
31 1.02 DELIVERY 31
32 32
33 A. Scheduling: 33
34 1. Schedule delivery of products or equipment as required to allow 34
35 timely installation and to avoid prolonged storage. 35
36 36
37 B. Packaging: 37
38 1. Deliver products or equipment in manufacturer's original unbroken 38
39 cartons or other containers designed and constructed to protect the 39
40 contents from physical or environmental damage. 40
41 41
42 C. Identification: 42
43 1. Clearly and fully mark and identify as to manufacturer, item, and 43
44 installation location. 44
45 45
46 D. Protection and Handling: 46
47 1. Provide manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling. 47
48 48
49 49
50 PART 2 - PRODUCTS - (NOT APPLICABLE TO THIS SECTION) 50
51 51
52 52
53 PART 3 - EXECUTION 53
' 01600 -2
1 01 01
02 3.01 PROTECTION, STORAGE AND HANDLING 02
03 03
04 A. Manufacturer's Instruction: 04
I
05 1. Protect all products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's 05
06 written directions. 06
07 a. Store products or equipment in location to avoid physical damage 07
' 08 to items while in storage. 08
09 b. Handle products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's 09
10 recommendations and instructions. 10
1 11
12 2. Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thoroughly dry. 11
12
13 3.02 STORAGE FACILITIES 13
14 14
II
15 A. Temporary Storage Building: 15
16 1. Provide a weatherproof temporary storage building or trailer 16
17 specifically for the purpose of providing for protection of products 17
' 18 and equipment. Size building to accommodate anticipated storage 18
19 items. 19
20 2. Equip building with lockable doors and lighting. 20
I 21 3. Provide methods of storage of products and equipment off the ground. 21
22 4. Provide this structure within 21 days after Notice to Proceed. 22
23 Locate on -site in location approved by Owner. Remove building from 23
24 site prior to startup and demonstration period. 24
II 25 25
26 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 26
27 27
II 28 A. Inspect Deliveries: 28
29 1. Inspect all products or equipment delivered to the site prior to 29
30 unloading. Reject all products or equipment that are damaged, used, 30
II 31 or in any other way unsatisfactory for use on Project. 31
32 32
33 B. Monitor Storage Area: 33
34 1. Monitor storage area to ensure suitable temperature and moisture 34
I
35 conditions are maintained. 35
36 36
37 END OF SECTION 37
II
1
1
1
1
1
1
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1 01601 -1
' 01 89B06 SECTION 01601 01
02 02
03 JOB CONDITIONS 03
1 04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
1/
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
' 11 1. Job conditions. 11
12 12
13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13
14 14
15 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 15
16 the Contract. 16
17 17
I 18 2. Division 1 General Requirements. 18
19 19
20 1.02 PROJECT CONDITIONS 20
1 21 21
22 A. Prior to installation of material, equipment and other work, verify with 22
23 Subcontractors, material or equipment manufacturers, and installers that 23
24 the substrate or surface to which those materials attach is acceptable 24
25 for installation of those materials or equipment. (Substrate is defined 25
26 as surfaces to which materials or equipment is attached to i.e., 26
11 27 floors, walls, ceilings, etc.). 27
28 28
29 B. Correct unacceptable substrate until acceptable for installation of 29
30 equipment or materials. 30
1 31 31
32 END OF SECTION 32
1
1
11
1
1
11 WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 90E10 SECTION 01640 01
02 02
03 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. The procedure for requesting substitution approval for a product 11
12 which is defined in the Contract Documents by reference to one or 12
13 more of the following: 13
14 a. Name of manufacturer. 14
15 b. Name of vendor. 15
16 c. Trade name. 16
17 d. Catalog number. 17
18 2. This Section does not address substitutions for major equipment. See 18
19 "Instructions to Bidders." 19
20 20
21 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 21
22 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 22
23 The Contract. 23
24 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 24
25 25
26 C. Requests for Substitution - General: 26
27 1. Base all bids on materials, equipment, and procedures specified. 27
28 2. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in 28
29 specifications by means of references to names of manufacturers and 29
30 vendors, trade names, or catalog numbers. When this method of 30
31 specifying is used, it is not intended to exclude from consideration 31
32 other products bearing other manufacturer's or vendor's names, trade 32
33 names, or catalog numbers, provided said products are capable of 33
34 accomplishing the same tasks as the products specifically indicated. 34
35 3. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable. 35
36 36
37 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 37
38 38
39 A. In making request for substitution or in using an approved product, 39
40 Contractor represents: 40
41 1. He has investigated proposed product, and has determined that it is 41
42 equal or superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will 42
43 perform function for which it is intended. 43
44 2. He will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product 44
45 specified. 45
46 3. He will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, 46
47 to include building modifications if necessary, making such changes 47
48 as may be required for work to be complete in all respects. 48
49 4. He waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution 49
50 which subsequently arise. 50
51 51
52 1.03 DEFINITIONS 52
53 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01640 -1
01640 -2
01 A. Product: Manufactured material or equipment. 01
02 02
03 1.04 PROCEDURE FOR REQUESTING SUBSTITUTION 03
04 04
05 A. Considered after award of Contract. 05
06 06
07 B. Written requests through Contractor only. 07
08 08
09 C. Transmittal Mechanics: 09
10 1. Follow the transmittal mechanics prescribed for shop drawings in 10
11 Section 01340. Product substitution will be treated in a manner 11
12 similar to "deviations," as described in paragraph 1.03 B.6 of 12
13 Section 01340. List the letter describing the deviation and 13
14 justifications on the transmittal form in the space provided under 14
15 the column with the heading "DESCRIPTION." Include in the transmittal 15
16 letter, either directly or as a clearly marked attachment, the items 16
17 listed in paragraph D below. 17
18 18
19 D. Transmittal Contents: 19
20 1. Product identification: 20
21 a. Manufacture's name. 21
22 b. Telephone number and representative contact name. 22
23 c. Specification section or drawing reference of originally 23
24 specified product, including discrete name or tag number assigned 24
25 to original product in the Contract Documents. 25
26 2. Manufacturer's literature clearly marked to show compliance of 26
27 proposed product with Contract Documents. 27
28 3. Itemized comparison of original and proposed product addressing 28
29 product characteristics including but not necessarily limited to: 29
30 a. Size. 30
31 b. Composition or materials of construction. 31
32 c. Weight. 32
33 d. Electrical or mechanical requirements. 33
34 4. Product experience: 34
35 a. Location of past projects utilizing product. 35
36 b. Name and telephone number of persons associated with referenced 36
37 projects knowledgeable concerning proposed product. 37
38 c. Available field data and reports associated with proposed 38
39 product. 39
40 5. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 40
41 6. Data relating to changes in cost. 41
42 7. Samples: 42
43 a. At request of Engineer. 43
44 b. Full size if requested by Engineer. 44
45 c. Held until substantial completion. 45
46 d. Engineer not responsible for loss or damage to 46
47 samples. 47
48 48
49 1.05 APPROVAL OR REJECTION 49
50 50
51 A. Written approval or rejection of substitution given by the Engineer. 51
52 52
53 B. Engineer reserves the right to require proposed product to comply with 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01 color and pattern of specified product if necessary to secure design 01
02 intent. 02
03 03
04 C. In event substitution results in a change of Contract price or time, 04
05 provisions in General Conditions will be applied for adjustment. 05
06 06
07 D. Substitutions will be rejected if: 07
08 1. Submittal is not through the Contractor with his stamp of approval. 08
09 2. Requests are not made in accordance with this Section. 09
10 3. In the Engineer's opinion, acceptance will require substantial 10
11 revision of the original design. 11
12 4. In the Engineer's opinion, substitution is not equal to original 12
13 product specified or will not perform adequately the function for 13
14 which it was intended. 14
15 15
16 END OF SECTION 16
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01640 -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 91L16 SECTION 01800 01
02 02
03 OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS IN CONSTRUCTION 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. All openings and penetrations in construction. 11
12 12
13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13
14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14
15 the Contract. 15
16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16
17 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 17
18 18
19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19
PO 20
21 A. Referenced Standards: 21
22 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 22
23 a. 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 23
24 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 24
25 a. A36, Specification for Structural Steel. 25
26 b. A53, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and 26
27 Hot - Dipped, Zinc - Coated Welded and Seamless. 27
28 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 28
29 a. 70, National Building Code (NEC). 29
30 b. 90A, Standard for Installation of Air Conditioning 30
31 and Ventilating Systems. 31
32 32
33 B. Obtain prior approval from Engineer when any opening larger than 100 SQ 33
34 IN must be made in existing or newly completed construction. 34
35 35
36 36
37 1.03 SUBMITTALS 37
38 38
39 A. Shop Drawings: 39
40 1. See Section 01340. 40
41 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions for standard manufactured 41
42 products. 42
43 43
44 44
45 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 45
46 46
47 2.01 MATERIALS 47
48 48
49 A. Pipe Sleeves: Steel, ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black. 49
50 50
51 B. Sheet Metal Sleeves: Steel, ASTM A36, 12 GA. 51
52 52
53 C. Commercial Wall Castings: Ductile iron, class equal to 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01800 -1
' 01800 -2
1 01 piping system with minimum Class 53. 01
02 02
03 03
II 04 PART 3 - EXECUTION 04
05 05
06 3.01 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION 06
II 07 07
08 A. Perform electrical penetrations in accordance with NFPA 70, Article 501. 08
09 09
10 B. Install sleeves and castings in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter #6. 10
1
11 11
12 C. Hot dip galvanize (or paint in accordance with Section 09905 (09906)) all 12
13 steel sleeves installed. 13
II 14 14
15 D. When mechanical or electrical work cannot be installed as structure is 15
16 being erected, provide and arrange for building -in of boxes, sleeves, 16
17 insets, fixtures or devices necessary to permit installation later. Lay 17
II 18 out chases, holes or other openings which must be provided in masonry, 18
19 concrete or other work. 19
20 20
I 21 E. Size sleeves, blockouts and cutouts which will receive sealant seal such 21
22 that free area to receive sealant is minimized and seal integrity may be 22
23 obtained. 23
II 24 24
25 F. Field Cutting and Coring: 25
26 1. Saw or core drill with non - impact type equipment. 26
27 2. Mark opening and drill small 3/4 IN or less holes through structure 27
II 28 following opening outline. 28
29 3. Sawcut opening outline on both surfaces. Knock out within sawcuts 29
30 using impact type equipment. Do not chip or spall face of surface to 30
1 31 remain intact. 31
32 32
33 G. Where alterations are necessary or where new and old work join, restore 33
L 34
35 adjacent surfaces to their condition existing prior to start of work. 34
35
36 H. Provide waterstop plate /anchor flange for piping, ducts, castings and 36
37 sleeves cast -in -place in concrete. 37
II 38 1. For fabricated units, weld plate to sleeve, pipe, or ductwork. 38
39 2. For commercial castings, cast water stop /anchor with wall pipe. 39
40 3. Plate is to be same thickness as sleeve, pipe, casting or ductwork. 40
II 41 4. For fabricated units, diameter of plate or flange to be 4 IN larger 41
42 than outside diameter of sleeve, pipe or ductwork. 42
43 5. For commercial castings, waterstop /anchor size to be manufacturer 43
II 44 standard. 44
45 6. Provide continuous around entire circumference of sleeve, pipe, or 45
46 ductwork. 46
47 47
II 48 48
49 3.02 SCHEDULES 49
50 50
II 51 A. General Schedule of Penetrations through Slabs and Walls for Piping and 51
52 Conduit: 52
53 1. Provide the following opening and penetration types: 53
II
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 a. Type A - Block out 1 IN larger than outside dimensions of duct, 01
02 pipe, or conduits. 02
03 b. Type B - Saw cut opening. Place new concrete with integrally 03
04 cast sheet metal or pipe sleeve. 04
05 c. Type C - Fabricated sheet metal sleeve or pipe sleeve 05
06 cast -in- place. 06
07 d. Type D - Commercial type casting. 07
08 e. Type E - Saw cut opening. Place new concrete with 08
09 integrally cast pipe, duct or conduit spools. 09
10 f. Type F - Integrally cast pipe, duct or conduit. 10
11 g. Type G - Saw cut and remove area 1 IN larger than outside 11
12 dimensions of duct, pipe or conduit. 12
13 h. Type H - Core drill. 13
14 i. Type I - Block out area. At later date, place new concrete with 14
15 integrally cast sheet metal or pipe sleeve. 15
16 2. Provide seals of material and method described as follows. 16
17 a. Category 1 - Link -seal. 17
18 b. Category 3 - 12 GA sheet metal drip sleeve set in bed of silicon 18
19 sealant with backing rod and sealant used in sleeve annullus. 19
20 c. Category 4 - Backer rod and sealant. 20
21 d. Category 5 - Full depth compressible sealant with escutcheons on 21
22 both sides of opening. 22
23 e. Category 6 - Full depth compressible sealant and flanges on both 23
24 sides of opening. Flanges constructed of same material as duct, 24
25 fastened to duct and minimum 1/2 IN larger than opening. 25
26 f. Category 7 - Full depth compressible sealant and finish sealant 26
27 or full depth expanding foam sealant depending on application. 27
28 3. Furnish openings and sealing materials in new construction in 28
29 accordance with Schedule A, Openings and Penetrations for New 29
30 Construction. 30
31 4. Furnish openings and sealing materials through existing construction 31
32 in accordance with Schedule B, Openings and Penetrations for Existing 32
33 Construction. 33
34 34
35 35
SCHEDULE A. OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS SCHEDULE
FOR NEW CONSTRUCTION
APPLICATIONS
Through slabs
on grade above
water table
DUCTS PIPING CONDUIT
SEAL
OPENING' TYPE ING 'CATEGORY' T TYPE ING [CATEGORY
C 4 C =7a=a=_Ca === 4
F Not Req F Not Req F Not Req
4 I(1) 7 I(1) 7
(1) Multiple piping 3 IN and smaller or multiple conduits.
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01800 -3
01800 -4
APPLICATIONS
Through floors on
grade above water
table
Through exterior
wall above grade
SCHEDULE B. OPENINGS AND PENETRATIONS SCHEDULE
FOR EXISTING CONSTRUCTION
Through wall from
tankage or wet well
DUCTS
OPENING SEAL
TYPE CATEGORY
B
B
E
7
7
Not Req
SEAL
OPENING' TYPE 'CATEGORY
'CATEGORY
B
8
E
PIPING
7
1
Not Req
(1) Multiple piping 3 IN and smaller or multiple conduits.
(2) Single piping 3 IN and smaller or single conduit.
(3) Single pipe or conduit larger than 3 IN.
END OF SECTION
a=
B
B(1)(3)
E
H(2)
CONDUIT
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
7
7
Not Req
7
G 6 G(1)(3) 5 G(1)(3) 5
H(2) 5 H(2) 7
1
1 DIVISION 2
1 SITE WORK
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 89E23 SECTION 02072 01
02 02
03 DEMOLITION, CUTTING AND PATCHING 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Demolition, cutting and patching. 11
12 12
13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13
14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and 14
15 Conditions of the Contract. 15
16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16
17 3. Section 03002 - Concrete. 17
18 4. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 18
19 19
20 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 20
21 21
22 A. Qualifications: 22
23 1. Use only firms or individual trades qualified to perform work 23
24 required under this Section. 24
25 25
26 1.03 SUBMITTALS 26
27 27
28 A. Shop Drawings: 28
29 1. See Section 01340. 29
30 2. Indicating manufacturer and type of proposed nonshrink grout and 30
31 epoxy bonding adhesive. 31
32 3. Indicating proposed materials and methods to be used for matching and 32
33 repairing existing construction. 33
34 34
35 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 35
36 36
37 A. General: 37
38 1. Salvage items, designated for Owner's salvage, as a unit. Clean, 38
39 list, tag for storage. Protect from damage and deliver to location 39
40 designated. Salvage each item with auxiliary or associated equipment 40
41 required for operation. 41
42 42
43 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS 43
44 44
45 A. Perform preliminary investigations as required to ascertain extent of 45
46 _ work. Conditions which would be apparent by such investigation will not 46
47 be allowed as cause for claims for extra costs. 47
48 48
49 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING 49
50 50
51 A. Coordinate and reschedule work as required to preclude interference with 51
52 other operations. 52
53 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
02072 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
02072 -2
01 1.07 PERMITS 01
02 02
03 A. Obtain and pay for all permits required by all authorities having 03
04 jurisdiction and notify all involved utility companies. 04
05 05
06 B. Obtain approval of authorities having jurisdiction for any work which 06
07 affects access to or exit from such areas. Obtain approval of 07
08 authorities for any temporary construction which affects such areas. 08
09 09
10 10
11 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 11
12 12
13 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 13
14 14
15 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 15
16 Manufacturers are acceptable: 16
17 1. Nonshrink grout: 17
18 a. Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill. 18
19 b. Masterflow 713 by Master Builders. 19
20 2. Epoxy bonding adhesive: 20
21 a. Euco No.452 MV by Euclid Chemical Co. 21
22 b. Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod by Sika Corporation. 22
23 23
24 2.02 MATERIALS 24
25 25
26 A. Nonshrink Grout: 26
27 1. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive and nonstaining. 27
28 2. Premixed with only water to be added in accordance with 28
29 manufacturer's instructions at jobsite. 29
30 3. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. Mass expansion 30
31 not to be created by gas liberation or by other means. 31
32 4. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days to be 6500 psi. 32
33 5. Coat exposed edges of grout with a cure /seal compound recommended by 33
34 grout manufacturer. 34
35 35
36 B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: 36
37 1. Two component, moisture insensitive adhesive manufactured for the 37
38 purpose of bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete. 38
39 39
40 40
41 PART 3 - EXECUTION 41
42 42
43 3.01 PREPARATION 43
44 44
45 A. Provide substantial barricades and safety lights as required. 45
46 46
47 B. Provide temporary weather protection as necessary. 47
48 48
49 3.02 INSTALLATION 49
50 50
51 A. Cutting and Removal: 51
52 1. Remove existing work indicated to be removed, or as necessary for 52
53 installation of new work. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
' 08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
II 25
26
27
1 28
29
30
31
32
33
35
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
I 44
I
45
46
1
1
r
2. Neatly cut and remove materials, and prepare all openings to receive 01
new work. 02
3. Remove masonry or concrete in small sections. 03
04
B. Modification of Existing Concrete: 05
1. Where indicated, remove existing concrete and finish remaining 06
surfaces as specified in Section 03002. 07
a. Protect remaining concrete from damage. 08
b. Make openings by sawing or coring through the existing concrete. 09
c. Concrete may be broken out after initial saw cuts in the event 10
concrete thickness prevents cutting through. 11
d. Where sawing is not possible, make openings by drilling holes 12
around perimeter of opening and then chipping out the concrete. 13
1) Holes shall be sufficient in number to prevent damage to 14
remaining concrete. 15
2. Oversize required openings in existing concrete 1 IN on all sides and 16
build back to required opening size by means of nonshrink grout 17
epoxy- bonded to the existing concrete. 18
3. Where oversized openings cannot be made, remove the concrete to the 19
required opening size and cut back exposed reinforcing 1 IN from face 20
of concrete and fill resulting holes with nonshrink grout. 21
22
C. Matching and Patching: 23
1. Walls, ceilings, floors or partitions: 24
a. Repair abutting walls, ceilings, floors or partitions disturbed 25
by removal. 26
b. Match and patch existing construction disturbed during 27
installation of new work. 28
2. Methods and materials: 29
a. Similar in appearance, and equal in quality to adjacent areas for 30
areas or surfaces being repaired. 31
b. Subject to review of Engineer. 32
33
D. Salvaged Items: 34
1. Thoroughly dry and clean all metal surfaces. 35
2. Prime all bare metal in accordance with Section 09905. 36
3. Clean and lubricate motors and other moving parts. 37
4. Brace motors attached to flexible mountings until reinstallation. 38
5. Dispose of items or materials not designated for Owner's salvage or 39
reuse. Promptly remove from site. 40
6. Do not store or sell Contractor salvaged items or materials on site. 41
42
E. Clean Up: 43
1. Transport debris and legally dispose of off site. 44
45
END OF SECTION 46
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
02072 -3
' 02200 -1
I 01 90G17 SECTION 02200 01
02 02
03 EARTHWORK 03
' 04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
II
09 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
I 11 1. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 11
12 2. All excavation and trenching. 12
13 3. Constructing fills, backfills, and embankments. 13
' 14
15 4. Disposal of waste excavation. 14
15
16 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 16
17 1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract. 17
I
18 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 18
19 3. Section 02260 - Topsoiling and Finished Grading. 19
20 20
II 21 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 21
22 22
23 A. Referenced Standards: 23
II 24 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 24
25 a. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 25
26 b. D698, Tests for the Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil 26
27 Aggregate Mixtures Using a 5.5 LB Rammer and a 12 IN Drop. 27
II
28 c. D1557, Tests for Moisture Density Relations of Soils and Soil 28
29 Aggregate Mixtures Using a 10 LB Rammer and a 18 IN Drop. 29
30 d. D1682, Test Methods for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile 30
II 31 Fabrics. 31
32 e. D2487, Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes. 32
33 f. D3786, Test Method for Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Knitted 33
II 34 Goods and Nonwoven Fabrics: Diaphragm Bursting Strength Testing 34
35 Method. 35
36 g. D4253, Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils Using a 36
37 Vibratory Table. 37
II 38 h. D4254, Test Methods for Minimum Index Density of Soils and 38
39 Calculation of Relative Density. 39
40 40
' 41
42 B. Texas Department of Transportation (TDOT, formerly State Department of 41
Highways and Public Transportation). 42
43 1. 1982 Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, 43
II 44 and Bridges. 44
45 45
46 1.03 SUBMITTALS 46
47 47
II 48 A. Test Reports: 48
49 1. Submit test reports for proposed embankment material which are 49
50 prepared by an independent laboratory and which demonstrate 50
II 51 compliance with this specification. 51
52 2. Previously prepared test reports may be submitted providing that the 52
53 material stockpile sampled is the same stockpile proposed as the 53
' WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
' 02200 -2
II 01 source for material to be used on this project. 01
02 02
03 B. Trench Excavation Protection Plan: 03
II 04 1. Submit a plan for trench excavation protection conforming to the 04
05 provisions of Current Occupational Safety and Health Administration 05
06 regulations relating to excavations, trenching, and shoring. 06
07 2. The plan must be prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer, 07
II
08 registered in the State of Texas, and qualified by experience to 08
09 design trench protection systems. 09
10 3. Plan review by the Engineer will be for the sole purpose of ensuring 10
' 11 that the trench protection plan was designed by a Registered 11
12 Professional Engineer. No review of plan adequacy will be made. 12
13 13
II 14 1.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 14
15 15
16 A. Trench Safety Protection will be measured by the linear foot of pipeline 16
17 trenches exceeding five feet in depth. Payment will be made at the unit 17
II
18 price indicated on the Proposal form. No separate measurement or payment 18
19 will be made for the remainder of the work of this section. 19
20 20
II 21 21
22 PART 2 PRODUCTS 22
23 23
II 24 2.01 EMBANKMENT MATERIAL 24
25 25
26 A. Underneath and within five feet of structures use Type A, Grade 2 crushed 26
27 limestone flexible base conforming to TOOT Item No. 248. 27
II 28 28
29 B. More than five feet away from structures use existing near - surface soil 29
30 excavated in the course of construction or imported borrow. 30
' 31 31
32 32
33 PART 3 - EXECUTION 33
' 34 34
35 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 35
36 36
37 A. Protection 37
II 38 1. Protect existing surface and subsurface features on site and 38
39 adjacent to site as follows: 39
40 a. Provide barricades, coverings, or other types of 40
' 41 protection necessary to prevent damage to existing items 41
42 indicated to remain in place. 42
43 b. Protect and maintain bench marks, monuments or other 43
44 established reference points and property corners. If 44
II
45 disturbed or destroyed, replace at own expense to full 45
46 satisfaction of Owner and controlling agency. 46
47 c. Verify location of utilities. Omission or inclusion of 47
II 48 utility items does not constitute non - existence or 48
49 definite location. Secure and examine local utility 49
50 records for location data. 50
I 51 1) Take necessary precautions to protect existing 51
52 utilities from damage due to any construction 52
53 activity. 53
' WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 2) Repair damages to utility items at own expense. 01
02 3) In case of damage, notify Engineer at once so 02
03 required protective measures may be taken. 03
04 d. Maintain free of damage, existing sidewalks, structures, 04
05 and pavement, not indicated to be removed. Any item 05
06 known or unknown or not properly located that is 06
07 inadvertently damaged shall be repaired to original 07
08 condition. All repairs to be made and paid for by 08
09 Contractor. 09
10 e. Provide full access to public and private premises, fire 10
11 hydrants, street crossings, sidewalks and other points as 11
12 designated by Owner to prevent serious interruption of 12
13 travel. 13
14 f. Maintain stockpiles and excavations in such a manner to 14
15 prevent inconvenience or damage to structures on site or 15
16 on adjoining property. 16
17 g. Avoid surcharge or excavation procedures which can result 17
18 in heaving, caving, or slides. 18
19 19
20 B. Site Conditions: 20
21 1. Water: 21
22 a. Do not proceed when soil moisture conditions will prevent proper 22
23 compaction of fills and embankments or will lead to rutting or 23
24 disturbance of previously placed, compacted, or graded material. 24
25 b. Conduct operations in a manner such that positive drainage is 25
26 provided at all times in areas where work is incomplete. Operate 26
27 pumps to dewater excavations where positive drainage is not 27
28 possible. Discharge water at locations which will not damage or 28
29 erode previously completed work or interfere with construction 29
30 , operations. 30
31 c. Where groundwater is or is expected to be encountered during 31
32 excavation, install a dewatering system to prevent softening and 32
33 disturbance of subgrade below foundations and fill materials, to 33
34 allow foundations and fill material to be placed in the dry, and 34
35 to maintain a stable excavation side slope. Groundwater shall be 35
36 maintained at least 3 FT below the bottom of any excavation. 36
37 Review soils investigation before beginning excavation and 37
38 determine where groundwater is likely to be encountered during 38
39 excavation. Employ dewatering specialist for selecting and 39
40 operating dewatering system. Keep dewatering system in operation 40
41 until dead load of structure exceeds possible buoyant uplift 41
42 force on structure. Dispose of groundwater to an area which will 42
43 not interfere with construction operations or damage existing 43
44 construction. Install groundwater monitoring wells as necessary. 44
45 Shut off dewatering system at such a rate to prevent a quick 45
46 upsurge of water that might weaken the subgrade. 46
47 2. Temperature 47
48 a. Do not proceed on frozen ground or when the temperature is below 48
49 freezing. 49
50 b. Scarify the recompact embankment surfaces exposed to freezing 50
51 temperatures which are to receive subsequent fill. 51
52 53
53 C. Blasting
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
02200 -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02200 -4
01 1. Basting with any type of explosive is prohibited. 01
02 02
03 3.02 STRIPPING TOPSOIL 03
04 04
05 A. Strip topsoil to a depth of 4 IN prior to any excavation or other 05
06 earthwork. 06
07 07
08 B. Stockpile topsoil on -site at a location approved by the Engineer. 08
09 09
10 3.03 EXCAVATION 10
11 11
12 A. Excavation: 12
13 1. Excavate to the depths shown on the plans. Allow for placement of 13
14 subsequent materials, including roadway courses, liner materials, 14
15 etc. 15
16 2. Excavate underneath and within 5 ft. of structures to allow placement 16
17 and compaction of embankment material as shown on the plans. 17
18 3. Excavate all materials encountered. No additional compensation will 18
19 be paid for varying subsurface conditions. 19
20 20
21 B. Trenching for Utilities 21
22 1. Do not commence trenching until embankments and fills are completed 22
23 to an elevation at least 2.0 FT above the top of the pipe or conduit. 23
24 2. Excavate all materials encountered. No additional compensation will 24
25 be paid for varying subsurface conditions. 25
26 3. Excavation for Appurtenances: 26
27 a. 12 IN (minimum) clear distance between outer surface and 27
28 embankment. 28
29 4. Trench Excavation: 29
30 a. Excavate trenches by open cut method to depth shown on Drawings 30
31 and necessary to accommodate work. 31
32 b. Any trench or portion of trench, which is opened and remains idle 32
33 for seven calendar days, or longer, as determined by the Owner, 33
34 may be directed to be immediately refilled, without completion of 34
35 work, at no additional cost to Owner. Said trench may not be 35
36 reopened until Owner is satisfied that work associated with 36
37 trench will be prosecuted with dispatch. 37
38 c. Observe following trenching criteria: 38
39 1) Excavate width to accommodate free working space. 39
40 2) Maximum trench width at top of pipe or conduit may not exceed 40
41 outside diameter of utility service by more than the 41
42 following dimensions, unless shown otherwise on the plans. 42
43 43
44 OVERALL DIAMETER 44
45 OF UTILITY SERVICE EXCESS DIMENSION 45
46 46
47 33 IN and less 18 IN 47
48 48
49 more than 33 IN 24 IN 49
50 50
51 3) Cut trench walls vertically from bottom of trench to 1 FT 51
52 above top of pipe, conduit, or utility service. 52
53 4) Provide the following minimum covers unless shown otherwise 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 on the plans or specific grades /elevations are indicated: 01
02 i) electrical conduits: 30 IN 02
03 ii) wastewater lines: 36 IN (includes force mains) 03
04 iii) water lines: 30 IN 04
05 d. Notwithstanding any other provisions, maintain stable trench 05
06 walls and protect personnel at all times from trench collapse. 06
07 07
08 3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE EXCAVATION 08
09 09
10 A. Dispose of excess and unsuitable excavated material off -site in a lawful 10
11 manner. 11
12 12
13 3.05 CONSTRUCTING FILLS AND EMBANKMENTS 13
14 14
15 A. Subgrade Preparation: 15
16 1. Proof roll subgrade to detect soft areas with at least a 15 -ton 16
17 roller. Remove and replace soft areas with compacted embankment 17
18 material. 18
19 19
20 B. Fill Placement: 20
21 1. Place fill material in layers not more than 6 IN maximum compacted 21
22 thickness. 22
23 2. Sprinkle or aerate to provide moisture content within 2% of optimum. 23
24 3. Compact each layer to 95% of maximum Modified Proctor density (ASTM 24
25 D- 1557). 25
26 4. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures to 26
27 avoid uneven loads on structures. 27
28 5. Place fill to the elevations shown on the plans. Allow for placement 28
29 of subsequent materials, including roadway courses, liner materials, 29
30 etc. 30
31 31
32 3.06 BACKFILLING TRENCHES 32
33 33
34 A. Preparing Trenches: 34
35 1. Remove all loose material from the trench down to firm, stable 35
36 subgrade. 36
37 2. Remove unstable trench bottom caused by failure to dewater, rainfall, 37
38 or Contractor operations. Replace with granular bedding with no 38
39 additional compensation. 39
40 40
41 B. Setting pipe, conduit, and appurtenances: 41
42 1. Place in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 42
43 2. Excavate for pipe bells so pipe is fully supported. 43
44 44
45 C. Granular bedding: 45
46 1. Place as shown on the plans in lifts not exceeding 7 to 9 IN loose 46
47 depth. 47
48 2. Tamp or compact thoroughly prior to placing subsequent lifts. 48
49 3. Water jetting is prohibited. 49
50 50
51 D. Backfilling: 51
52 1. Place in lifts not exceeding 6 to 8 IN loose depth. 52
53 2. Sprinkle or aerate as required to provide moisture content within 2% 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
02200 -5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02200 -6
01 of optimum. 01
02 3. Compact each layer to 95% of maximum Modified Proctor density (ASTM 02
03 D- 1557). 03
04 4. Grade trench surfaces smooth, free of stones or other objects larger 04
05 than 2 IN in any dimension. 05
06 06
07 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 07
08 08
09 A. Moisture - density relations will be established by the Engineer for all 09
10 materials to be compacted. Allow seven working days after sampling for 10
11 development of moisture- density relation prior to requesting compaction 11
12 tests. 12
13 13
14 B. Extent of compaction testing will be as necessary to assure compliance 14
15 with Specifications. 15
16 16
17 C. Give minimum of 24 HR advance notice to Engineer when ready for 17
18 compaction or subgrade testing and inspection. 18
20 D. Should any compaction density test or subgrade inspection fail to meet 20
21 Specification requirements, perform corrective work as necessary. 21
22 22
23 E. Pay for all costs associated with corrective work and retesting resulting 23
24 from failing compaction density tests. 24
25 25
26 3.08 MAINTENANCE 26
27 27
28 A. Protection of newly graded areas: 28
29 1. Protect newly graded areas from erosion, and keep free from trash and 29
30 weeds. 30
31 2. Repair and reestablish grades in settled, eroded, and rutted areas to 31
32 the specified dimensions and tolerances. 32
33 33
34 B. Where completed compacted areas are disturbed by subsequent construction 34
35 operations or adverse weather, scarify the surface, reshape, and compact 35
36 to the required density prior to further construction. 36
37 37
38 END OF SECTION 38
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01 89I20 SECTION 02260 01
02 02
03 TOPSOILING AND FINISHED GRADING 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Topsoiling and finished grading. 11
12 12
13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13
14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14
15 the Contract. 15
16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16
17 3. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 17
18 4. Section 02930 - Seeding, Sodding and Landscaping. 18
19 19
20 C. Location of Work: All areas within limits of grading and all areas 20
21 outside limits of grading which are disturbed in the course of the work. 21
22 22
23 1.02 SUBMITTALS 23
24 24
25 A. Shop Drawings: 25
26 1. See Section 01340. 26
27 27
28 B. Project Data: 28
29 1. Test reports for furnished topsoil. 29
30 30
31 1.03 SITE CONDITIONS 31
32 32
33 A. Verify amount of topsoil stockpiled and determine amount of additional 33
34 topsoil, if necessary to complete work. 34
35 35
36 36
37 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 37
38 38
39 2.01 MATERIALS 39
40 40
41 41
42 A. Topsoil: 42
43 1. Original surface soil typical of the area. 43
44 2. Existing topsoil stockpiled under Section 02110. 44
45 3. Capable of supporting native plant growth. 45
46 46
47 2.02 TOLERANCES 47
48 48
49 A. Finish Grading Tolerance: 0.1 FT plus /minus from required elevations. 49
50 50
51 PART 3 - EXECUTION 51
52 52
53 3.01 PREPARATION 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
02260 -1
02260 -2
01 01
02 A. Correct, adjust and /or repair rough graded areas. 02
03 1. Cut off mounds and ridges. 03
04 2. Fill gullies and depressions. 04
05 3. Perform other necessary repairs. 05
06 4. Bring all sub - grades to specified contours, even and properly 06
07 compacted. 07
08 08
09 B. Loosen surface to depth of 2 IN, minimum. 09
10 10
11 C. Remove all stones and debris over 2 IN in any dimension. 11
12 12
13 3.02 PLACING TOPSOIL 13
14 14
15 A. Do not place when subgrade is wet or frozen enough to cause cladding. 15
16 16
17 B. Spread to compacted depth of 4 IN for all disturbed earth areas. 17
18 18
19 C. If topsoil stockpiled is less than amount required for work, furnish 19
20 additional topsoil at no cost to Owner. 20
21 21
22 D. Provide finished surface free of stones, sticks, or other material 1 IN 22
23 or more in any dimension. 23
24 24
25 E. Provide finished surface smooth and true to required grades. 25
26 26
27 F. Restore by stockpile area to condition of rest of finished work. 27
28 28
29 3.04 ACCEPTANCE 29
30 30
31 A. Upon completion of topsoiling, obtain Engineer's acceptance of grade and 31
32 surface. 32
33 33
34 B. Make test holes where directed to verify proper placement and thickness 34
35 of topsoil. 35
36 36
37 END OF SECTION 37
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 90G19 SECTION 02930 01
02 02
03 HYDRAULIC SEEDING 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Hydraulic Seeding of all areas disturbed as a result of construction 11
12 activities. 12
13 13
14 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 14
15 1. Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and General Terms and 15
16 Conditions of the Contract. 16
17 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 17
18 3. Section 02260 - Topsoiling and Finished Grading. 18
19 19
20 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 20
21 21
22 A. Referenced Standards: 22
23 1. Standard Methods of the Association of Official Agricultural 23
24 Chemists. 24
25 2. United States Department of Agriculture, (USDA): 25
26 a. Federal Seed Act. 26
27 27
28 1.03 SUBMITTALS 28
29 29
30 A. Shop Drawings: 30
31 I. See Section 01340. 31
32 2. Certification: 32
33 a. Certify each container of seed delivered will be labeled in 33
34 accordance with Federal and State Seed Laws and equals or exceeds 34
35 Specification requirements. 35
36 3. Other documents: 36
37 a. Copies of invoices for fertilizer, seed, and cellulose fiber 37
38 mulch used on Project showing grade furnished, along with 38
39 certification of quality and warranty. Ensure each lot of 39
40 fertilizer is subject to sampling and testing, at discretion of 40
41 Engineer, in accordance with current methods of Association of 41
42 Official Agricultural Chemists. Furnish identification tags from 42
43 all bags of seed used on the project. Upon completion of 43
44 Project, a final check of total quantities of fertilizer, seed, 44
45 and cellulose fiber mulch used will be made against total area 45
46 seeded, and if minimum rates of application have not been met, 46
47 Engineer may require distribution of additional quantities to 47
48 make up minimum application specified. 48
49 4
50 50
51 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 51
52 52
53 2.01 GENERAL 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
02930 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 01
02 B. Plant seed within 30 days of completion of earthwork, grading, and 02
03 topsoiling to minimize erosion. 03
04 04
05 C. Do not commence work until topsoil is applied and fine grading is 05
06 complete in the area to be seeded. 06
07 07
08 3.02 PREPARATION 08
09 09
10 A. Mow all "volunteer" grasses. 10
11 11
12 B. Cultivate all areas to be seeded to a depth of 4 IN. 12
13 13
14 C. Lightly roll or compact cultivated areas. 14
15 15
16 3.03 CELLULOSE FIBER MULCH SEEDING (HYDROMULCHING) 16
17 17
18 A. Seeding may be done whenever the weather and soil conditions are 18
19 favorable, or as otherwise authorized by the Engineer. 19
20 20
21 B. Application Rates: 21
22 1. Seed: See paragraph 2.01. Application rates are specified in 22
23 pounds of pure live seed per 1000 SF. Adjust actual application rates 23
24 as necessary depending on PLS of seed delivered to the project to 24
25 achieve the application rates specified. 25
26 2. Fertilizer: 13 LBS /1000 SF (Dry weight). 26
27 3. Cellulose Fiber Mulch: 70 LBS /1000 SF (Dry weight). 27
28 28
29 C. Uniformly distribute the seed or seed mixture over all areas to receive 29
30 hydromulch. All varieties of seed, fertilizer, and cellulose fiber may 30
31 be distributed at the same time at the specified rate after being mixed 31
32 and agitated in the hydromulching machine for at least ten (10) minutes, 32
33 in order to provide a homogeneous mixture. Apply this mixture as a water 33
34 slurry and achieve an even, solid cover. 34
35 35
36 D. Protect all areas not to receive the hydromulch mixture from direct or 36
37 over - spray. Remove and clean all hydromulch from buildings, irrigation 37
38 equipment, trees, shrubs, curbs, pavement, fire hydrants, light and 38
39 utility poles and other site improvements. 39
40 40
41 3.04 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION 41
42 42
43 A. Maintain turf areas until Project Acceptance by watering, fertilizing, 43
44 and re- seeding as necessary to establish a vigorous, healthy stand of 44
45 grass. 45
46 46
47 B. Any turfed areas not showing sufficient growth within the twelve month 47
48 warranty period shall be prepared and re- hydromulched as specified. 48
49 "Sufficient growth" is defined as 85% cover with no bare areas exceeding 49
50 25 SF in area. 50
51 51
52 C. Protect all turf areas from erosion, rutting, or other damage. Correct 52
53 all damage which occurs by applying fresh topsoil and re- seeding. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
02930 -3
' 02930 -2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 01
02 A. Topsoil: See Section 02260. 02
03 03
04 B. Fertilizer: Complete, soluble fertilizer, uniform in composition, dry 04
05 and free - flowing, part of the elements of which are derived from organic 05
06 sources. It shall contain the following percentages by weight: 06
07 07
08 Nitrogen (N) 10 Phosphorus (P) 20 Potash (K) 10 08
09 09
10 Deliver fertilizers mixed as specified, in standard size, unopened 10
11 containers, showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Store in 11
12 a weatherproof storage place and in such a manner that the fertilizer 12
13 will be kept dry and its effectiveness not impaired. If and when bulk 13
14 delivery and spreading of fertilizer is authorized, provide with a 14
15 notarized, written affidavit certifying weight and analysis of the 15
16 fertilizer. 16
17 17
18 C. Grass Seed: Fresh, clean, new crop seed mixed in the proportions 18
19 indicated below: 19
20 20
21 1. Planting dates - September 15 to March 1: 21
22 22
23 LBS Pure Live 23
24 Common Name Seed per 1000 SF 24
25 25
26 Bermudagrass (unhulled) 2.0 26
27 Winter Rye 7.0 27
28 28
29 2. Planting dates - March 2 to September 14: 29
30 30
31 LBS Pure Live 31
32 Common Name Seed per 1000 SF 32
33 33
34 Bermudagrass (hulled) 2.0 34
35 35
36 D. Mulch: Cellulose Fiber Mulch produced from grinding clean, whole wood 36
37 chips with a labeled ash content not to exceed 7 %, designed for use in 37
38 conventional hydraulic mulching of grass seed with fertilizers and other 38
39 additives and shall be such that when applied, will form a strong, 39
40 moisture - retaining mat without the need of an asphalt binder. 40
41 41
42 E. Water: Provide water for the execution of this work and maintenance 42
43 until Project Acceptance, capable of initiating and supporting plant 43
44 growth, and free of harmful or deleterious substances. 44
45 45
46 46
47 PART 3 - EXECUTION 47
48 48
49 3.01 GENERAL 49
50 50
51 A. Seed all areas disturbed by construction activities (areas which are 51
52 filled, excavated, receiving topsoil, or have lost vegetative cover due 52
53 to construction activities). 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01
02
03
04
02930 -4
END OF SECTION
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01
02
03
04
1
1 DIVISION 3
CONCRETE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 :
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 90H15 SECTION 03002 01
02 02
03 CONCRETE 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Cast -in -place concrete and grout. 11
12 2. Concrete mixes, proportioning, and source quality control for precast 12
13 concrete. 13
14 14
15 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 15
16 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 16
17 the Contract. 17
18 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 18
19 3. Section 03431 - Precast and Prestressed Concrete. - 19
20 20
21 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 21
22 22
23 A. Referenced Standards: 23
24 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 24
25 a. SP -19, Cement and Concrete Terminology. 25
26 b. 211.1, Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal and 26
27 Heavyweight Concrete. 27
28 c. 212.1R, Admixtures for Concrete. 28
29 d. 212.2R, Guide for Use of Admixtures in Concrete. 29
30 e. 214, Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Compression Test 30
31 Results of Field Concrete. 31
32 f. 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, 32
33 and Placing Concrete. 33
34 g. 304.2R, Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 34
35 h. 305R, Hot Weather Concreting. 35
36 i. 306R, Cold Weather Concreting. 36
37 j. 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 37
38 1. 347, Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. 38
39 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 39
40 a. A82, Standard Specifications for Cold Drawn Steel Wire for 40
41 Concrete Reinforcement. 41
42 b. A185, Standard Specification for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for 42
43 Concrete Reinforcement. 43
44 c. A615, Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet Steel 44
45 Bars for Concrete Reinforcement Including Supplementary 45
46 Requirements S1. 46
47 d. C31, Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens 47
48 in the Field. 48
49 e. C33, Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 49
50 f. C39, Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of 50
51 Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 51
52 g. C94, Standard Specification for Ready Mixed Concrete. 52
53 h. C138, Standard Method of Test for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
03002 -1
1
' 01
02
03
' 04
05
06
I 07
08
09
10
I 11
12
13
I 14
15
16
II 17
18
19
1 20
21
22
23
I 24
25
26
I 27
28
29
31
I 31
32
33
' 34
35
36
' 37
38
39
II 41
41
42
43
I 44
45
46
' 47
48
49
II 51
51
52
53
1
03002 -2
Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete. 01
i. C143, Standard Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement 02
Concrete. 03
j. C150, Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 04
k. C157, Test Method for Length Change of Hardened Hydraulic Cement 05
Mortar and Concrete. 06
1. C171, Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing 07
Concrete. 08
m. C172, Standard Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete. 09
n. C173, Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed 10
Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 11
o. C192, Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test 12
Specimens in the Laboratory. 13
p. C231, Standard Method of Test for Air Content of Freshly Mixed 14
Concrete by the Pressure Method. 15
q. C260, Standard Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for 16
Concrete. 17
r. C289, Test Method for Potential Reactivity of Aggregates 18
(Chemical Method). 19
s. C309, Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming 20
Compounds for Curing Concrete. 21
t. C494, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for 22
Concrete. 23
u. C496, Standard Method of Test for Splitting Tensile Strength of 24
Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 25
v. C595, Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements. 26
w. C618, Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined 27
Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland 28
Cement Concrete. 29
x. D1056, Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials Sponge or 30
Expanded Rubber. 31
y. E329, Standard Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing 32
Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in 33
Construction. 34
3. Federal Specification (FS): 35
a. TT- S -227b, Sealer Compound; Rubber Base, Two Component. 36
b. LLL-B-810B, Building Board, (Hardboard) Hard Pressed, Vegetable 37
Fiber. 38
39
B. Quality Control: 40
1. Concrete testing agency. 41
a. Contractor to employ and pay for services of a testing laboratory 42
to: 43
1) Perform materials evaluation. 44
2) Design concrete mixes. 45
b. Concrete testing agency to meet requirements of ASTM E329. 46
2. Do not begin concrete production until proposed concrete mix design 47
has been approved by Engineer. 48
a. Approval of concrete mix design by Engineer does not relieve 49
Contractor of his responsibility to provide concrete that meets 50
the requirements of this Specification. 51
3. Adjust concrete mix designs when material characteristics, job 52
conditions, weather, strength test results or other circumstances 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1 03002 -3
01 warrant. 01
02 a. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and approved 02
03 by Engineer. 03
' 04
05 C. Qualifications: Ready mixed concrete batch plant certified by National 04
Ready Mixed Concrete Association (NMCA). 05
06 06
07 1.03 DEFINITIONS 07
II
08 08
09 A. Per ACI SP -19 except as modified herein: 09
10 1. Concrete fill: Non - structural concrete. 10
II 11 2. Concrete Testing Agency: Testing agency employed to perform 11
12 materials evaluation, design of concrete mixes or testing of concrete 12
13 placed during construction. 13
14 3. Exposed concrete: Exposed to view after construction is complete. 14
15 4. Indicated: Indicated by Contract Documents. 15
16 5. Lean concrete: Concrete with low cement content. 16
17 6. Nonexposed concrete: Not exposed to view after construction is 17
II 18 complete. 18
19 7. Required: Required by Contract Documents. 19
20 8. Specified strength: Specified compressive strength at 28 20
1 21 days. 21
22 9. Submitted: Submitted to Engineer. 22
23 23
1 24 1.04 SUBMITTALS 24
25 25
26 A. Shop Drawings: 26
27 1. See Section 01340. 27
I
28 2. Concrete mix designs proposed for use. Concrete mix design submittal 28
29 to include the following information: 29
30 a. Sieve analysis and source of fine and coarse 30
31 aggregates. 31
32 b. Proportioning of all materials. 32
33 c. Type of cement with mill certificate for cement. 33
I 34 d. Type of fly ash. 34
35 e. Slump. 35
36 f. Air content. 36
37 g. Brand, type, ASTM designation, and quantity of each admixture 37
II
38 proposed for use. 38
39 h. 28 -day cylinder compressive test results of trial mixes per ACI 39
40 318 and as indicated herein. 40
II 41 i. Standard deviation value for concrete production facility. 41
42 3. Manufacturer and type of joint filler, joint sealant and curing 42
43 agent. 43
' 44 4. Manufacturer and type of bonding and patching mortar and bonding 44
45 adhesive used at construction joints. 45
46 5. Manufacturer and type of nonshrink grout and the cure /seal compound 46
47 required for the nonshrink grout. 47
II 48 6. Reinforcing steel: Show grade, sizes, number, configuration, 48
49 spacing, location and all fabrication and placement details. 49
50 a. In sufficient detail to permit installation of reinforcing 50
' 51 without having to make reference to Contract Drawings. 51
52 b. Obtain approval of shop drawings by Engineer before fabrication. 52
53 53
II WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
I 03002 -4
II 01 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
01
02 02
03 A. Storage of Material: 03
' 04 1. Cement and fly ash: 04
05 a. Store in moistureproof, weathertight enclosures. 05
06 b. Do not use if caked or lumpy. 06
II 08
2. Aggregate: 07
08 a. Store to prevent segregation and contamination with other sizes 08
09 or foreign materials. 09
10 b. Obtain samples for testing from aggregates at point of batching. 10
' 11 c. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates. 11
12 d. Do not use bottom 6 IN of stockpiles in contact with ground. 12
13 e. Allow sand to drain until moisture content is uniform prior to 13
II 14 use. 14
15 3. Admixtures: 15
16 a. Protect from contamination, evaporation, freezing, or damage. 16
' 17 b. Maintain within temperature range recommended by manufacturer. 17
18 c. Completely mix solutions and suspensions prior to use. 18
19 4. Reinforcing steel: 19
20 a. Support and store all rebars above ground. 20
I 21 21
22 B. Delivery: 22
23 1. Concrete: 23
II 24 a. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load for ready -mixed concrete. 24
25 b. Truck operator shall hand ticket to Engineer at the time of 25
26 delivery. 26
27 c. Ticket to show: 27
I
28 1) Mix identification mark. 28
29 2) Quantity delivered. 29
30 3) Amount of each material in batch. 30
I 31 4) Outdoor temp in the shade. 31
32 5) Time at which cement was added. 32
33 6) Numerical sequence of the delivery. 33
I 34 7) Amount of water added. 34
35 2. Reinforcing steel: Ship to jobsite with attached plastic or metal 35
36 tags with permanent mark numbers. 36
37 a. Mark numbers to match shop drawing mark number. 37
I 38 38
39 39
40 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 40
' 41 41
42 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 42
43 43
' 44 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 44
45 Manufacturers are acceptable: 45
46 1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout: 46
47 a. Sika "SikaGrout 212." 47
I
48 b. Gifford Hill "Supreme Grout." 48
49 c. Master Builders "Masterflow 713." 49
50 d. Or equal. 50
I 51 2. Epoxy grout: 51
52 a. Master Builders "Brutem MPG." 52
53 b. Euclid Chemical Company, "High Strength Grout." 53
' WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 c. Or equal. 01
02 3. Expansion joint fillers: 02
03 a. Permaglaze Co. 03
04 b. Rubatex Corp. 04
05 c. Williams Products, Inc. 05
06 d. Or equal. 06
07 4. Form coating: 07
08 a. Richmond "Rich Cote." 08
09 b. Industrial Lubricants "Nox -Crete Form Coating." 09
10 c. Protex "Pro- Cote." 10
11 d. Or equal. 11
12 5. Prefabricated forms: 12
13 a. Simplex "Industrial Steel Frame Forms." 13
14 b. Symons "Steel Ply." 14
15 c. Universal "Uniform." 15
16 d. Or equal. 16
17 17
18 2.02 MATERIALS 18
19 19
20 A. Portland Cement: Conform to ASTM C150 Type I. 20
21 21
22 B. Fly Ash: 22
23 1. ASTM C618, Class F. 23
24 2. Nonstaining. 24
25 a. Hardened concrete containing fly ash to be uniform 25
26 light gray color. 26
27 3. Maximum loss on ignition: 6 percent. 27
28 4. Compatible with other concrete ingredients. 28
29 5. Obtain proposed fly ash from a source approved by the 29
30 State Highway Department in the state where the Project 30
31 is located for use in concrete for bridges. 31
32 32
33 C. Admixtures: 33
34 1. Air entraining admixtures: ASTM C260. 34
35 2. Water reducing, retarding, and accelerating admixtures: 35
36 a. ASTM C494 Type A through E. 36
37 b. Conform to provisions of ACI 212.1R and ACI 212.2R. 37
38 c. Do not use retarding or accelerating admixtures unless 38
39 specifically approved in writing by Engineer and at no cost to 39
40 Owner. 40
41 d. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 41
42 e. Use chloride free admixtures only. 42
43 3. Maximum total water soluble chloride ion content contributed from all 43
44 ingredients of concrete including water, aggregates, cementitious 44
45 materials and admixtures by weight percent of cement: 45
46 a. 0.06 prestressed concrete. 46
47 b. 0.10 all other concrete. 47
48 4. Do not use calcium chloride. 48
49 5. Pozzolanic admixtures: ASTM C618. 49
50 6. Provide admixtures of same type, manufacturer and quantity as used in 50
51 establishing required concrete proportions in the mix design. 51
52 52
53 D. Water: Potable, clean, free of oils, acids and organic matter. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
03002 -5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
03002 -6
01 01
02 E. Aggregates: 02
03 1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C33, except as modified below. 03
04 2. Fine aggregate: Clean natural sand. 04
05 a. No manufactured or artificial sand. 05
06 3. Coarse aggregate: Crushed rock, natural gravel, or other inert 06
07 granular material. 07
08 a. Maximum amount of clay or shale particles: 1 percent. 08
09 4. Gradation of coarse aggregate: 09
10 a. Lean concrete and concrete topping: Size #7. 10
11 b. All other concrete: Size #57 or #67. 11
12 12
13 F. Concrete Grout: 13
14 1. Nonshrink nonmetallic grout: 14
15 a. Nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining, premixed with only water 15
16 to be added. 16
17 b. Grout to produce a positive but controlled expansion. 17
18 c. Mass expansion not to be created by gas liberation. 18
19 d. Minimum compressive strength of nonshrink grout at 28 19
20 days: 6500 psi. 20
21 2. Epoxy grout: 21
22 a. 3- component epoxy resin system. 22
23 1) Two liquid epoxy components. 23
24 2) One inert aggregate filler component. 24
25 b. Each component packaged separately for mixing at job 25
26 site. 26
27 27
28 G. Reinforcing Steel: 28
29 1. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. 29
30 2. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A185. 30
31 a. Minimum yield strength: 60,000 psi. 31
32 32
33 H. Forms: 33
34 1. Prefabricated or job built. 34
35 2. Plywood: PSI, waterproof, resin - bonded, exterior type Douglas Fir. 35
36 a. Face adjacent to concrete Grade B or better. 36
37 3. Fiberboard: Fed Spec LLL -B -810, Type IX, tempered, waterproof, 37
38 screen back, concrete form hardboard. 38
39 4. Lumber: Straight; uniform width and thickness; and free from knot, 39
40 offsets, holes, dents, and other surface defects. 40
41 5. Chamfer strips: Clear white pine, surface against concrete planed. 41
42 6. Form ties: Removable end, permanently embedded body type with cones 42
43 on outer ends not requiring auxiliary spreaders. 43
44 a. Cone diameter: 3/4 IN minimum to 1 IN maximum. 44
45 b. Embedded portion 1 IN minimum back from concrete 45
46 face. 46
47 c. If not provided with threaded ends, constructed for 47
48 breaking off ends without damage to concrete. 48
49 7. Form release: Nonstaining and shall not prevent bonding of future 49
50 finishes to concrete surface. 50
51 51
52 I. Chairs, Runners, Bolsters, Spacers, and Hangers: 52
53 1. Stainless steel, epoxy coated, or plastic coated metal. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
03002 -7
01 a. Plastic coated: Rebar support tips in contact with 01
02 the forms only. 02
03 03
04 J. Vapor Barrier: Clear 6 -mil thick polyethylene conforming to ASTM C171. 04
05 05
06 K. Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type I -D. 06
07 1. Resin based, dissipates upon exposure to UV light. 07
08 2. Curing compound shall not prevent bonding of any future coverings, 08
09 coatings or finishes. 09
10 3. Curing compounds used in water treatment plant construction to be 10
11 nontoxic and taste and odor free. 11
12 12
13 L. Expansion Joint Filler: 13
14 1. In contact with sewage: Closed cell neoprene: 14
15 a. ASTM D1056, Class SC (oil resistant and medium swell) of 2 to 5 15
16 psi compression deflection (Grade SCE41). 16
17 2. Other use: Asphalt impregnated fiber type. 17
18 18
19 2.03 CONCRETE MIXES 19
20 20
21 A. General: 21
22 1. All concrete to be ready mixed concrete conforming to ASTM C94. 22
23 2. Provide concrete of specified quality capable of being placed without 23
24 segregation and, when cured, of developing all properties required. 24
25 3. All concrete to be normal weight concrete. 25
26 26
27 B. Strength: 27
28 1. Provide specified strength and type of concrete for each use in 28
29 structure(s) as follows: 29
30 30
31 SPECIFIED 31
32 TYPE WEIGHT STRENGTH* 32
33 33
34 Concrete Fill Normal weight 3000 psi 34
35 Lean Concrete Normal weight 3000 psi 35
36 All other Concrete Normal weight 4000 psi 36
37 37
38 *Minimum 28 -day compressive strength. 38
39 39
40 C. Air Entrainment: Provide air entrainment in all concrete resulting in a 40
41 total air content percent by volume as follows: 41
42 42
43 MAX AGGREGATE SIZE TOTAL AIR CONTENT PERCENT 43
44 44
45 1 IN or 3/4 IN 5 to 7 45
46 1/2 IN 6 to 8 46
47 - 47
48 1. Air content to be measured in accordance with ASTM C231, ASTM C173, 48
49 or ASTM C138. 49
50 50
51 D. Slump: 4 IN maximum, 1 IN minimum. 51
52 1. Measured at point of discharge of the concrete into the concrete 52
53 construction member. 53
1
' 01
02
03
' 04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
' 14
15
16
' 17
18
19
' 20
21
22
23
r 24
25
26
' 27
28
29
' 30
31
32
33
' 35
35
36
38
38
39
40
41
42
43
' 44
45
46
' 48
48
49
50
' 51
52
53
1
03002 -8
2. Concrete of lower than maximum slump may be used provided it can be 01
properly placed and consolidated. 02
3. Pumped concrete: 03
a. Provide additional water at batch plant to allow for 04
slump loss due to pumping. 05
b. Provide only enough additional water so that slump of 06
concrete at discharge end of pump hose does not 07
exceed maximum slump specified above. 08
4. Determine slump per ASTM CI43. 09
10
E. Selection of Proportions: 11
1. General - Proportion ingredients to: 12
a. Produce proper workability, durability, strength, and 13
other required properties. 14
b. Prevent segregation and collection of excessive free 15
water on surface. 16
2. Minimum cement contents and maximum water cement ratios 17
for concrete to be as follows: 18
19
MINIMUM CEMENT, LB /CY 20
MAXIMUM WATER 21
SPECIFIED MAXIMUM AGGREGATE SIZE, IN CEMENT RATIO 22
STRENGTH 1/2 3/4 1 BY WEIGHT 23
24
3000 - -- 517 517 0.45 25
4000 611 611 611 0.45 26
27
3. Substitution of fly ash: 28
a. Maximum of 15 percent by weight of cement at rate of 29
1 LB fly ash for 1 LB of cement. 30
4. Sand cement grout: 31
a. Three parts sand. 32
b. One part portland cement. 33
c. Entrained air: Six percent plus or minus one 34
percent. 35
d. Sufficient water for required workability. 36
e. Minimum 28 -day compressive strength: 3,000 psi. 37
5. Submit mix design data as required by this specification section. 38
6. Normal weight concrete: Proportion mixture to provide desired 39
characteristics using one of methods described below: 40
a. Method 1 (Trial Mix): Per ACI 318, Chapter 5, except as modified 41
herein. 42
1) Air content within range specified above. 43
2) Record and report temperature of trial mixes. 44
3) Proportion trial mixes per ACI 211.1. 45
b. Method 2 (Field Experience): Per ACI 318, Chapter 5, except as 46
modified herein: - 47
1) Field test records must be acceptable to Engineer to use this 48
method. 49
2) Test records shall represent materials, proportions and 50
conditions similar to those specified. 51
7. Required average strength to exceed the specified 28 day compressive 52
strength by the amount determined or calculated in accordance with 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1 03002 -9
I 01 the requirements of paragraph 5.3 of ACI 318 -89 using the standard 01
02 deviation of the proposed concrete production facility as described 02
03 in paragraph 5.3.1 of ACI 318 -89. 03
' 04 04
05 F. Allowable Shrinkage: 0.048 percent per ASTM C157. 05
06 06
07 07
II
08 PART 3 - EXECUTION 08
09 09
10 3.01 FORMING AND PLACING CONCRETE 10
' 11 11
12 A. General: 12
13 1. Contractor is responsible for design and erection of formwork. 13
' 14 2. Construct formwork so that concrete members and structures are of 14
15 correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. 15
16 a. Allowable tolerances: As recommended in ACI 347. 16
17 3. Provide slabs and beams of minimum indicated depth when sloping 17
II
18 foundation base slabs or elevated floor slabs to drains. 18
19 a. For slabs on grade, slope top of subgrade to provide floor slabs 19
20 of minimum uniform indicated depth. 20
' 21
22 b. Do not place floor drains through beams. 21
22
23 B. Openings: Provide openings in formwork to accommodate work of other 23
II 24 trades. 24
25 1. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 25
26 26
27 C. Chamfer Strips: Place 3/4 IN chamfer strips in forms to produce 3/4 IN 27
II 28 wide beveled edges on permanently exposed corners of members. 28
29 29
30 D. Reinforcement: 30
I 31 1. Position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. 31
32 2. Locate and support with chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and 32
33 hangers, as required. 33
II 34 3. Set wire ties so ends do not touch forms and are directed into 34
35 concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. 35
36 4. Lap splice lengths: ACI 318 Class B top bar tension splices unless 36
37 indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 37
II 38 5. Extend reinforcement to within 2 IN of concrete perimeter edges. 38
39 a. If perimeter edge is earth formed, extend 39
40 reinforcement to within 3 IN of the edge. 40
' 41
42 6. Unless otherwise indicated, provide minimum concrete cover as 41
follows: 42
43 a. Concrete deposited against earth: 3 IN. 43
II 44 b. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with earth: 2 44
45 IN for reinforcing bars #6 or larger; 1 -1/2 IN for reinforcing 45
46 bars less than #6. 46
47 c. Formed surfaces exposed to or located above any liquid: 2 IN. 47
I
48 d. Interior surfaces: 1 -1/2 IN for beams, girders and columns; 3/4 48
49 IN or bar diameter, whichever is greater, for slabs, walls and 49
50 joists. 50
' 51 7. Do not weld reinforcing bars. 51
52 8. Welded wire fabric: 52
53 a. Install welded wire fabric in maximum practical sizes. 53
I WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
03002 -10
01 b. Splice sides and ends with a splice lap length measured between 01
02 outermost cross wires of each fabric sheet not less than: 02
03 1) One spacing of cross wires plus 2 IN. 03
04 2) 1.5 x development length. 04
05 3) 6 IN. 05
06 c. Development length: ACI 318 basic development length for the 06
07 specified fabric yield strength. 07
08 08
09 E. Construction, Expansion, and Contraction Joints: 09
10 1. Provide at locations indicated. 10
11 2. Locate construction joints in floor slabs and foundation base slabs 11
12 so that concrete placements are approximately square and do not 12
13 exceed 2500 SF. 13
14 3. At least 48 HRS shall elapse between placing of adjoining concrete 14
15 construction. 15
16 4. Thoroughly clean and remove all laitance and loose and foreign 16
17 particles from construction joints. 17
18 5. Before new concrete is placed, coat all construction joints with an 18
19 approved bonding adhesive used and applied in accordance with 19
20 manufacturer's instructions. 20
21 21
22 F. Embedments: 22
23 1. Set and build in anchorage devices and other embedded items required 23
24 for other work that is attached to, or supported by concrete. 24
25 2. Use setting diagrams, templates and instructions for locating and 25
26 setting. 26
27 27
28 G. Preparation: 28
29 1. Clean and adjust forms prior to concrete placement. 29
30 2. Tighten forms to prevent mortar leakage. 30
31 3. Coat form surfaces with form release agents prior to placing 31
32 reinforcing bars in forms. 32
33 33
34 H. Placing Concrete: 34
35 1. Place concrete in compliance with ACI 304 and 304.2R. 35
36 2. Place in a continuous operation within planned joints or sections 36
37 3. Begin placement when work of other trades affecting concrete is 37
38 completed. 38
39 4. Place concrete by methods which prevent aggregate segregation. 39
40 5. Do not allow concrete to free fall more than 4 FT. 40
41 6. Where free fall of concrete will exceed 4 FT, place concrete by means 41
42 of tremie pipe or chute. 42
43 43
44 I. Consolidation: 44
45 1. Consolidate all concrete using mechanical vibrators supplemented with 45
46 hand rodding and tamping, so that concrete is worked around 46
47 reinforcement and embedded items into all parts of forms. 47
48 48
49 J. Protection: 49
50 1. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength due to 50
51 weather extremes. 51
52 2. In cold weather comply with ACI 306R except as modified herein. 52
53 a. Do not place concrete on frozen ground or in contact with forms 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
II
I 01
02
03
' 04
05
06
I 07
08
09
10
' 11
12
13
I 14
15
16
17
I 18
19
20
I 21
22
23
' 24
25
26
27
II 28
29
30
I 31
32
33
I 34
35
36
38
I 38
39
40
I 41
42
43
I 44
45
46
II 48
48
49
50
II 51
52
53
1
II
or reinforcing bars coated with frost, ice or snow. 01
b. Minimum concrete temperature at the time of mixing: 02
03
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE CONCRETE TEMPERATURE 04
AT PLACEMENT (IN SHADE) AT MIXING 05
06
Below 30 DegF 70 DegF 07
Between 30 -45 DegF 60 DegF 08
Above 45 DegF 50 DegF 09
10
c. Do not place heated concrete that is warmer than 80 DegF. 11
d. If freezing temperatures are expected during curing, maintain the 12
concrete temperature at or above 50 DegF for 7 days or 70 DegF 13
for 3 days. 14
e. Do not allow concrete to cool suddenly. 15
16
3. In hot weather comply with ACI 305R except as modified herein. 17
a. At air temperature of 90 DegF and above, keep concrete as cool as 18
possible during placement and curing. 19
b. Do not allow concrete temperature to exceed 70 DegF at placement. 20
c. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking due to rapid evaporation of 21
moisture. 22
d. Do not place concrete when the actual or anticipated evaporation 23
rate equals or exceeds 0.2 LBS /SF /HR as determined from ACI 305R, 24
Figure 2.1.5. 25
26
K. Curing: 27
1. Begin curing concrete as soon as free water has disappeared from 28
exposed surfaces. 29
2. Cure concrete by use of moisture retaining cover, burlap kept 30
continuously wet or by membrane curing compound. 31
3. Provide protection as required to prevent damage to concrete and to 32
prevent moisture loss from concrete during curing period. 33
4. Provide curing for minimum of 7 days. 34
5. Form materials left in place may be considered as curing materials 35
for surfaces in contact with the form materials except in periods of 36
hot weather. 37
6. In hot weather follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 305R. 38
7. In cold weather follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 306R. 39
8. If forms are removed before 7 days has elapsed, finish curing of 40
formed surfaces by one of above methods for the remainder of the 41
curing period. 42
9. Curing vertical surfaces with a curing compound: Cover vertical 43
surfaces with a minimum of two coats of the curing compound. 44
a. Allow the preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying the 45
next coat. 46
b. Apply the first coat of curing compound immediately after form 47
removal. 48
c. Vertical surface at the time of receiving the first coat shall be 49
damp with no free water on the surface. 50
d. A vertical surface is defined as any surface steeper than 1 51
vertical to 4 horizontal. 52
53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
03002 -11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
03002 -12
01 3.02 CONCRETE FINISHES 01
02 02
03 A. Tolerances: 1/4 IN to 10 FT. 03
04 04
05 B. Surfaces Exposed to View: 05
06 1. Remove fins and projections, and patch voids, air pockets, and 06
07 honeycomb areas with cement grout. 07
08 2. Fill tie holes with nonshrink nonmetallic grout. 08
09 09
10 C. Surfaces Not Exposed to View: 10
11 1. Patch voids, air pockets and honeycomb areas with cement grout. 11
12 2. Fill tie holes with nonshrink nonmetallic grout. 12
13 13
14 D. Grout Cleaned Finish (apply where scheduled): 14
15 1. Mix a part portland cement and 1 -1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient 15
16 bonding agent /water mixture to produce a grout with the consistency 16
17 of thick paint. 17
18 a. White portland cement shall be substituted for gray portland 18
19 cement to produce a color that matches color of surrounding 19
20 concrete as determined by trial patch for areas not to be 20
21 painted. 21
22 2. Wet surface of concrete to prevent absorption of water by grout and 22
23 uniformly apply grout with brushes or spray gun. 23
24 3. Immediately scrub the surface with a cork float or stone to coat and 24
25 fill air bubbles and holes. 25
26 4. While grout is still plastic, remove all excess grout by working 26
27 surface with rubber float, sack or other approved means. 27
28 5. After the surface whitens from drying, rub vigorously with clean 28
29 burlap. 29
30 6. Keep final finish damp for a minimum of 36 HRS after final rubbing. 30
31 31
32 E. Slab Float Finish (apply where scheduled): 32
33 1. After concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off, and 33
34 leveled, do no further work until ready for floating. 34
35 2. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has 35
36 stiffened sufficiently to permit operation. 36
37 3. During or after first floating, check planeness of entire surface 37
38 with a 10 FT straightedge applied at not less than two different 38
39 angles. 39
40 4. Cut down all high spots and fill all low spots during this procedure 40
41 to produce a surface within Class B tolerance throughout. 41
42 5. Refloat slab immediately to a uniform sandy texture. 42
43 43
44 F. Troweled Finish (apply where scheduled): 44
45 1. Float finish surface. 45
46 2. Next power trowel, and finally hand trowel. 46
47 3. Produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects with 47
48 first hand troweling. 48
49 4. Perform additional trowelings by hand after surface has hardened 49
50 sufficiently. 50
51 5. Final trowel when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over 51
52 surface. 52
53 6. Thoroughly consolidate surface by hand troweling. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1 03002 -13
I 01 7. Leave finished surface essentially free of trowel marks, uniform in 01
02 texture and appearance and plane to a Class A tolerance. 02
03 8. On surfaces intended to support floor coverings remove any defects of 03
I 04 sufficient magnitude that would show through floor covering by 04
05 grinding. 05
06 06
I 07
08 G. Broom Finish (apply where scheduled): Immediately after concrete has 07
received a float finish as specified, give it a transverse scored texture 08
09 by drawing a broom across surface. 09
10 10
I 11 3.03 GROUT 11
12 12
13 A. Preparation: 13
I 14 1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout: 14
15 a. Clean concrete surface to receive grout. 15
16 b. Saturate concrete with water for 24 HRS prior to 16
I 17 grouting. 17
18 2. Epoxy grout: Apply only to clean, dry, sound surface. 18
19 19
20 B. Application: 20
I 21 1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout: 21
22 a. Mix in a mechanical mixer. 22
23 b. Use no more water than necessary to produce flowable 23
I 24
25 grout. 24
c. Place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 25
26 d. Completely fill all spaces and cavities below the 26
27 bottom of baseplates. 27
II
28 e. Provide forms where baseplates and bedplates do not 28
29 confine grout. 29
30 f. Where exposed to view, finish grout edges smooth. 30
' 31 g. Except where a slope is indicated on Drawings, finish 31
32 edges flush at the baseplate, bedplate, member, or 32
33 piece of equipment. 33
' 34 h. Protect against rapid moisture loss by covering with 34
35 wet rags or polyethylene sheets. 35
36 i. Wet cure grout for 7 days, minimum. 36
37 2. Epoxy grout: 37
II
38 a. Mix and place in accordance with manufacturer's 38
39 instructions. 39
40 b. Completely fill all cavities and spaces around dowels 40
' 41 and anchors without voids. 41
42 c. Obtain manufacturer's field technical assistance as 42
43 required to ensure proper placement. 43
I 44 44
45 45
46 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 46
47 47
II
48 A. Owner will employ and pay for services of a concrete testing laboratory 48
49 to perform testing of concrete placed during construction. 49
50 1. Contractor to cooperate with Owner in obtaining and testing samples. 50
' 51 51
52 B. Tests During Construction: 52
53 1. Strength test - procedure: 53
I WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
03002 -14
01 a. Three cylinders, 6 IN DIA x 12 IN high, will be taken 01
02 from each sample per ASTM C172 and C31. 02
03 b. Cylinders will be tested per ASTM C39: 03
04 1) One at 7 days. 04
05 2) Two at 28 days. 05
06 2. Strength test - frequency: 06
07 a. Not less than one test each day concrete placed. 07
08 b. Not less than one test for each 50 CY or major 08
09 fraction thereof placed in one day. 09
10 c. Not less than one test for each type of concrete 10
11 poured. 11
12 d. Not less than one test for each concrete structure 12
13 exceeding 2 CY volume. 13
14 3. Slump test: Per ASTM C143. 14
15 a. Determined for each strength test sample. 15
16 b. Additional slump tests may be taken. 16
17 4. Air content: Per ASTM C231, C173, and C138. 17
18 a. Determined for each strength test sample. 18
19 5. Temperature: Determined for each strength test sample. 19
20 6. Unit weight of lightweight concrete. 20
21 a. Determined for each strength test sample. 21
22 b. Sample taken at point of discharge of fresh concrete. 22
23 23
24 C. Evaluation of Tests: 24
25 1. Strength test results: Average of 28 -day strength of two 25
26 cylinders from each sample. 26
27 a. If one cylinder manifests evidence of improper 27
28 sampling, molding, handling, curing or testings, 28
29 strength of remaining cylinder will be test result. 29
30 b. If both cylinders show any of above defects, test 30
31 will be discarded. 31
32 32
33 D. Acceptance of Concrete: 33
34 1. Strength level of each type of concrete shall be considered 34
35 satisfactory if both of the following requirements are met: 35
36 a. Average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equals or 36
37 exceeds the required specified 28 -day compressive strength. 37
38 b. No individual strength test falls below the required specified 38
39 28 -day compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 39
40 40
41 3.05 SCHEDULES 41
42 42
43 A. Form Types: 43
44 1. Surfaces exposed to view: 44
45 a. Prefabricated plywood panel forms, job -built plywood forms, or 45
46 forms lined with plywood or fiberboard. 46
47 b. Laid out in a regular and uniform pattern with long dimensions 47
48 vertical and joints aligned. 48
49 c. Produce finished surfaces free from offsets, ridges, waves, and 49
50 concave or convex areas. 50
51 d. Construct forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. 51
52 2. Surfaces not normally exposed to view: 52
53 a. Wood or steel forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
03002 -15
01 mortar. 01
02 3. Other types of forms may be used: 02
03 a. For surfaces not restricted to plywood or lined forms. 03
04 b. As backing for form lining. 04
05 05
06 B. Grout: 06
07 1. Nonshrinking nonmetallic grout: General use. 07
08 2. Epoxy grout: 08
09 a. Grouting of dowels and anchor bolts into existing concrete. 09
10 b. Other uses indicated on Drawings. 10
11 11
12 C. Concrete: See 2.03 B. 12
13 13
14 D. Provide Concrete Finishes as follows, unless otherwise noted: 14
15 1. Formed finishes: 15
16 a. Provide initial finish as specified in 3.02 B and C. 16
17 b. Grout cleaned finish: All formed surfaces exposed to view. 17
18 2. Slab finishes: 18
19 a. Floated finish: Initial finish on all slab surfaces. 19
20 b. Troweled finish: Equipment bases and column bases. 20
21 c. Broom finish: Sidewalks and exterior slabs. 21
22 22
23 END OF SECTION 23
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION 9
FINISHES
1 09905 -1
1 01 91K25 SECTION 09905 01
02 02
03 PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 03
' 04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
II 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Painting and protective coatings. 11
12 12
13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13
' 14
15 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and 14
Conditions of the Contract. 15
16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16
17 17
II 18 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 18
19 19
20 A. Referenced Standards: 20
' 21 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 21
22 a. A224.1, Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for 22
23 Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and 23
' 24 Frames. 24
25 b. Z53.1, Safety Color Code for Marking Physical 25
26 Hazards. 26
27 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 27
II
28 a. E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning 28
29 Characteristics of Building Materials. 29
30 3. National Bureau of Standards (NBS): 30
31 a. Certified Coating Thickness Calibration Standards. 31
32 4. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 32
33 a. 101, Life Safety Code. 33
I 34 5. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC): 34
35 a. SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. 35
36 b. SP -2, Hand Tool Cleaning. 36
II 37 c. SP -3, Power Tool Cleaning. 37
38 d. SP -6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. 38
39 e. SP -10, Near -White Blast Cleaning. 39
40 40
' 41 B. Qualifications: 41
42 1. Coating manufacturer's authorized representative shall 42
43 provide written statement attesting that Applicator has 43
' 44 been instructed on proper preparation, mixing and 44
45 application procedures for coatings specified. 45
46 2. Applicator shall have minimum of 5 years experience in 46
47 application of similar products. Provide references for 47
II
48 minimum of three different projects completed in last 5 48
49 years. Include name and address of project, size of 49
50 project in value (painting) and contact person. 50
' 51 51
52 C. Miscellaneous: 52
53 1. Furnish paint through one manufacturer when possible. 53
I
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
09905 -2
01 01
02 1.03 DEFINITIONS 02
03 03
04 A. Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is the 04
05 person actually installing or applying the product in the 05
06 field at the Project site. - 06
07 1. Installer or applicator are synonymous. 07
08 08
09 B. Approved Factory Finish: Finish on a product in compliance 09
10 with the finish specified in the section where the product is 10
11 specified or in Section 11005, Equipment: General 11
12 Requirements. 12
13 13
14 C. Corrosive Environment: Immersion in, or not more than 6 IN 14
15 above, or subject to frequent spillage or splash of a 15
16 corrosive material such as: Water, wastewater, or chemical 16
17 solution; or chronic exposure to corrosive, caustic or acidic 17
18 agent, chemicals, chemical fumes, chemical mixture, or 18
19 solution. 19
20 20
21 D. Exposed Exterior Surface: Surface which is exposed to 21
22 weather but not necessarily exposed to view as well as 22
23 surface exposed to view. 23
24 24
25 E. Painting Coverage Rate: Coverage expressed in SF /GAL /coat 25
26 are manufacturer's published theoretical coverage in square 26
27 foot per gallon. 27
28 28
29 F. Paint includes fillers, primers, sealers, emulsions, oils, 29
30 alkyds, latex, enamels, thinners, stains, epoxies, vinyls, 30
31 chlorinated rubbers, urethanes, shellacs, varnishes, and any 31
32 other applied coating specified within this Section. 32
33 33
34 G. Thinned (when used in regard to VOC contents): In accordance 34
35 with manufacturer's recommendations. 35
36 36
37 H. VOC: Volatile Organic Compounds. 37
38 38
39 1.04 SUBMITTALS 39
40 40
41 A. Applicator experience qualifications. 41
42 42
43 B. Shop Drawings: 43
44 1. See Section 01340. 44
45 2. Product technical data including: 45
46 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet 46
47 requirements of standards referenced. 47
48 b. Manufacturer's application instructions. 48
49 c. Manufacturer's surface preparation instructions. 49
50 d. If products being used are manufactured by Company 50
51 other than listed in Article 2.02, provide complete 51
52 individual data sheet comparison of proposed products 52
53 with specified products including application 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
09905 -3
01 procedure, coverage rates and verification that 01
02 product is designed for intended use. 02
03 e. Manufacturer's factory - applied finish information. 03
04 Refer to paragraph 3.02 B. 04
05 f. Contractor's written plan of action for containing 05
06 airborne particles created by blasting operation and 06
07 location of disposal of spent contaminated blasting 07
08 media. 08
09 g. Coating manufacturer's recommendation on abrasive 09
10 blasting. 10
11 3. Certification: 11
12 a. Coating manufacturer's written approval of 12
13 Contractor's application equipment. 13
14 14
15 C. Samples: 15
16 1. Manufacturer's full line of colors for Engineer's color 16
17 selection. 17
18 2. After initial color selection by Engineer provide two 3 x 18
19 5 IN samples of each color selected. 19
20 20
21 21
22 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 22
23 23
24 A. Deliver in original containers, labeled as follows: 24
25 1. Name or type number of material. 25
26 2. Manufacturer's name and item stock number. 26
27 3. Contents, by volume, of major constituents. 27
28 4. Warning labels. 28
29 5. VOC content. 29
30 30
31 31
32 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 32
33 33
34 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 34
35 35
36 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the 36
37 following Manufacturers are acceptable: 37
38 1. Tnemec. 38
39 2. Ameron Protective Coatings Div. 39
40 3. Glidden Coatings. 40
41 4. Valspar Corp. 41
42 5. Carboline Protective Coatings. 42
43 6. Porter Coatings. 43
44 7. PPG. 44
45 8. Sherwin Williams. 45
46 9. CON -LUX Coatings, Inc. 46
47 47
48 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with 48
49 Specification Section 01640. 49
50 50
51 2.02 MATERIALS 51
52 52
53 A. All materials used must contain not more than 3.5 LBS /GAL VOC 53
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
09905 -4
01 as applied (in thinned state) unless noted otherwise. 01
02 02
03 B. For unspecified materials such as turpentine or linseed oil, 03
04 provide manufacturer's recommended products. 04
05 05
06 C. Paint Systems - General: 06
07 1. P =prime coat. F1, F2 . . . Fn = first finish coat, 07
08 second finish coat . . . . nth finish coat, color as 08
09 selected by Engineer. 09
10 2. If two finish coats of same material are required, 10
11 Contractor may, at his option and by written approval 11
12 from paint manufacturer, apply one coat equal to mil 12
13 thickness of two coats specified. 13
14 14
15 D. Products specified are manufactured by Tnemec. 15
16 16
17 E. Paint Systems: 17
18 18
19 1. System #1 - Epoxy - Polyamide Primer with Epoxy - Polyamide or Acrylic 19
20 Polyurethane Enamel Top Coats. 20
21 21
22 Tnemec 22
23 23
24 P1 =66 -1211 Epoxoline Primer (Epoxy - Polyamide) VOC =3.42 24
25 1 coat, 3 mils 25
26 299 SF /GAL /coat 26
27 F1= Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline (Epoxy - Polyamide) 27
28 1 coat, 3 mils 28
29 300 SF /GAL /coat 29
30 *F2= Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline (Epoxy - Polyamide) 30
31 1 coat, 3 mils 31
32 300 SF /GAL /coat 32
33 *F2E Series 73 Endura - Shield III (Acrylic VOC =3.50 33
34 Polyurethane Enamel) 34
35 1 coat, 2.5 mils 35
36 372 SF /GAL /coat 36
37 *Replace F2 with F2E for exterior environment. 37
38 38
39 2. System #2 - Polyamidoamine Epoxy with Polyamidoamine Epoxy Top Coat 39
40 (with Polyurethane Enamel Color Coat on Exposed Surfaces). 40
41 41
42 Tnemec 42
43 43
44 P1= Series 69 -1211 Epoxoline Primer 11 Primer VOC =2.75 44
45 (Polyamidoamine Epoxy) 45
46 1 coat, 5 mils 46
47 221 SF /GAL /coat 47
48 *F1= Series 69 High -Build Epoxoline 11 VOC =2.75 48
49 (Polyamidoamine Epoxy) 49
50 1 coat, 5 mils 50
51 221 SF /GAL /coat 51
52 *Add F2 equal to Fl for exposed surfaces of exterior environment 52
53 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01 3. System #3 - Epoxy- Polyamide Primer with Epoxy - Polyamide or Acrylic 01
02 Polyurethane Enamel Top Coats. 02
03 03
04 Tnemec 04
05 05
06 P1= Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline VOC =3.42 06
07 (Epoxy - Polyamide) 07
08 1 coat, 2 mils 08
09 450 SF /GAL /coat 09
10 *F1= Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline 10
11 (Epoxy - Polyamide) 11
12 1 coat, 2 mils 12
13 450 SF /GAL /coat 13
14 *F1E= Series 73 Endura - Shield III (Acrylic VOC =3.5 14
15 Polyurethane Enamel) 15
16 1 coat, 2.5 mils 16
17 372 SF /GAL /coat 17
18 *Replace Fl with F1E for exterior environment 18
19 19
20 4. System #5 - Moisture -Cured Urethane Primer 20
21 with Epoxy - Polyamide or Acrylic Polyurethane Enamel Top 21
22 Coats. 22
23 23
24 Tnemec 24
25 25
26 P1 =50 -330 Poly -Ura -Prime (Moisture -Cured VOC =3.42 26
27 Urethane) 27
28 1 coat, 2.5 mils 28
29 327 SF /GAL /coat 29
30 *F1 =Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline VOC =3.42 30
31 (Epoxy - Polyamide) 31
32 1 coat, 4 mils 32
33 225 SF /GAL coat 33
34 *FlE= Series 73 Endura - Shield III (Acrylic VOC =3.50 34
35 Polyurethane Enamel) 35
36 1 coat, 4 mils 36
37 233 SF /GAL /coat 37
38 *Replace F1 with F1E for exterior environment. 38
39 39
40 5. System #19 - Epoxy - Polyamide Coating. 40
41 41
42 Tnemec 42
43 43
44 P1 =Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline VOC =3.42 44
45 (Epoxy - Polyamide) 45
46 1 coat, 5 mils 46
47 180 SF /GAL /coat 47
48 48
49 49
50 PART 3 - EXECUTION 50
51 51
52 3.01 ITEMS TO BE PAINTED 52
53 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
09905 -5
' 09905 -6
' 01 A. Exposed Exterior Surfaces including: 01
02 1. Plain and insulated metal piping, valves, fittings, 02
03 hydrants, and appurtenances (paint piping prior to insulation). 03
' 04 2. Ferrous metals, except galvanized. 04
05 3. Copper and brass surfaces. 05
06 06
07 D. New and Relocated Equipment: 07
08 1. Paint new and relocated equipment, except: 08
09 a. Where noted in Article 3.02. 09
10 b. Where specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 10
' 11 11
12 3.02 ITEMS NOT TO BE PAINTED 12
13 13
14 A. General: Do not paint items listed in Article 3.02 unless 14
15 specifically noted in the Contract Documents to be painted. 15
16 16
17 B. Items with Approved Factory Finish: 17
I
18 1. Do not field paint items with Approved Factory Finishes, 18
19 as defined. 19
20 20
' 21 C. Electrical Equipment: 21
22 1. Do not field paint certain items of electrical equipment 22
23 as listed in Section 11005; except where painting is 23
I 24 specifically stated elsewhere in these Contract 24
25 Documents, or where the equipment is subject to a 25
26 corrosive environment. The list of equipment includes 26
27 specific types of equipment with Approved Factory 27
I 28 Finishes. 28
29 2. Conduit and appurtenances. 29
30 30
' 31 D. Surfaces Hidden from View including: 31
32 1. Piping, except exposed insulated piping. 32
33 2. Conduit. 33
34 3. Miscellaneous steel. 34
II
35 4. Note: Manufacturer's standard coatings, if any, may 35
36 remain. 36
37 37
' 38 E. Other Items: 38
39 1. Stainless steel surfaces. 39
40 2. Aluminum surfaces except: 40
41 a. Where imbedded in concrete. 41
42 b. Where in contact with dissimilar metals. 42
43 3. Fiberglass surfaces. 43
44 4. Interior of pipe, ductwork, and conduits. 44
11
45 5. Moving parts of mechanical and electrical units where 45
46 painting would interfere with the operation of the unit. 46
47 6. Code labels and equipment identification and rating 47
I 48 plates. 48
49 7. Exterior concrete. 49
50 8. Face brick: Ceramic tile; quarry tile; plastic laminate. 50
I 51 9. Contact surfaces of friction -type connections. 51
52 10. Exposed insulating and jacketing. 52
53 11. Galvanized metal surfaces. 53
1 WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 12. Plastic surfaces, including PVC. 01
02 02
03 3.03 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS TO BE PAINTED VERSUS PAINTING SYSTEMS 03
04 04
05 PAINTING 05
06 SYSTEM 06
07 NUMBER 07
08 == = =. === 08
09 09
10 A. Ferrous Metals: 1 10
11 1. Except products with approved factory finishes, and 11
12 ferrous metals subject to corrosive environment. 12
13 2. Includes steel and iron piping, valves, fittings, 13
14 pumps, and similar items. Does not include ferrous 14
15 metals subject to corrosive environment. 15
16 16
17 B. Ferrous metals subject to corrosive environment 2 17
18 including ferrous metal components of bar screens, 18
19 grit washers, interior of tanks, wetted parts of 19
20 digester covers, clarifier mechanisms, sluice gates, 20
21 trickling filter mechanisms, and similar items. 21
22 22
23 C. Steel equipment with factory - applied prime or finish 5 23
24 including: 24
25 1. Equipment specifically indicated in the Contract 25
26 Documents to be painted. Factory - applied coats to 26
27 remain. 27
28 28
29 D. Non - ferrous metals: Including copper and brass. 3 29
30 30
31 E. Aluminum buried in concrete and between dissimilar 19 31
32 metals which are not below liquid level. 32
33 33
34 34
35 3.04 PREPARATION 3
36 36
37 A. General: 37
38 1. Prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with coating 38
39 manufacturer's instructions and this Section. 39
40 2. Remove all dust, grease, oil, compounds, dirt and other 40
41 foreign matter which would prevent bonding of coating to 41
42 surface. 42
43 43
44 B. Protection: 44
45 1. Protect surrounding surfaces not to be coated. 45
46 2. Remove and protect hardware, accessories, plates, 46
47 fixtures, finished work, and similar items; or provide 47
48 ample in -place protection. 48
49 49
50 C. Prepare and Paint Before Assembly: Where equipment is 50
51 subject to corrosive environment, prepare and paint, before 51
52 assembly, all surfaces which may be subject to corrosive 52
53 environment which are inaccessible after assembly. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
09905 -7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
09905 -8
01 01
02 D. Ferrous Metal: 02
03 1. Complete fabrication, welding or burning before beginning 03
04 surface preparation. 04
05 a. Chip or grind off flux, spatter, slag or other 05
06 laminations left from welding. 06
07 b. Remove mill scale. 07
08 c. Grind smooth rough welds and other sharp projections. 08
09 2. Surfaces subject to corrosive environment: 09
10 a. Near -white blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP -10. 10
11 3. Interior and exterior surfaces not subject to corrosive 11
12 environment (including structural steel surfaces): 12
13 a. Commercial blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP -6. 13
14 b. Engineer reserves right to accept preparation of 14
15 these surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP -3 for areas 15
16 not practical or possible to abrasive blast to SSPC 16
17 SP -6 requirements. 17
18 18
19 E. Preparation by Abrasive Blasting: 19
20 1. Schedule the abrasive blasting operation so blasted 20
21 surfaces will not be wet after blasting and before 21
22 painting. 22
23 2. Reblast surfaces allowed to set overnight prior to 23
24 priming or surfaces that show rust bloom. 24
25 3. Profile depth of blasted surface: Not less than 1 mil or 25
26 greater than 2 mils unless noted otherwise by coating 26
27 manufacturer. 27
28 4. Provide compressed air for blasting that is free of water 28
29 and oil. Provide accessible separators and traps. 29
30 5. Confine blast abrasives to area being blasted. 30
31 a. Provide shields of polyethylene sheeting or other 31
32 such barriers to confine blast material. 32
33 b. Plug pipes, holes, or openings before blasting and 33
34 keep plugged until blast operation is complete and 34
35 residue is removed. 35
36 6. Protect nameplates, valve stems, rotating equipment, 36
37 motors and other items that may be damaged from blasting. 37
38 7. Reblast surfaces not meeting requirements of these 38
39 Specifications. 39
40 8. Do not reuse abrasive blasting material. 40
41 9. Properly dispose of blasting material which has been 41
42 contaminated with debris from blasting operation. 42
43 43
44 3.05 APPLICATION 44
45 45
46 A. General: 46
47 1. Mix and apply coatings by brush, roller, or spray in 47
48 accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 48
49 a. Application equipment must be inspected and approved 49
50 in writing by coating manufacturer. 50
51 2. Temperature and Weather Conditions: 51
52 a. Do not paint surfaces when surface temperature is 52
53 below 50 DegF. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 b. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sun. 01
02 c. Do not paint on damp surfaces. 02
03 3. Provide complete coverage to mil thickness specified. 03
04 a. Thickness specified is dry mill thickness. 04
05 b. All paint systems are to cover." In situations of 05
06 discrepancy between manufacturer's square footage 06
07 coverage rates and mil thickness, mil thickness 07
08 requirements govern. 08
09 c. When color or undercoats show through, apply 09
10 additional coats until paint film is of uniform 10
11 finish and color. 11
12 4. If so directed by Engineer, do not apply consecutive 12
13 coats until Engineer has had an opportunity to observe 13
14 and approve previous coats. 14
15 5. Apply materials under adequate illumination. 15
16 6. Evenly spread and flow on to provide full, smooth 16
17 coverage. 17
18 7. Work each application of material into corners, crevices, 18
19 joints, and other difficult to work areas. 19
20 8. Avoid degradation and contamination of blasted surfaces 20
21 and avoid intercoat contamination. 21
22 a. Clean contaminated surfaces before applying next 22
23 coat. 23
24 9. Smooth out runs or sags immediately, or remove and 24
25 recoat entire surface. 25
26 10. Allow preceding coats to dry before recoating. 26
27 a. Recoat within time limits specified by coating 27
28 manufacturer. 28
29 11. Allow coated surfaces to cure prior to allowing traffic 29
30 or other work to proceed. 30
31 12. Coat all aluminum in contact with dissimilar materials. 31
32 32
33 B. Prime Coat Application: 33
34 1. Prime all surfaces indicated to be painted. Apply prime 34
35 coat in accordance with coating manufacturer's written 35
36 instructions and as written in this Section. 36
37 2. Ensure field - applied coatings are compatible with 37
38 factory - applied coatings. 38
39 a. Employ services of coating manufacturer's qualified 39
40 technical representative to determine if 40
41 factory - applied coatings are compatible with proposed 41
42 field - applied coatings. If factory - applied coating 42
43 is found to be not compatible with proposed 43
44 field - applied coatings, require the coating 44
45 manufacturer's technical representative to recommend, 45
46 in writing, product to be used as barrier coat, 46
47 thickness to be applied, surface preparation, and 47
48 method of application. 48
49 b. Perform test patch to determine coating compatibility 49
50 and adherence. 50
51 c. At Contractor's option, factory - applied coatings may 51
52 be removed, surface reprepared, and new coating 52
53 applied using appropriate paint system listed in 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
09905 -9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
09905 -10
01 paragraph 2.02 E. 01
02 3. Apply primer to abrasive blasted surface the same day the 02
03 surface is blasted and before rust bloom occurs. 03
04 4. Prime ferrous metals embedded in concrete to minimum of 1 04
05 IN below exposed surfaces. 05
06 5. Apply zinc -rich primers while under continuous agitation. 06
07 6. Ensure abrasive blasting operation does not result in 07
08 embedment of abrasive particles in paint film. 08
09 7. Brush or spray bolts, welds, edges and difficult access 09
10 areas with primer prior to primer application over entire 10
11 surface. 11
12 8. Touch up damaged primer coats prior to finish coats. 12
13 Restore primed surface equal to surface before damage. 13
14 14
15 C. Finish Coat Application: 15
16 1. Apply finish coats in accordance with coating 16
17 manufacturer's written instructions and as written in 17
18 this Section. 18
19 2. Touch up damaged finish coats using same application 19
20 method and same material specified for finish coat. 20
21 Prepare damaged area in accordance with Article 3.04. 21
22 22
23 23
24 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 24
25 25
26 A. Measure wet paint with wet film thickness gages. 26
27 27
28 B. Measure paint dry film thickness with Mikrotest gage 28
29 calibrated against National Bureau of Standards "Certified 29
30 Coating Thickness Calibration Standards." 30
31 1. Engineer may measure paint thickness at any time during 31
32 project to assure conformance with specifications. 32
33 33
34 C. Measure surface temperature of items to be painted with 34
35 surface temperature gage specifically designed for such. 35
36 36
37 D. Measure substrate humidity with humidity gage specifically 37
38 designed for such. 38
39 39
40 E. Provide wet paint signs. 40
41 41
42 3.07 CLEANING 42
43 43
44 A. Clean paint spattered surfaces. Use care not to damage 44
45 finished surfaces. 45
46 46
47 B. Upon completion of painting, replace hardware, accessories, 47
48 plates, fixtures, and similar items. 48
49 49
50 C. Remove surplus materials, scaffolding, and debris. Leave 50
51 areas broom clean. 51
52 52
53 END OF SECTION 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION 11
EQUIPMENT
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 90H16 SECTION 11005 01
02 02
03 EQUIPMENT: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03
04 04
05 PART 1 - GENERAL 05
06 06
07 1.01 SUMMARY 07
08 08
09 A. Section Includes: 09
10 1. Requirements of this Section apply to all equipment provided on the 10
11 Project including that found in Divisions 11, 13, 15, and 16, even if 11
12 not specifically referenced in individual "Equipment" articles of 12
13 those Specifications. 13
14 14
15 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 15
16 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and 16
17 Conditions of the Contract. 17
18 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 18
19 3. Section 03002 - Concrete. 19
20 4. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 20
21 5. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: General 21
22 Requirements. 22
23 6. Section 16010 - Electrical General Information. 23
24 24
25 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 25
26 26
27 A. Referenced Standards: 27
28 1. Anti - Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association (AFBMA). 28
29 2. American Gear Manufacturers Association (AGMA). 29
30 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 30
31 a. A307, Standard Specification Carbon Steel Bolts and 31
32 Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 32
33 b. F593, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel 33
34 Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. 34
35 4. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 35
36 ' a. 112, Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction 36
37 Motors and Generators. 37
38 5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 38
39 a. 250, Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 39
40 b. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and System. 40
41 c. MG1, Motors and Generators. 41
42 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 42
43 a. 70, 1987 National Electrical Code (NEC). 43
44 44
45 B. Miscellaneous: 45
46 1. A single manufacturer of a "product" to be selected and 46
47 utilized uniformly throughout Project even though: 47
48 a. More than one manufacturer is listed for a given 48
49 "product" in Specifications. 49
50 b. No manufacturer is listed. 50
51 2. Equipment, electrical assemblies, related electrical 51
52 wiring, instrumentation, controls, and system components 52
53 shall FULLY comply with specific NEC area and NEMA 250 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
11005 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11005 -2
01 and ICS -6 designations and defined in Section 16010. 01
02 02
03 1.03 DEFINITIONS 03
04 04
05 A. Product: Manufactured materials and equipment. 05
06 06
07 B. Equipment: One or more assemblies capable of performing a complete 07
08 function. Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation or other devices 08
09 requiring an electrical, pneumatic, electronic or hydraulic connection. 09
10 Not limited to items listed under "Equipment" article within 10
11 specifications. 11
12 12
13 C. Installer or Applicator: Installer or applicator is the person actually 13
14 installing or applying the product in the field at the Project site. 14
15 1. Installer or applicator are synonymous. 15
16 16
17 1.04 SUBMITTALS 17
18 18
19 A. Shop Drawings: 19
20 1. General for all equipment: 20
21 a. See Section 01340. 21
22 b. Acknowledgement that products submitted comply with the 22
23 requirements of the standards referenced. 23
24 c. Sample form letter for equipment field certification. 24
25 d. Certification that equipment has been installed properly, has 25
26 been initially started up, has been calibrated and /or adjusted as 26
27 required, and is ready for operation. 27
28 e. Manufacturer's delivery, storage, handling, and installation 28
29 instructions. 29
30 f. Equipment identification utilizing numbering system and name 30
31 utilized in Drawings. 31
32 g. Equipment installation details: 32
33 1) Location of anchorage. 33
34 2) Type, size, and materials of construction of 34
35 anchorage. 35
36 3) Anchorage setting templates. 36
37 4) Manufacturer's installation instructions. 37
38 h. Equipment area classification rating. 38
39 i. Shipping and operating weight. 39
40 j. Equipment physical characteristics: 40
41 1) Dimensions (both horizontal and vertical). 41
42 2) Materials of construction and construction 42
43 details. 43
44 k. Equipment factory primer and paint data. 44
45 1. Manufacturer's recommended spare parts list. 45
46 m. Equipment lining and coatings. 46
47 n. Equipment utility requirements include air, natural 47
48 gas, electricity, and water. 48
49 2. Mechanical and process equipment: 49
50 a. Operating characteristics: 50
51 1) Technical information including applicable performance curves 51
52 showing specified equipment capacity, rangeability, and 52
53 efficiencies. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 2) Brake horsepower requirements. 01
02 3) Copies of equipment data plates. 02
03 b. Piping and duct connection size, type and location. 03
04 c. Equipment bearing life certification. 04
05 3. Electrical and control equipment: 05
06 a. Electric motor information: 06
07 1) Nameplate data. 07
08 2) Service factor on motors 1/2 HP and above. 08
09 3) Motor enclosure type. 09
10 4) NEMA frame size, if applicable. 10
11 5) NEMA design code, if applicable. 11
12 6) Insulation type. 12
13 7) Efficiency and power factor at full load, 3/4 13
14 load, 1/2 load and 1/4 load. 14
15 b. Certification from equipment manufacturer that all manufacturer 15
16 supplied control panels that interface in any way with other 16
17 controls or panels have been submitted to and coordinated with 17
18 the supplier/ installer of those interfacing systems. 18
19 c. Control panels: 19
20 1) Panel construction. 20
21 2) Point -to -point wiring diagrams. 21
22 3) Scaled panel face and subpanel layout. 22
23 4) Technical product data on panel components. 23
24 5) Panel and subpanel dimensions and weights. 24
25 6) Panel access openings. 25
26 7) Nameplate test. 26
27 8) Panel anchorage. 27
28 d. Motor test reports. 28
29 e. Certification prior to Project closeout that electrical panel 29
30 drawings for manufacturer - supplied control panels truly represent 30
31 panel wiring including any field -make modifications. 31
32 32
33 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 33
34 1. See Section 01340. 34
35 35
36 36
37 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 37
38 - 38
39 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 39
40 40
41 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 41
42 Manufacturers are acceptable: 42
43 1. Motors: 43
44 a. Siemens Allis. 44
45 b. Westinghouse. 45
46 c. General Electric. 46
47 47
48 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 48
49 01640. 49
50 50
51 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS 51
52 52
53 A. Electric Motors: 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
11005 -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11005 -4
01 1. Provide motors designed and applied in compliance with NEMA, IEEE, 01
02 and the NEC for specific duty imposed by driven equipment. 02
03 2. Where used in conjunction with adjustable speed drives, provide 03
04 motors fully compatible with the variable speed controllers. 04
05 3. Where frequent starting applications are specified, design for 05
06 frequent starting duty equivalent to duty service required by driven 06
07 equipment. 07
08 4. Rate for continuous duty at 40 DegC ambient. Design in accordance 08
09 with the NEMA Standards for Class F insulation with Class B 09
10 temperature rise above 40 DegC ambient on continuous operation or 10
11 intermittent duty at nameplate horsepower. 11
12 5. Design for full voltage starting. 12
13 6. Design bearing life based upon actual operating load conditions 13
14 imposed by driven equipment. 14
15 7. Size for altitude of Project. 15
16 8. Size so that, under maximum continuous load imposed by driven 16
17 equipment, motor nameplate horsepower for continuous operation is 17
18 minimum of 15 percent more than driven load. 18
19 9. Provide encapsulated windings in wet /corrosive and for outdoor 19
20 applications. 20
21 a. Provide encapsulation using a silicone or epoxy seal after the 21
22 windings have been dried to less than 1 percent moisture. 22
23 10. Furnish with clamp -type grounding terminals inside motor conduit 23
24 box. 24
25 11. Furnish with oversized external conduit boxes. 25
26 12. Furnish with stainless steel nameplates with information to include 26
27 all data as required by paragraph 430 -7 of the National Electric 27
28 Code, NFPA 70. 28
29 13. Use of manufacturer's standard motor will be permitted on integrally 29
30 constructed motor driven equipment such as appliances and hand tools 30
31 specified by model number in which a redesign of complete unit would 31
32 be required in order to provide a motor with other features as may 32
33 be specified herein. 33
34 14. Electric motors less than 1/3 HP. 34
35 a. Single phase, 60 HZ, suitable for supply voltage 35
36 shown an Drawings. 36
37 b. Totally enclosed non - ventilated (TENV) or totally 37
38 enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). 38
39 c. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to 39
40 AFBMA Standards. 40
41 d. Built -in manual -reset thermal protector or furnished 41
42 with integrally mounted stainless steel enclosed 42
43 manual motor overload switch. 43
44 15. Electric motors 1/3 to 1 HP inclusive: 44
45 a. Single or 3 PH, 60 HZ, suitable for supply voltage 45
46 and phase shown on Drawings. 46
47 b. Totally enclosed non - ventilated (TENV) or totally 47
48 enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). 48
49 c. Specially insulated for use in damp locations below 49
50 20 DegC. 50
51 d. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to 51
52 AFBMA Standards. 52
53 16. Electric motors 1 -1/2 through 10 HP: 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11005 -5
01 a. 230/460 V, 60 HZ, 3 PH voltage supply. 01
02 b. Totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC). 02
03 c. Specially insulated for use in damp locations below 03
04 20 DegC. 04
05 d. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings conforming to 05
06 AFBMA Standards. 06
07 17. Motor efficiencies: 07
08 a. Provide motor having following minimum efficiencies. 08
09 1) Horizontal induction motors: 09
10 10
11 3600 RPM 1800 RPM 1200 RPM 900 RPM 11
12 12
13 DPFG/ DPFG/ DPFG/ DPFG/ 13
14 HP TEFC WP -I TEFC WP -I TEFC WP -I TEFC WP -I 14
15 -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- - - -- 15
16 1 71.0 71.5 78.5 75.5 75.5 73.0 67.5 68.0 16
17 1.5 80.0 78.5 81.5 81.5 81.5 81.5 69.5 68.0 17
18 2 81.5 80.0 81.5 80.0 84.0 82.5 72.0 68.0 18
19 3 84.0 80.0 86.5 84.0 86.5 82.5 72.0 72.0 19
20 5 85.5 82.5 86.5 85.5 86.5 84.0 78.5 78.5 20
21 7.5 86.5 84.0 88.5 88.5 87.5 87.5 81.5 81.5 21
22 22
23 B. V -Belt Drive: 23
24 1. Provide each V -belt drive with sliding base or other suitable tension 24
25 adjustment. Adjustment mechanism to be 304 stainless steel. 25
26 2. Provide V -belt drives with a service factor of at least 1.6 at 26
27 maximum speed. 27
28 3. Provide staticproof belts. 28
29 29
30 2.03 COMPONENTS 30
31 31
32 A. Gear Drives and Drive Components: 32
33 1. Size drive equipment capable of supporting full load including losses 33
34 in speed reducers and power transmission. 34
35 2. Provide nominal input horsepower rating of each gear or speed reducer 35
36 at least equal to nameplate horsepower of drive motor. 36
37 3. Design drive units for 24 HR continuous service, constructed so oil 37
38 leakage around shafts is precluded. 38
39 4. Utilize gears, gear lubrication systems, gear drives, speed reducers, 39
40 speed increasers and flexible couplings meeting applicable standards 40
41 of American Gear Manufacturers Association. 41
42 5. Gear reducers: 42
43 a. Provide gear reducer totally enclosed and oil lubricated. 43
44 b. Utilize antifriction bearings throughout. 44
45 c. Provide worm gear reducers having a service factor of 45
46 at least 1.20. 46
47 d. Furnish other helical, spiral bevel, and combination 47
48 bevel - helical gear reducers with a service factor of at least 48
49 1.50. 4
50 50
51 2.04 ACCESSORIES 51
52 52
53 A. Guards: 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11005 -6
01 1. Provide each piece of equipment having exposed moving parts with full 01
02 length, easily removable guards, meeting OSHA requirements. 02
03 2. Exterior applications: 03
04 a. Construct from 16 GA stainless steel or aluminum. 04
05 b. Construct to preclude entrance of rain, snow, or 05
06 moisture. 06
07 c. Roll to conform to shaft or coupling surface. 07
08 d. Connect to equipment frame with stainless steel bolts 08
09 and wing nuts. 09
10 10
11 B. Anchorage: 11
12 1. Cast -in -place anchorage: 12
13 a. Provide ASTM F593, Type 316 stainless steel anchorage 13
14 for exposed equipment. 14
15 b. For continuously submerged anchorage, utilize ASTM 15
16 A307 anchorage. For intermittently submerged 16
17 applications, use 316 stainless steel. 17
18 c. Configuration and number of anchor bolts shall be per 18
19 manufacturer's recommendations. 19
20 d. Provide two nuts for each bolt. 20
21 2. Drilled anchorage: 21
22 a. Epoxy grout per Section 03308. 22
23 b. Threaded rods same as cast -in- place. 23
24 24
25 C. Data Plate: 25
26 1. Attach a stainless steel data plate to each piece of rotary or 26
27 reciprocating equipment. Permanently stamp information on data plate 27
28 including manufacturer's name, equipment operating parameters, serial 28
29 number and speed. 29
30 30
31 D. Gages: 31
32 1. Provide gages at locations shown or specified in 32
33 accordance with Section 15060. 33
34 34
35 2.05 FABRICATION 35
36 36
37 A. Design, fabricate, and assemble equipment in accordance with best modern 37
38 engineering and shop practices. 38
39 39
40 B. Manufacture individual parts to standard sizes and gages so that repair 40
41 parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in field. 41
42 42
43 C. Furnish like parts of duplicate units to be interchangeable. 43
44 44
45 D. Ensure that equipment has not been in service at any time prior to 45
46 delivery, except as required by tests. 46
47 47
48 E. Furnish equipment which require periodic internal inspection or 48
49 adjustment with access panels which will not require disassembly of 49
50 guards, dismantling of piping or equipment or similar major efforts. 50
51 Quick opening but sound, securable access ports or windows shall be 51
52 provided for inspection of chains, belts, or similar items. 52
53 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
11005 -7
II 01 F. Provide common, lipped base plate mounting for equipment and equipment 01
02 motor where said mounting is a manufacturer's standard option. Provide 02
03 drain connection for 3/4 IN PVC tubing. 03
I 04 04
05 G. Machine the mounting feet of rotating equipment. 05
06 06
II 07 2.06 SHOP OR FACTORY PAINT FINISHES 07
08 08
09 A. Electrical Equipment: 09
10 1. The standard factory- applied paint coating system(s), of the listed 10
II 11 approved manufacturers, of motor control centers, panel boards, 11
12 transformers, switchboards, and engine generator sets, are 12
13 acceptable. 13
' 14
15 2. As an alternate to the acceptable standard factory - applied paint 14
coating systems, a manufacturer may provide a paint coating system in 15
16 accordance with Section 09905. 16
II 17 17
18 B. Other Equipment: In accordance with Section 09905. 18
19 19
20 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 20
II 21 21
22 A. Motor Tests: 22
23 1. Test motors in accordance with NEMA and IEEE procedures. 23
II 24 Include the following: 24
25 a. Routine test: 25
26 1) Running no -load amperes. 26
I 27 2) Locked rotor amperes. 27
28 3) Winding resistance, DC. 28
29 4) High - potential test at twice rated voltage plus 29
30 1000 V, with a minimum of 2200 V for 1 minute, 30
II 31 winding to ground. 31
32 5) Vibration check. 32
33 6) Wound -rotor motor, secondary volts at collector 33
II 34 rings. 34
35 2. Provide routine test for motors 5 through 75 HP. Test one motor of 35
36 each size and type. 36
' 37 3. The Owner reserves the right to, at any time, select and have tested 37
38 any motor included within the Project. If motor passes testing 38
39 requirements, Owner will be responsible for any shipping and testing 39
40 costs incurred. Costs shall be determined by current freight rates 40
II 41 and manufacturer's published rates at the time of the test. If motor 41
42 fails test, Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred. 42
43 If two successive motors fail the test, the Owner has the right to 43
II 44 reject any or all motors from that manufacturer. The Owner also 44
45 reserves the right to witness any routine tests at Owner's expense. 45
46 46
47 47
I
48 PART 3 - EXECUTION 48
49 49
50 3.01 INSTALLATION 50
II 51 51
52 A. Install equipment as shown on Drawings and in accordance with 52
53 manufacturer's directions. 53
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11005 -8
01 01
02 B. Utilize templates for anchorage placement for slab- mounted equipment. 02
03 03
04 C. For equipment having drainage requirements such as seal water, provide 04
05 3/4 IN PVC or clear plastic tubing from equipment base to nearest floor 05
06 or equipment drain. Route clear of major traffic areas and as approved 06
07 by Engineer. 07
08 08
09 D. Extend all non - accessible grease fittings using stainless steel tubing to 09
10 a location which allows easy access of fittings. 10
11 11
12 E. Construct subbases, either concrete, steel or cast iron, level in both 12
13 directions. Particular care shall be taken at hold -down bolt locations 13
14 so these areas are flat and level. 14
15 15
16 F. Machine Base: 16
17 1. Mount machine bases of rotating equipment on subbases in manner that 17
18 they are level in both directions according to machined surfaces on 18
19 base. Use machinist level for this procedure. 19
20 2. Level machine bases on subbases and align couplings between driver 20
21 and driven unit using steel blocks and shims. 21
22 a. Size blocks and shims to provide solid support at each anchor 22
23 bolt location. Area size of blocks and shims shall be 23
24 approximately 1 -1/2 times area support surface at each anchor 24
25 bolt point. 25
26 b. Provide blocks and shims at each anchor bolt. Blocks and shims 26
27 that are square shape with "U" cut out to allow blocks and shims 27
28 to be centered on anchor bolts. 28
29 c. After all leveling and alignment has been completed and before 29
30 grouting, tighten anchor bolts to proper torque value. 30
31 d. Do not use nuts below the machine base on anchor bolts for base 31
32 leveling. 32
33 33
34 H. Couplings: 34
35 1. Align in the annular and parallel positions. 35
36 a. For equipment rotating at 1200 rpm or less, align both annular 36
37 and parallel within 0.001 IN tolerance for couplings 4 IN size 37
38 and smaller. Couplings larger than 4 IN size: Increase 38
39 tolerance 0.0005 IN per inches of coupling diameter, i.e., allow 39
40 6 IN coupling 0.002 IN tolerance, and allow a 10 IN coupling 40
41 0.004 IN tolerance. 41
42 b. For equipment rotating at speeds greater than 1200 rpm allow both 42
43 annular and parallel positions within a tolerance rate of 0.00025 43
44 IN per inch coupling diameter. 44
45 2. If equipment is delivered as a mounted unit from factory, verify 45
46 factory alignment on site after installation and realigned if 46
47 necessary. 47
48 3. Check surfaces for runout before attempting to trim or align units. 48
49 49
50 I. Grouting: 50
51 1. After machine base has been shimmed, leveled, couplings aligned and 51
52 anchor bolts tightened to correct torque value, a dam or formwork 52
53 shall be placed around base to contain grouting. Extend dam or 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
II 01 formwork at least 1/2 IN above the top of leveling shims and blocks. 01
02 2. Saturate top of roughened concrete subbase with water before 02
03 grouting. Add grout until entire space under machine base is filled 03
II 04 to the top of the base underside. Puddle grout by working a stiff 04
05 wire through the grout and vent holes to work grout in place and 05
06 release any entrained air in the grout or base cavity. 06
II 08
3. When the grout has sufficiently hardened, remove dam or formwork and 07
08 finish the exposed grout surface to fine, smooth surface. Cover 08
09 exposed grout surfaces with wet burlap and keep covering sufficiently 09
10 wet to prevent too rapid evaporation of water from the grout. When 10
' 11 the grout has fully hardened (after a minimum of 7 days) tighten all 11
12 anchor bolts and recheck driver - driven unit for proper alignment. 12
13 13
II 14 14
15 3.02 FIELD PAINTING AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 15
16 16
17 A. For required field painting and protective coatings, comply with Section 17
II 18 09905. 18
19 19
20 3.03 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATION 20
II 21 21
22 A. Clean wires before installing lugs and connectors. 22
23 23
' 24
25 B. Coat connection with oxidation eliminating compound for aluminum wire. 24
25
26 C. Terminate motor circuit conductors with copper lugs bolted to motor 26
27 leads. 27
'
28 28
29 D. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with electrical tape, 150 29
30 percent of insulation value of conductor. 30
31 31
32 E. Connections to carry full ampacity of conductors without temperature 32
33 rise. 33
II 34 34
35 F. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape. 35
36 36
37 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 37
II 38 38
39 A. Furnish equipment manufacturer services as specified in the individual 39
40 equipment specifications. 40
ll 41 41
42 B. Inspect wire and connections for physical damage and proper connection. 42
43 43
il 44 C. Check rotation of motor before connection to driven equipment, before 44
45 couplings are bolted or belts installed. Before motor is started to check 45
46 rotation, determine that motor is lubricated. 46
47 47
II 48 D. Subbase that supports the equipment base and that is made in the form of 48
49 a cast iron or steel structure that has supporting beams, legs and cross 49
50 member that are cast welded or bolted, shall be tested for a natural 50
51 frequency of vibration after equipment is mounted. Keep the ratio of the 51
52 natural frequency of the structure to the frequency of the disturbing 52
53 force out of the range from 0.5 to 1.5. 53
1
1
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
11005 -9
01
02
03
11005 -10
END OF SECTION
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01
02
03
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11060 -1
01 90H31 SECTION 11060 01
02 02
03 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Pumping equipment. 11
12 12
13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13
14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and 14
15 Conditions of the Contract. 15
16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16
17 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 17
18 4. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements. 18
19 5. Section 11069 - Pumping Equipment: Progressing 19
20 Cavity. 20
21 6. Section 11078 - Pumping Equipment: Sludge and Scum Grinder Pumps 21
22 22
23 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 23
24 24
25 A. Fully coordinate all mechanical seal systems specified to ensure pump and 25
26 seal compatibility. 26
27 27
28 B. For variable speed pumping applications, the pump manufacturer is 28
29 designated to have single source responsibility for coordination of the 29
30 pump and VFD drive system. 30
31 31
32 1.03 DEFINITIONS 32
33 33
34 A. NPSHR - Net Positive Suction Head Required. 34
35 35
36 B. VFD - Variable Frequency Drive. 36
37 37
38 C. Pump Service Category - Pump or pumps having identical names (not tag 38
39 numbers) used for specific pumping service. 39
40 40
41 41
"42 1.04 SUBMITTALS 42
43 43
44 A. Shop Drawings: 44
45 1. See Section 11005. 45
46 2. Product technical data including: 46
47 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet 47
48 requirements of standards referenced. 48
49 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 49
50 c. Pump accessories data. 50
51 d. Pump bearing supports, brackets, shafting details and 51
52 lubrication provisions. 52
53 e. Solids passage information. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
11060-2
' 01
02 3. Certifications: Certified pump performance curves as 01
described in Article 2.02. 02
03 a. Statement relative to installation and startup as 03
04 required in paragraph 3.02 A.4. 04
II 05 05
06 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 06
07 1. See Section 01340. 07
II 08 08
09 09
10 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 10
II 11 11
12 2.01 ACCESSORIES 12
13 13
14 A. See Section 11005. 14
11
15 15
16 16
17 2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 17
I 18 18
19 A. If specifically required in the individual pump specification 19
20 sections, provide factory tests: 20
II 21 1. Adjustable speed units: 21
22 a. Head (FT) verses flow (gpm) pump curves: 22
23 1) Maximum, minimum and two equally spaced 23
24 intermittent speeds. 24
II
25 2) Efficiencies along each curve. 25
26 3) Brake horsepowers along each curve. 26
27 b. Hydrostatic test at 150 percent of shutoff head for a 27
II 28 minimum of 5 minutes. 28
29 2. Constant speed units: 29
30 a. Head (FT) versus flow (gpm) pump curves: 30
I 31 1) Efficiencies along curve. 31
32 2) Brake horsepower along each curve. 32
33 3. Certified results by a Registered Professional Engineer. 33
34 34
II
35 35
36 PART 3 - EXECUTION 36
37 37
I 38 3.01 INSTALLATION 38
39 39
40 A. See Section 11005. 40
II 41 41
42 B. Floor or Pad - Mounted Units (Non - Submersible): 42
43 1. Align vertically and horizontally level, wedge and plumb units to 43
44 match piping interfaces. 44
II 45 2. Assure no unnecessary stresses are transmitted to equipment flanges. 45
46 3. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate and manufacturer's recommended 46
47 torque for uniform gasket compression. 47
' 48 4. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over entire face 48
49 area prior to bolting pipe flange and equipment. 49
50 5. Permit piping connecting to equipment to freely move in directions 50
51 parallel to longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in 51
52 connection flange are tightened. 52
53 6. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but not 53
II WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 before initial fitting and alignment. 01
02 7. Assemble connecting piping with gaskets in place and minimum of four 02
03 bolts per joint installed and tightened. Test alignment by loosening 03
04 flange bolts to see if there is any change in relationship of piping 04
05 flange with equipment connecting flange. Realign as necessary, 05
06 install flange bolts and make equipment connection. 06
07 8. Field paint units as defined in Section 09905. 07
08 9. Provide pressure gauge on discharge of all pumps and on suction of 08
09 all non - submersible units. 09
10 10
11 C. Submersible Units: 11
12 1. Comply with requirements defined in paragraphs 3.01 B.7, 12
13 8, and 9. 13
14 14
15 15
16 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 16
17 17
18 A. Provide services of equipment manufacturer's field service 18
19 representative(s) to: 19
20 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 20
21 2. Supervise pre -start adjustments and installation checks. 21
22 3. Conduct initial startup of equipment and perform operational checks. 22
23 4. Provide a written statement that manufacturer's equipment has been 23
24 installed properly, started up and is ready for operation by Owner's 24
25 personnel. 25
26 5. Instruct Owner's personnel for the specified minimum number of hours 26
27 at jobsite per Section 01060 on operation and maintenance of each of 27
28 following pumping equipment: 28
29 a. Section 11069 - Pumping Equipment: Progressing 29
30 Cavity, 4 HRS. 30
31 b. Section 11078 - Pumping Equipment: Sludge & Scum Grinder Pumps 31
32 4 HRS. 32
33 33
34 34
35 END OF SECTION 35
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
11060 -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 93B23 SECTION 11069 01
02 02
03 PUMPING EQUIPMENT: PROGRESSING CAVITY 03
04 04
05 05
06 06
07 PART 1 - GENERAL 07
08 08
09 1.01 SUMMARY 09
10 10
11 A. Section Includes: 11
12 1. Progressing cavity pumps, new and relocated. 12
13 13
14 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 14
15 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 15
16 the Contract. 16
17 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 17
18 3. Section 11060 - Pumping Equipment: General Requirements. 18
19 19
20 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 20
21 21
22 A. Referenced Standards: 22
23 1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): 23
24 a. Steel Products Manual. 24
25 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 25
26 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 26
27 a. A48, Gray Iron Castings. 27
28 4. Hydraulic Institute (HI) Standards. 28
29 29
30 1.03 SUBMITTALS 30
31 31
32 A. Shop Drawings: 32
33 1. Requirements in Section 11060. 33
34 2. Source quality control test reports. 34
35 35
36 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 36
37 1. See Section 01340. 37
38 38
39 39
40 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 40
41 41
42 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 42
43 43
44 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 44
45 Manufacturers are acceptable: 45
46 1. Progressive cavity pumps: 46
47 a. Moyno. 47
48 b. Netzsch. 48
49 c. Or approved equal. 49
50 50
51 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 51
52 01640. 52
53 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
11069 -1
1
II 01 2.02 MATERIALS 01
02 02
03 A. Pre - Thickener and Post - Thickener pumps, Tag Nos. P -01 and P -03. 03
I 04 1. Pump body: Cast iron, ASTM A48 Class 35. 04
05 2. Rotor: AISI 4150 steel or 11 -13.5 percent chromium tool 05
06 steel hardened to Rockwell C57 -60 Chrome plated. 06
07 3. Stator: 07
' 08 a. Buna -N or nitrile rubber. 08
09 4. Base plate: Fabricated steel. 09
10 5. Stuffing box gland: Ductile iron. 10
' 11
12 6. Lantern ring: 316 stainless steel. 11
12
13 13
1 14 2.03 EQUIPMENT 14
15 15
16 A. Performance and Configuration Requirements: 16
17 1. Pre - Thickener and Post - Thickener pumps, Tag Nos. P -01 & P -03: 17
I 18 a. Design condition: 125 gpm at 6.5 psig and 336 maximum 18
19 rpm. 19
20 b. Secondary conditions: 150 gpm at 9.0 psig and 20
' 21 403 maximum rpm, and 100 gpm at 5.5 psig, and 269 maximum RPM. 21
22 c. Nameplate driver horsepower: 7.5. 22
23 d. Drive type: Variable frequency. 23
24 e. Drive configuration: Overhead arrangement, belt driven. 24
II
25 25
26 2.04 ACCESSORIES 26
27 27
' 28 A. See Section 11060. 28
29 29
30 B. Provide run -dry protection for each pump consisting of a temperature 30
I 31
32 probe installed in the pump stator for switching off the pump upon high 31
temperature. 32
33 33
34 C. Provide protection against overpressurization by furnishing and 34
II
35 installing an adjustable pressure switch at the pump discharge for 35
36 switching off the pump upon low or overpressurization. 36
37 37
1 38 D. Furnish additional belts and sheaves for each new unit to allow maximum 38
39 motor speed operation at each of the secondary design conditions. 39
40 40
' 41 2.05 FABRICATION 41
42 42
43 A. Pump Body: 43
44 1. Provide body containing two inspection ports 180 degrees apart. 44
I 45 2. Cradle mount pump to permit suction port to be rotated at 90- degree 45
46 increments perpendicular to pump centerline. 46
47 47
1 48 B. Rotor: 48
49 1. Harden to minimum Rockwell C -57. 49
50 2. Plate with a layer of hard chrome to a minimum hardness of Rockwell 50
II 51 C -70. 51
52 52
53 C. Stator: 53
1
1
11069 -2
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
11069 -3
01 1. Construct by bonding rubber -type material to inside of a steel tube. 01
02 2. Minimum 65 durometer hardness (Shore A). 02
03 03
04 D. Drive Train: 04
05 1. Include crown gear -type universal joints, seals, connecting rod, 05
06 driveshaft, and shaft bearings. 06
07 2. Connect rotor drive shaft by a connecting rod equipped with two 07
08 crowned gear -type factory grease lubricated and sealed universal 08
09 joints. 09
10 3. Use universal joints to transmit thrust and torque while allowing the 10
11 rotor to move through an eccentric path. 11
12 4. Clamp gear joint seals at both outside and inside diameters and 12
13 recess within heavy walled steel tubing. 13
14 5. Connecting rods: 14
15 a. Operating angle not to exceed 1 -1/2 degrees off center. 15
16 6. Mount drive shaft in two ball or tapered roller bearings. 16
17 7. Bearing B -10 life: 50,000 HRS at design operating conditions 17
18 specified. 18
19 8. Provide fittings for grease lubrication of bearings. 19
20 9. Stuffing box: 20
21 a. Design for either grease lubrication or water seal. 21
22 b. Permit gland adjustment and repacking without 22
23 dismantling pump. 23
24 c. Provide shaft sleeve. 24
25 25
26 E. Suction and Discharge: 26
27 1. Provide ANSI, Class 150, 150 LB rated flanged 4 IN suction and 4 IN 27
28 discharge. 28
29 29
30 F. Base Plate: Provide common base plate for pump, drive and motor. 30
31 31
32 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 32
33 33
34 A. Testing: 34
35 1. Perform Level I test for each pump as defined by HI Standards to 35
36 assure conformance to manufacturer's commercial performance criteria. 36
37 2. Perform hydrostatic test for each pump in compliance with HI 37
38 Standards. 38
39 39
40 2.07 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 40
41 41
42 A. Furnish Owner the following extra parts for each pump category: 42
43 1. One shaft sleeve. 43
44 2. One rotor. 44
45 3. One stator. 45
46 46
47 47
48 PART 3 - EXECUTION 48
49 49
50 3.01 NEW PUMP INSTALLATION 50
51 51
52 A. See Section 11060. 52
53 53
11069 -4
01 3.02 RELOCATING EXISTING PUMPS (BELT FILTER PRESS PUMP, TAG NO. P -02) 01
02 02
03 A. Remove existing pump carefully, flush with clear water, and store in a 03
04 clean, dry location. 04
05 05
06 B. Secure the services of the manufacturer's representative (Netzsch, Inc.) 06
07 to inspect the pump for wear and damage. 07
08 1. Provide written recommendations to the Owner regarding any suggested 08
09 repairs or maintenance required. 09
10 10
11 C. Install the pump in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations 11
12 and Section 11060. 12
13 13
14 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 14
15 15
16 A. See Section 11060. 16
17 17
18 END OF SECTION 18
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 91G22 SECTION 11078 01
02 02
03 SLUDGE AND SCUM GRINDER PUMPS 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Submersible sludge and scum grinder pumps. 11
12 2. Duplex control panel and accessories. 12
13 13
14 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 14
15 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and 15
16 Conditions of the Contract. 16
17 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 17
18 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements. 18
19 4. SEction 13442 - Primary Elements and Transmitters. 19
20 20
21 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 21
22 22
23 A. Referenced Standards: 23
24 1. American Gear Manufacturer's Association (AGMA). 24
25 2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI): 25
26 a. B16.1, Cast -Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, 26
27 Class 25, 125, 250, and 800. 27
28 3. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 28
29 a. A536, Standard Specification for Ductile Iron 29
30 Castings. 30
31 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): 31
32 a. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Control and Systems. 32
33 33
34 1.03 SUBMITTALS 34
35 35
36 A. Shop Drawings: 36
37 1. See Section 11005. 37
38 38
39 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 39
40 1. See Section 01340. 40
41 41
42 42
43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 43
44 44
45 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 45
46 46
47 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the 47
48 following Manufacturers are acceptable: 48
49 1. Sludge and scum grinder pumps: 49
50 a. Hydromatic 50
51 b. ABS 51
52 c. Or approved equal. 52
53 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
11078 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11078 -2
01 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with 01
02 Specification Section 01640. 02
03 03
04 2.02 MATERIALS 04
05 05
06 A. Post - Thickener Scum Pump (Tag No. P -04): 06
07 1. Housing: Cast iron ASTM A48, Class 25, with Buna -N 0 -ring seals. 07
08 2. Shaft: 416 stainless steel. 08
09 3. Cutting elements: 440 C Stainless steel hardened to Rockwell 60C. 09
10 4. Impeller: Bronze or Cast Iron. 10
11 5. Hardware: Stainless Steel. 11
12 12
13 2.03 EQUIPMENT 13
14 14
15 A. Performance and Configuration Requirements: 15
16 1. Post - thickener scum pump (Tag No. P -04): 16
17 a. Design Condition: 20 -30 GPM at 5 -7 FT TDH; non - overloading at 17
18 any point on the pumping curve. 18
19 b. Pump configuration: Submersible. 19
20 c. Maximum pump speed: 3,600 RPM 20
21 d. Nameplate driver horsepower: 2.0. 21
22 e. Drive type: Constant speed. 22
23 f. Maximum Ground Particle Size: 1/4 IN. 23
24 24
25 2.04 ACCESSORIES 25
26 26
27 A. See Section 11005. 27
28 28
29 B. Control Panel 29
30 1. Furnish and install locally mounted automatic control panel at 30
31 location shown on Drawings and rated for area classification. 31
32 2. Include combination circuit breaker type controller with short 32
33 circuit, overload, and three overload relays, interior- mounted motor 33
34 starter. 34
35 3. Include a terminal strip for connection of level sensors. 35
36 4. Provide the following features: 36
37 a. Stainless steel NEMA 4 watertight enclosure with continuous 37
38 hinge, neoprene gasket in cover and continuous seam weld. 38
39 Include locking mechanism complete with padlock. 39
40 b. Hand -Off- Automatic selector switches. 40
41 c. High level alarm with silence, alarm horn, and alarm light. 41
42 d. Pump running light. 42
43 e. Elapsed time meter. 43
44 f. Overload reset button to reset overload relay. 44
45 g. Lightning protection. 45
46 h. Condensation heater. 46
47 i. Moisture detector alarm light and pump shutdown. 47
48 j. Auxiliary contacts wired to terminal blocks. 48
49 k. Power ON control relay. 49
50 1. Power OFF control relay. 50
51 m. Remote telemetering contct. 51
52 n. Furnish phase failure relay connected to incoming power source 52
53 with contacts which open under undervoltage, phase failure, or 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 phase reversal conditions. 01
02 o. Inner door in cabinet- mounted on a continuous vertical steel 02
03 hinge; size to completely cover wiring and components mounted on 03
04 the back panel; provide for mounting of controls and instruments 04
05 on inner door. 05
06 p. Motor starter equipped with overload heaters so all normal 06
07 overloads are protected by external heater. 07
08 08
09 2.05 FABRICATION 09
10 10
11 A. General: 11
12 1. Provide pumps capable of handling aerobically digested waste 12
13 activated sludge and /or scum from the post- digester. 13
14 2. Units shall be capable of grinding solids associated with waste 14
15 activated sludge including plastics, rubber, sanitary napkins, 15
16 disposable diapers, and wooden articles into a slurry. 16
17 17
18 B. Impeller: 18
19 1. Provide multi -vane semi -open type dynamically balanced impeller in 19
20 accordance with Hydraulic Institute Standards. 20
21 2. Threaded onto pump shaft. 21
22 22
23 C. Cutters: 23
24 1. Provide three cutters: 24
25 a. Stationary cutter, slip -fit into suction opening and retained 25
26 with screws; reversible. 26
27 b. Axial cutter, fit over hub of impeller; reversible. 27
28 c. Radial cutter, slip fit on shaft and held with peg and hole 28
29 arrangement. 29
30 30
31 D. Shaft Seal: 31
32 1. Seal shaft with double mechanical type seal running in an oil filled 32
33 chamber. 33
34 2. The lower seal between the pump and oil chamber shall contain one 34
35 stationary and one rotating ring. 35
36 3. The upper seal between the oil sump and motor housing shall contain 36
37 one stationary and one rotating ring. 37
38 4. Provide seals requiring neither routine maintenance nor adjustment, 38
39 but capable of being easily inspected and replaced. 39
40 5. Hold interface in contact by its own spring system. 40
41 41
42 E. Bearings: 42
43 1. Support shaft on upper and lower permanently lubricated bearings with 43
44 B -10 life of 50,000 HRS. 44
45 45
46 F. Motors: 46
47 1. Provide motor of totally submersible design, constructed with epoxy 47
48 or poly -seal encapsulated windings, air - filled or dielectric oil 48
49 filled, with Class F insulation and rated for continuous duty 49
50 operation. 50
51 2. Motor shall be 3 PH, 60 cycle, 460 V. 51
52 3. Assure motor is capable of running unsubmerged while liquid is being 52
53 pumped for extended periods witout damage to motor or seal. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
11078 -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
11078 -4
01 4. Furnish motor with two heat sensors to sense thermal overload when 01
02 motor temperature exceeds 120 Deg C, and to reset automatically at 02
03 30 -35 Deg C differential. Connect in series with motor starter coil. 03
04 04
05 2.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS 05
06 06
07 A. Extra Materials: 07
08 1. Furnish Owner the following extra parts: 08
09 a. Cutters: One set. 09
10 10
11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 11
12 12
13 3.01 INSTALLATION 13
14 14
15 A. See Section 11005. 15
16 16
17 B. Vertically and horizontally align, level, and plumb units to 17
18 match piping interfaces as shown on Drawings. 18
19 19
20 C. Mount controller at locations shown on Drawings. 20
21 21
22 22
23 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 23
24 24
25 A. Employ and pay for services of equipment manufacturer's field 25
26 service representative(s) to: 26
27 1. Inspect equipment covered by these Specifications. 27
28 2. Supervise pre- startup adjustments and installation 28
29 checks. 29
30 3. Conduct initial startup of equipment and perform 30
31 operational checks. 31
32 4. Provide Owner written statement that manufacturer's 32
33 equipment has been installed properly, started up, and is 33
34 ready for operation by Owner's personnel. 34
35 5. Instruct Owner' personnel 4 HRS at jobsite on operation and 35
36 maintenance of the grinder pumps equipment. 36
37 37
38 END OF SECTION 38
39 39
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION 13
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 91L18
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
B. Miscellaneous: 46
1. Comply with electrical classifications and NEMA enclosure types shown 47
on Drawings. 48
49
50
51
A. Shop Drawings: 52
1. See Section 01340. 53
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Level components.
2. Analytical components.
B. Related Sections include
1. Division 0 - Bidding
the Contract.
2. Division 1 - General
3. Section 15060 - Pipe
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.03 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 13442
PRIMARY ELEMENTS AND TRANSMITTERS
13442 -1
but are not necessarily limited to:
Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of
Requirements.
and Pipe Fittings: General Requirements.
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American Gas Association (AGA):
a. Gas Measurement Committee Report #3.
2. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI).
3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. 816.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
b. PTC 19.3, Instruments and Apparatus, Part 3 Temperature
Measurement.
c. MC96.1, Temperature Measurement Thermocouples.
4. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
a. Fluid Meters, Sixth Edition.
5. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. Al26, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,
Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
b. A182, Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy - Steel
Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings and Valves and Parts for High
Temperature Service.
c. A240, Standard Specification for Heat Resisting Chromium and
Chromium - Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for
Pressure Vessels.
d. 861, Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings.
6. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
a. ICS 6, Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
13442 -2
01 2. Product technical data including: 01
02 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 02
03 standards referenced. 03
04 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 04
05 c. Materials of construction. 05
06 d. Minimum and maximum flow ranges. 06
07 e. Pressure loss curves. 07
08 f. Physical limits of components including temperature and pressure 08
09 limits. 09
10 g. Size and weight. 10
11 h. Electrical power requirements and wiring diagrams. 11
12 3. Certifications: 12
13 a. Electrical area classification certification. 13
14 14
15 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 15
16 1. See Section 01340. 16
17 17
18 18
19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 19
20 20
21 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 21
22 22
23 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the Manufacturers 23
24 listed in the articles describing the elements are acceptable. 24
25 25
26 B. Submit requests for substitutions in accordance with Specification 26
27 Section 01640. 27
28 28
29 2.02 LEVEL ELEMENTS 29
30 30
31 A. Float -Tilt Type Level Switches: 31
32 1. Acceptable manufacturers: 32
33 a. Anchor Scientific Inc. 33
34 b. Consolidated Electric. 34
35 2. Materials: 35
36 a. Float material: Polypropylene or teflon coated type 316 36
37 stainless steel. 37
38 b. Cable jacket: PVC, neoprene or equal. 38
39 c. Cable clamp: Polypropylene or 316 stainless steel. 39
40 d. Design and fabrication: 40
41 1) Sealed mercury switch in float with weighted cable. 41
42 2) Provide switch complete with flexible electrical 42
43 cables. 43
44 3) SPOT contact rated at 4.5 A at 120 VAC. 44
45 4) Direct acting float switch: 45
46 a) Switch actuates on rising level. 46
47 b) Switch deactuates when liquid falls 1 IN 47
48 below actuation level. 48
49 5) Terminate cables in junction box. 49
50 6) Process temperature: Ambient. 50
51 7) Install floats per Drawing details. 51
52 52
53 3. Schedule: 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01 01
02 TAG CONTACT 02
03 NUMBER SERVICE NO /NC 03
04 =_____= 04
05 05
06 LS -01 Post - Thickener Scum Pump NO 06
07 Pump Off Level Switch 07
08 08
09 LS -02 Post - Thickener Scum Pump NO 09
10 Pump On Level Switch 10
11 11
12 LS -03 Post - Thickener Scum Pump NO 12
13 High Level Alarm Switch 13
14 14
15 15
16 PART 3 - EXECUTION 16
17 17
18 3.01 INSTALLATION 18
19 19
20 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 20
21 21
22 END OF SECTION 22
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
13442 -3
DIVISION 15
MECHANICAL
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 90L13 SECTION 15060 01
02 02
03 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03
04 04
05 05
06 06
07 PART 1 - GENERAL 07
08 08
09 1.01 SUMMARY 09
10 10
11 A. Section Includes: 11
12 1. Process piping systems. 12
13 2. Utility piping systems. 13
14 3. Plumbing piping systems. 14
15 15
16 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 16
17 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 17
18 the Contract. 18
19 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 19
20 3. Section 02200 - Earthwork. 20
21 4. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 21
' 22 5. Section 15090 - Pipe Support Systems. 22
23 6. Section 15183 - Pipe, Duct and Equipment Insulation. 23
24 24
25 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 25
26 26
27 A. Referenced Standards: 27
28 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 28
29 a. B40.1, Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. 29
30 b. C110, Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3 IN through 48 IN for 30
31 Water and Other Liquids. 31
32 c. C115, Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. 32
33 d. C151, Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast In Metal Molds or 33
34 Sand -Lined Molds for Water or Other Liquids. 34
35 e. C207, Standard for Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - 35
36 Sizes 4 IN through 144 IN. 36
37 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 37
38 a. D1785, Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) 38
39 Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds. 39
40 b. D2466, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 40
41 c. 02467, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 41
42 d. D2513, Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing, and Fittings. 42
43 3. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 43
44 a. C111, Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron 44
45 Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 45
46 46
47 1.03 SUBMITTALS 47
48 48
49 A. Shop Drawings: 49
50 1. See Section 01340. 50
51 2. Product technical data including: 51
52 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 52
53 standards referenced. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
15060 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15060 -2
01 b. Copies of manufacturer's written directions regarding material 01
02 handling, delivery, storage and installation. 02
03 c. Technical product data on piping appurtenances. 03
04 3. Test reports: 04
05 a. Copies of pressure test results on all piping systems. 05
06 b. Notification of time and date of piping pressure tests. 06
07 07
08 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 08
09 09
10 A. Protect pipe coating during handling using methods recommended by 10
11 manufacturer. Use of bare cables, chains, hooks, metal bars or narrow 11
12 skids in contact with coated pipe is not permitted. 12
13 13
14 B. Prevent damage to pipe during transit. Repair abrasions, scars, and 14
15 blemishes. If repair of satisfactory quality cannot be achieved, replace 15
16 damaged material immediately. 16
17 17
18 18
19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 19
20 20
21 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 21
22 22
23 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 23
24 Manufacturers are acceptable: 24
25 1. Gages: 25
26 a. Ashcroft. 26
27 b. Or approved equal. 27
28 28
29 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 29
30 01640. 30
31 31
32 2.02 PIPING SPECIFICATION SCHEDULES 32
33 33
34 A. Piping system materials, fittings and appurtenances are subject to 34
35 requirements of specific piping specification schedules located on 35
36 Drawings. 36
37 37
38 2.03 COMPONENTS AND ACCESSORIES 38
39 39
40 A. Pressure Gages: 40
41 1. Provide on piping systems as shown on Contract Drawings and 41
42 specified. 42
43 2. Provide each gage with a 250 LB stainless steel needle valve at the 43
44 point of connection to equipment or piping. Provide a second valve if 44
45 the gage is panel mounted for use at a panel. 45
46 3. All components: Suitable for service at 200 psig and 250 DegF. 46
47 4. Pressure gages: Glycerine liquid filled. Provide glycerine filled 47
48 gage case. 48
49 5. Material for case, ring, bourdon tube, socket, angle valve, and 49
50 connection tubing: Stainless steel. 50
51 6. Needle valves and connection tubing: 51
52 a. 1/4 IN NPT on 2 -1/2 IN dial size. 52
53 b. 1/2 IN on 4 -1/2 IN dial size. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 7. Calibrate gages at jobsite for pressure and temperature in accordance 01
02 with manufacturer's instructions. 02
03 8. Unless otherwise required by codes, provide stem - mounted or 03
04 flush- mounted units with dial diameter as follows: 04
05 05
06 PIPE SIZE DIAL SIZE 06
07 07
08 1 -1/2 IN or less 2 -1/2 IN 08
09 Larger than 1 -1/2 IN 4 -1/2 IN 09
10 10
11 9. Colors: 11
12 a. Faces: White. 12
13 b. Numerals: Black. 13
14 c. Pointers: Black. 14
15 10. Pressure range: 200 percent of normal operation. Furnish compound 15
16 type gages on equipment suction which show at least 10 psi vacuum. 16
17 11. Provide stainless steel pulsation dampeners on all gage applications 17
18 which involve positive displacement equipment. 18
19 12. Provide stainless steel protector to separate process fluid from the 19
20 pressure element on all gages except potable and recycle water, and 20
21 air systems. Furnish protector type listed below: 21
22 22
23 GAGE APPLICATION PROTECTOR PROTECTOR FLUID 23
24 24
25 25
26 All Ashcroft Type glycerine 26
27 200 Diaphragm 27
28 seal or equal. 28
29 29
30 13. Provide diaphragm seal housing of stainless steel construction. 30
31 14. Provide 1/2 IN stainless steel antisiphon pigtail inlet connection 31
32 for hot water applications. 32
33 15. Gage accuracy: Within 1 percent. 33
34 34
35 35
36 PART 3 - EXECUTION 36
37 37
38 3.01 EXTERIOR PIPING INSTALLATION 38
39 39
40 A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, provide a minimum of 3 FT and 40
41 maximum of 6 FT earth cover over exterior buried piping systems and 41
42 appurtenances. 42
43 43
44 B. Enter and exit through structure walls, floors, and ceilings by using 44
45 wall penetrations specified in Section 01800 or as shown on Drawings. 45
46 46
47 C. Install flexible joint within 2 FT of point where pipe enters or leaves 47
48 structure. Install second flexible joint not more than 6 FT nor less 48
49 than 4 FT from first joint. Provide balance of piping with standard 49
50 laying lengths. 50
51 51
52 D. Install expansion devices as necessary to allow expansion and contraction 52
53 movement. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
15060 -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15060 -4
01 01
02 E. Laying Pipe In Trench: 02
03 1. Excavate and backfill trench in accordance with Section 02200. 03
04 2. Clean each pipe length thoroughly and inspect for compliance to 04
05 Specifications. 05
06 3. Grade trench bottom and excavate for pipe bell and lay pipe on trench 06
07 bottom. 07
08 4. Install gasket or joint material according to manufacturer's 08
09 directions after joints have been thoroughly cleaned and examined. 09
10 5. Except for first two joints, before making final connections of 10
11 joints, install two full sections of pipe with earth tamped along 11
12 side of pipe or final with bedding material placed. 12
13 6. Lay pipe in only suitable weather with good trench conditions. Never 13
14 lay pipe in water except where approved by Engineer. 14
15 7. Seal open end of line with watertight plug if pipe laying stopped. 15
16 8. Remove water in trench before removal of plug. 16
17 17
18 F. Lining Up Push -On Joint Piping: 18
19 1. Lay piping on route lines shown on Drawings. 19
20 2. Deflect from straight alignments or grades by vertical or horizontal 20
21 curves or offsets. 21
22 3. Observe maximum deflection values stated in manufacturer's written 22
23 literature. 23
24 4. Provide special bends when specified or where required alignment 24
25 exceeds allowable deflections stipulated. 25
26 5. Install shorter lengths of pipe in such length and number that 26
27 angular deflection of any joint, as represented by specified maximum 27
28 deflection, is not exceeded. 28
29 29
30 G. Anchorage and Blocking: 30
31 1. Provide reaction blocking, anchors, joint harnesses, or other 31
32 acceptable means for preventing movement of piping caused by forces 32
33 in or on buried piping tees, wye branches, plugs, or bends. 33
34 2. Place concrete blocking so that it extends from fitting into solid 34
35 undisturbed earth wall. Concrete blocks shall not cover pipe joints. 35
36 3. Provide bearing area of concrete in accordance with drawing detail. 36
37 37
38 H. Equipment Pipe Connections: 38
39 1. Exercise care in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint 39
40 on the opposite end of pipe or fitting which would prevent uniform 40
41 gasket pressure at connection or would cause unnecessary stresses to 41
42 be transmitted to equipment flanges. 42
43 2. Where push -on joints are used in conjunction with flanged joints, 43
44 final positioning of push -on joints shall not be made until flange 44
45 joints have been tightened without strain. 45
46 3. Tighten flange bolts at uniform rate which will result in uniform 46
47 gasket compression over entire area of joint. Provide tightening 47
48 torque in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 48
49 4. Support and match flange faces to uniform contact over their entire 49
50 face area prior to installation of any bolt between the piping flange 50
51 and equipment connecting flange. 51
52 5. Permit piping connecting to equipment to freely move in directions 52
53 parallel to longitudinal centerline when and while bolts in 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
15060 -5
01 connection flange are tightened. 01
02 6. Align, level, and wedge equipment into place during fitting and 02
03 alignment of connecting piping. 03
04 7. Grout equipment into place prior to final bolting of piping but not 04
05 before initial fitting and alignment. 05
06 8. To provide maximum flexibility and ease of alignment, assemble 06
07 connecting piping with gaskets in place and minimum of four bolts per 07
08 joint installed and tightened. Test alignment by loosening flange 08
09 bolts to see if there is any change in relationship of piping flange 09
10 with equipment connecting flange. Realign as necessary, install 10
11 flange bolts and make equipment connection. 11
12 9. Provide utility connections to equipment shown on Drawings, scheduled 12
13 or specified. 13
14 10. Make piping connections to plumbing and HVAC equipment, including 14
15 but not limited to installation of brass and fittings, strainers, 15
16 pressure reducing valves, flow control valves and relief valves 16
17 provided with or as integral part of equipment. 17
18 11 Furnish and install sinks, brass, fittings, strainers, pressure 18
19 reducing valves, flow control valves, pressure relief valves, and 19
20 shock absorbers which are not specified to be provided with or as 20
21 integral part of equipment. 21
22 12. For each potable or service water supply piping connection to 22
23 equipment, furnish and install union and gate or angle valve. 23
24 Provide wheel handle stop valve at each laboratory sink water 24
25 supply. Minimum size to be 1/2 IN. 25
26 13. Furnish and install "P" trap for each waste piping connection to 26
27 equipment if waste is connected directly to building sewer system. 27
28 Size trap as required by Plumbing Code. 28
29 14. Stub piping for equipment, sinks, lavatories, supply and drain 29
30 fittings, key stops, "P" traps, miscellaneous traps and 30
31 miscellaneous brass through wall or floor and cap and protect until 31
32 such time when later installation is performed. 32
33 33
34 I. Assure gage tapping position is clear of equipment functions and 34
35 movements, and location is protected from maintenance and operation of 35
36 equipment. Assure gage is readable from an accessible standing position. 36
37 37
38 3.02 CONNECTIONS WITH EXISTING PIPING 38
39 39
40 A. Where connection between new work and existing work is made, use suitable 40
41 and proper fittings to suit conditions encountered. 41
42 42
43 B. Perform connections with existing piping at time and under conditions 43
44 which will least interfere with plant operations. 44
45 45
46 C. Undertake connections in fashion which will disturb system as little as 46
47 possible. 47
48 48
49 D. Provide suitable equipment and facilities to dewater, drain, and dispose 49
50 of liquid removed without damage to adjacent property. , 50
51 51
52 E. Where connections to existing systems necessitate employment of past 52
53 installation methods not currently part of trade practice, utilize 53
' 15060 -6
II 02 necessary special piping components. 01
03 F. Once tie -in to each existing system is initiated, continue work 03
I 04
05 continuously until tie -in is made and tested. 04
05
06 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 06
07 07
I 08 A. General: 08
09 1. Test all piping systems upon completion of piping and prior to 09
10 application of insulation on exposed piping or covering concealed or 10
' 11 buried piping. 11
12 2. Utilize pressures, media and pressure test durations as specified on 12
13 Piping Specification Schedules. 13
' 14 3. Isolate equipment which may be damaged by the specified pressure test 14
15 conditions. 15
16 4. Perform pressure test using calibrated pressure gages and calibrated 16
17 volumetric measuring equipment to determine leakage rates. Select 17
II 18 each gage so that the specified test pressure falls within the upper 18
19 half of the gage's range. Notify the Engineer 24 HRS prior to each 19
20 test. 20
' 21
22 5. Completely assemble and test new piping systems prior to connection 21
to existing pipe systems, unless otherwise specified. 22
23 6. Acknowledge satisfactory performance of tests and inspections in 23
I 24 writing to Engineer prior to final acceptance. 24
25 7. Provide all necessary equipment and perform all work required in 25
26 connection with the tests and inspections. 26
27 8. Bear the cost of all testing and inspecting, locating and remedying 27
I
28 of leaks and any necessary retesting and re- examination. 28
29 29
30 B. Pressure Testing Methods and Criteria: 30
' 31 1. Types of pressure testing and inspection to be employed is 31
32 hydrostatic pressure testing. 32
33 2. Liquid systems: 33
I 34 a. The following liquid piping systems shall have zero leakages at 34
35 the specified test pressure throughout the specified duration: 35
36 1) All pressure piping. 36
37 3. Hydrostatic pressure testing: 37
I 38 a. All joints, are to be left exposed for examination during the 38
39 test. Provide additional temporary supports for piping systems 39
40 designed for vapor or gas to support the weight of the test 40
II 41 water. 41
42 b. Provide temporary restraints for pressure load under test. 42
43 Equipment in piping system with rated pressure lower than pipe 43
44 test pressure shall be isolated by valves or blind flanges. 44
I 45 c. Do not paint or insulate exposed piping until successful 45
46 performance of pressure test. 46
47 47
I 48 3.04 CLEANING 48
49 49
50 A. Cleaning: 50
I 51 1. Clean interior of piping systems thoroughly before installing. 51
52 2. Maintain pipe in clean condition during installation. 52
53 3. Before jointing piping, thoroughly clean and wipe joint contact 53
' WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
15060 -7
01 surfaces and then properly dress and make joint. 01
02 4. Immediately prior to pressure testing, clean and remove grease, metal 02
03 cuttings, dirt, or other foreign materials which may have entered the 03
04 system. 04
05 5. At completion of work and prior to Final Acceptance, thoroughly clean 05
06 work installed under these Specifications. Clean equipment, 06
07 fixtures, pipe, valves, and fittings of grease, metal cuttings, and 07
08 sludge which may have accumulated by operation of system, from 08
09 testing, or from other causes. Repair any stoppage or discoloration 09
10 or other damage to parts of building, its finish, or furnishings, due 10
11 to failure to properly clean piping system, without cost to Owner. 11
12 12
13 3.05 LOCATION OF BURIED OBSTACLES 13
14 14
15 A. Furnish exact location and description of buried utilities and thrust 15
16 blocks encountered. 16
17 17
18 B. Reference items to definitive reference point locations such as found 18
19 property corners, entrances to buildings, existing structure lines, fire 19
20 hydrants and related fixed structures. 20
21 21
22 C. Include such information as location, elevation, coverage, supports and 22
23 additional pertinent information which will be required by future 23
24 contractors for replacement servicing, or adjacent construction around 24
25 any buried facility. 25
26 26
27 D. Incorporate information on "As- Recorded" Drawings. 27
28 28
29 3.06 PIPE INSULATION 29
30 30
31 A. Insulate exposed pipe and pipe fittings in accordance with Section 15183. 31
32 32
33 END OF SECTION 33
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 89E19
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10 A.
11
12 B.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
'27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1. Ductile iron piping,
Related Sections include
1. Division 0 - Bidding
the Contract.
2. Division 1 - General
3. Section 15060 - Pipe
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
SECTION 15062
PIPE: DUCTILE
fittings, and appurtenances.
but are not necessarily limited to:
Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of
Requirements.
and Pipe Fittings: General Requirements.
15062 -1
A. Referenced Standards:
1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
a. B1.1, Unified Inch Screw Threads (UN and UNR Thread Form).
b. B16.1, Cast -Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25,
125, 250, and 800.
c. B16.21, Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges.
2. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
a. C105, Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile Cast -Iron
Piping for Water and Other Liquids.
b. C110, Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3 IN through 48 IN for
Water and Other Liquids.
c. C111, Gasket Joints for Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe
and Fittings.
d. C115, Flanged Ductile Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges.
e. C150, Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe.
f. C151, Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast -In -Metal Molds or
Sand -Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. A183, Carbon Steel Track Bolts.
b. A193, Alloy -Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High
Temperature Service.
c. A194, Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts and Bolts for High Pressure and
High Temperature Service.
d. A307, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 psi Tensile Strength.
e. D1330, Rubber Sheet Gaskets.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. See Section 15060.
2. Certification of factory hydrostatic testing.
3. If mechanical coupling system is used, submit piping, fittings, and
appurtenant items which will be utilized to meet coupling
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15062 -2
01 manufacturer's system requirements. 01
02 02
03 03
04 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 04
05 05
06 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 06
07 07
08 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 08
09 Manufacturers are acceptable: 09
10 1. Flanged adapters: 10
11 a. Rockwell Style 912 (cast). 11
12 b. Dresser Style 127 (cast). 12
13 _ c. Or approved equal. 13
14 2. Compression sleeve coupling: 14
15 a. Rockwell Style 431 (cast). 15
16 b. Dresser Style 53 (cast). 16
17 c. Or approved equal. 17
18 3. Polyethylene encasement tape: 18
19 a. Chase (Chasekote 750). 19
20 b. Kendall (Polyken 900). 20
21 c. 3 M (Scotchrap 50). 21
22 d. Or approved equal. 22
P3 23
24 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 24
25 01640. 25
26 26
27 2.02 MATERIALS 27
28 28
29 A. Ductile Iron Pipe: 29
30 1. ANSI C115. 30
31 2. ANSI C150. 31
32 3. ANSI C151. 32
33 33
34 B. Fittings and Flanges: 34
35 1. ANSI C110. 35
36 2. ANSI C115. 36
37 3. Flanges drilled and faced per ANSI 816.1 for 125 psi applications. 37
38 4. Furnish exposed pipe with flanged connections and fittings; furnish 38
39 buried pipe with push -on or mechanical joint connections and 39
40 fittings. 40
41 41
42 C. Nuts and Bolts: 42
43 1. Hot - dipped zinc galvanized meeting ASTM A307, Grade B. 43
44 2. Heads and dimensions per ANSI B1.1. 44
45 3. Threaded per ANSI B1.1. 45
46 4. Two nuts provided for 1 IN diameter bolt applications and larger. 46
47 47
48 D. Gaskets: ANSI B16.21, ASTM D1330, Grade 1 (rubber). 48
49 49
50 2.03 MANUFACTURED UNITS 50
51 51
52 A. Couplings: 52
53 1. Flanged adaptors: 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 a. Unit consisting of body sleeve, flange, followers, Grade 30 01
02 rubber gaskets, and ASTM A307 bolts and nuts. 02
03 b. Provide units equal to those specified in Article 2.01. 03
04 c. Supply flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges. 04
05 d. Rate entire assembly for test pressure specified on piping 05
06 schedule for each respective application. 06
07 2. Compression sleeve coupling: 07
08 a. Unit consisting of sleeve, followers, Grade 30 rubber gaskets, 08
09 and ASTM A307 nuts and bolts. 09
10 b. Provide units equal to those specified in Article 2.01. 10
11 c. Supply flanges meeting standards of adjoining flanges. 11
12 d. Entire assembly to be rated for test pressure specified on piping 12
13 schedule for each respective application. 13
14 e. Provide field coating for buried couplings per AWWA C203. 14
15 15
16 2.04 FABRICATION 16
17 17
18 A. Furnish and install without outside coatings of bituminous material any 18
19 exposed pipe scheduled to be painted. 19
20 20
21 B. Furnish cast parts with primer coat compatible with finish coat. 21
22 22
23 2.05 LININGS AND COATINGS 23
24 24
25 A. Provide cement mortar lining in accordance with AWWA C104. 25
26 26
27 8. Provide polyethylene encasement in accordance with AWWA C105. 27
28 28
29 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 29
30 30
31 A. Factory Test: 31
32 1. Subject pipe to hydrostatic test of not less than 500 psi with the 32
33 pipe under the full test pressure for at least 10 seconds. 33
34 34
35 35
36 PART 3 - EXECUTION 36
37 37
38 3.01 INSTALLATION 38
39 39
40 A. Joining Method - Push -On Mechanical (Gland -Type) Joints: 40
41 1. Install in accordance with AWWA C111. 41
42 2. Assemble mechanical joints carefully according to manufacturer's 42
43 recommendations. 43
44 3. If effective sealing is not obtained, disassemble, thoroughly clean, 44
45 and reassemble the joint. . 45
46 4. Do not overstress bolts. 46
47 5. Where piping utilizes mechanical joints with tie rods, align joint 47
48 holes to permit installation of harness bolts. 48
49 49
50 B. Joining Method - Push -On Joints: 50
51 1. Install in accordance with AWWA C115. 51
52 2. Assemble push -on joints in accordance with manufacturer's directions. 52
53 3. Bevel and lubricate spigot end of pipe to facilitate assembly without 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
15062 -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15062 -4
01 damage to gasket. Use lubricant that is non - toxic, does not support 01
02 the growth of bacteria, has no deteriorating effects on the gasket 02
03 material, and imparts no taste or odor to water in pipe. 03
04 4. Assure the gasket groove is thoroughly clean. 04
05 5. For cold weather installation, warm gasket prior to placement in 05
06 bell. 06
07 6. Taper of bevel shall be approximately 30 degrees with centerline of 07
08 pipe and approximately 1/4 IN back. 08
09 09
10 C. Joining Method - Flanged Joints: 10
11 1. Install in accordance with AWWA C115. 11
12 2. Extend pipe completely through screwed -on flanged and machine flange 12
13 face and pipe in single operation. 13
14 3. Make flange faces flat and perpendicular to pipe centerline. 14
15 4. When bolting flange joints, exercise extreme care to ensure that 15
16 there is no restraint on opposite end of pipe or fitting which would 16
17 prevent uniform gasket compression or would cause unnecessary stress, 17
18 bending or torsional strains to be applied to cast flanges or flanged 18
19 fittings. 19
20 5. Allow one flange free movement in any direction while bolts are being 20
21 tightened. 21
22 6. Do not assemble adjoining flexible joints until flanged joints in 22
23 piping system have been tightened. 23
24 7. Gradually tighten flange bolts uniformly to permit even gasket 24
25 compression. 25
26 26
27 D. Flange Adaptors 12 IN and Less: 27
28 1. Locate and drill holes for anchor studs after pipe is in place and 28
29 bolted tight. 29
30 2. Drill holes not more than 1/8 IN larger than diameter of stud 30
31 projection. 31
32 32
33 E. Cutting: 33
34 1. Do not damage interior lining material during cutting. 34
35 2. Use abrasive wheel cutters or saws. 35
36 3. Make square cuts. 36
37 4. Bevel and free cut ends of sharp edges after cutting. 37
38 38
39 F. Support exposed pipe in accordance with Section 15060. 39
40 40
41 G. Install buried piping in accordance with Section 15060. 41
42 42
43 43
44 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 44
45 45
46 A. Test piping systems in accordance with Section 15060. 46
47 47
48 B. Hydrostatic test pressure shall be 100 PSI, 2 HR duration. 48
49 49
50 END OF SECTION 50
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 8981 SECTION 15064 01
02 02
03 PIPE: PLASTIC 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Plastic pipe. 11
12 12
13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13
14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14
15 the Contract. 15
16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16
17 3. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: General Requirements. 17
18 18
19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19
20 20
21 A. See Section 15060. 21
22 22
23 B. Referenced Standards: 23
24 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 24
25 a. PVC (polyvinyl chloride) materials: 25
26 1) D1784, Rigid Poly(vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Compounds and 26
27 Chlorinated Poly(vinyl Chloride). 27
28 2) D1785, Poly(vinyl Chloride) PVC Plastic Pipe (Schedules 40, 28
29 80 and 120). 29
30 3) D2464, Threaded (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 30
31 4) 02467, Socket Type (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 31
32 5) D2564, Solvent Cements for (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and 32
33 Fittings. 33
34 34
35 35
36 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 36
37 37
38 2.01 PVC PIPING 38
39 39
40 A. General: Provide Schedule 80 pipe with Schedule 80 fittings and 40
41 appurtenances to locations shown on Drawings. Furnish materials in full 41
42 compliance to following material specifications: 42
43 1. Manufacture pipe, fittings and appurtenances from polyvinyl chloride 43
44 (PVC) compound which meets the requirements of Type 1, Grade 1 44
45 (12454 -B) Polyvinyl Chloride as outlined in ASTM D1784. 45
46 2. Manufacture pipe, fittings and valves from materials that have been 46
47 tested and approved for conveying potable water by the National 47
48 Sanitation Foundation (NSF). 48
49 49
50 B. Pipe: Furnish pipe meeting requirements of ASTM D1785. Pipe 2 IN and 50
51 less to be solvent welded. Pipe larger than 2 IN may be either flanged 51
52 or solvent welded unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 52
53 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
15064 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 .
1
1
1
1
15064 -2
01 C. Fittings: Provide ASTM D2467 PVC socket type fittings having the same 01
02 pressure and temperature rating as the pipe. 02
03 03
04 D. Flanges /Unions: Furnish flanges and unions at locations shown on 04
05 Drawings. Provide either flanges or unions at valves, penetrations 05
06 through structures and equipment connections. For pipe larger than 2 IN, 06
07 provide 150 LB socket type PVC flange. For pipe 2 IN and less, provide 07
08 socket type PVC union with buna 0- rings. 08
09 1. Use flat, full faced natural rubber gaskets at flanged connections. 09
10 Furnish heavy hex head bolts, each with one heavy hex nut, ASTM F593 10
11 Type 316 stainless steel. 11
12 2. Use spacers supplied by pipe manufacturer when mating raised -faced 12
13 flanges to other flanges. 13
14 14
15 PART 3 - EXECUTION 15
16 16
17 3.01 INSTALLATION 17
18 18
19 A. Field threading PVC will not be permitted. Perform required threaded 19
20 connections or attachments by the use of factory molded socket by 20
21 threaded adapters. 21
22 22
23 B. Employ installation practices and solvent welding all in compliance to 23
24 the manufacturer's printed recommendation. Do not clamp PVC tightly or 24
25 restrict movement for expansion and contraction. 25
26 26
27 C. Support exposed pipe in accordance with Section 15060. 27
28 28
29 D. Install buried pipe in accordance with Section 15060. 29
30 30
31 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 31
32 32
33 A. Test piping systems in accordance with Section 15060. 33
34 34
35 B. Hydrostatic test pressure shall be 50 PSI , 1 HR duration. 35
36 36
37 37
38 END OF SECTION 38
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 92B24 SECTION 15100 01
02 02
03 VALVES: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Valving and appurtenances. 11
12 12
13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13
14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14
15 the Contract. 15
16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16
17 3. Section 09905 - Painting and Protective Coatings. 17
18
19 4. Section 15060 - Pipe and Pipe Fittings: General Requirements. 18
20 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 20
21 21
22 A. Referenced Standards: 22
23 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 23
24 a. 81.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose. 24
25 b. 816.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 25
26 2. American Water Works Association (AWWA): 26
27 a. C111, Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray 27
28 Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 28
29 b. C207, Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - 29
30 Sizes 4 IN through 144 IN. 30
31 3. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings 31
32 Industry, Inc.(MSS). 32
33 33
34 1.03 SUBMITTALS 34
35 35
36 A. Shop Drawings: 36
37 1. See Section 01340. 37
38 2. Product technical data including: 38
39 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet 39
40 requirements of standards referenced. 40
41 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 41
42 c. Valve pressure and temperature rating. 42
43 d. Valve material of construction. 43
44 e. Special linings. 44
45 f. Valve dimensions and weight. 45
46 3. Test reports. 46
47 47
48 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: - 48
49 1. See Section 01340. 49
50 50
51 51
52 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 52
53 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
15100 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15100 -2
01 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 01
02 02
03 A. Refer to individual valve specification sections. 03
04 04
05 2.02 MATERIALS 05
06 06
07 A. Refer to individual valve specification sections. 07
08 08
09 2.03 VALVE ACTUATORS 09
10 10
11 A. Valve Actuators - General: 11
12 1. Provide actuators as shown on Drawings or specified. 12
13 2. Counter clockwise opening as viewed from the top. 13
14 14
15 B. Manual Actuators: 15
16 1. Provide for all exposed valves. 16
17 2. Provide lever actuators for ball valves 3 IN DIA and smaller. 17
18 3. Gear actuators required for plug valves 4 IN DIA and larger. 18
19 a. Gear actuators to be totally enclosed, permanently 19
20 lubricated and with sealed bearings. 20
21 21
22 2.04 FABRICATION 22
23 23
24 A. End Connections: 24
25 1. Provide the type of end connections for valves as required for the 25
26 connecting piping. 26
27 2. Comply with the following standards: 27
28 a. Threaded: ANSI 81.20.1. 28
29 b. Flanged: ANSI 816.1 Class 125 unless otherwise noted 29
30 or AWWA C207. 30
31 c. Bell and spigot or mechanical (gland) type: AWWA: 31
32 C111. 32
33 d. Soldered: ANSI B16.18. 33
34 34
35 8. Refer to individual valve sections for specifications of each type of 35
36 valve on Project. 36
37 37
38 C. Nuts, Bolts, and Washers: 38
39 1. Wetted or internal to be bronze or stainless steel. Exposed to be 39
40 zinc or cadmium plated. 40
41 41
42 D. On Insulated Piping: Provide valves with extended stems to permit proper 42
43 insulation application without interference from handle. 43
44 44
45 45
46 PART 3 - EXECUTION 46
47- 47
48 3.01 INSTALLATION 48
49 49
50 A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 50
51 51
52 B. Painting Requirements: 52
53 1. Comply with Section 09905 for painting and protective 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01 coatings. 01
02 02
03 C. Support exposed valves and piping adjacent to valves independently to 03
04 eliminate pipe loads being transferred to valve and valve loads being 04
05 transferred to the piping. 05
06 06
07 D. For threaded valves, provide union on one side to allow valve removal. 07
08 08
09 3.02 ADJUSTING 09
10 10
11 A. Adjustment valves and appurtenant equipment to comply with Section 01650. 11
12 Operate valve, open and close at system pressures. 12
13 13
14 END OF SECTION 14
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
15100 -3
1
II 01 92B04 SECTION 15102 01
02 02
03 PLUG VALVES 03
04 04
1
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
I 08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
II 11 1. Plug valves. 11
12 12
13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13
14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14
15 the Contract. 15
16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16
17 3. Section 15100 - Valves: General Requirements. 17
1 18 18
19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19
20 20
II 21 A. Referenced Standards: 21
22 1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 22
23 a. A21.11, Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile - Iron and 23
24 Gray - Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 24
I
25 b. B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 25
26 Class 25, 125, 250 and 800. 26
27 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 27
I 28 a. Al26, Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe 28
29 Fittings. 29
30 30
31 1.03 SUBMITTALS 31
32 32
33 A. Shop Drawings: 33
34 1. See Section 15100. 34
1
35 35
36 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 36
37 1. See Section 15100. 37
1 38 38
39 39
40 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 40
II 41 41
42 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 42
43 43
44 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers 44
I 45 listed under the specific valve types are acceptable. 45
46 46
47 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 47
I 48
49 01640. V 48
49
50 2.02 NON- LUBRICATED ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES (SLUDGE APPLICATIONS) 50
1 51 51
52 A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 52
53 1. DeZurik Series 100. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
15102 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15102 -2
01 01
02 B. Materials: 02
03 1. Body: Cast -iron ASTM Al26, Class B (semi- steel). 03
04 2. Plug: Resilient. 04
05 3. Plug facing: Grease and /or petroleum- resistant Hycar or 05
06 Buna -N compound. 06
07 4. Shaft bearing bushings: Permanently lubricated stainless 07
08 steel or bronze. 08
09 5. Valve seats: Welded -in overlay of 90 percent nickel. 09
10 6. Stem seal: Nitrile butadiene. 10
11 11
12 2.03 ACCESSORIES 12
13 13
14 A. Furnish actuator integral with valve. 14
15 15
16 B. Refer to Section 15100 for actuator requirements. 16
17 17
18 2.04 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 18
19 19
20 A. General: 20
21 1. Port area: 21
22 a. Equal to or exceed 80 percent of full pipe area. 22
23 2. Valve body: 23
24 a. Fitted with bolted bonnet. 24
25 3. End connections: See Section 15100. 25
26 4. Packing: 26
27 a. Adjustable and replaceable without disassembling 27
28 valve. 28
29 b. 0 -ring seals are not acceptable. 29
30 5. Designed for seating drip tight in any flow direction. - 30
31 31
32 B. Non - Lubricated Eccentric Plug Valves: 32
33 1. Actuator gearing in enclosure suitable for running in oil with seals 33
34 on shaft to prevent entry of dirt or water. 34
35 2. Positive identification on actuator indicating valve position. 35
36 3. Adjustable stop to set closing torque. 36
37 4. Valve packing adjustment accessible without removing actuator from 37
38 valve. 38
39 5. Rating: 39
40 a. 1/2 through 12 IN, 175 psi working pressure. 40
41 6. Memory stop ring. 41
42 42
43 43
44 PART 3 - EXECUTION 44
45 45
46 3.01 INSTALLATION 46
47 47
48 A. See Section 15100. - 48
49 49
50 50
51 END OF SECTION 51
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15104 -1
01 92B24 SECTION 15104 01
02 02
03 PVC BALL VALVES & CHECK VALVES 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Ball valves. 11
12 12
13 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 13
14 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 14
15 the Contract. 15
16 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 16
17 3. Section 15100 - Valves: General Requirements. 17
18 18
19 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 19
20 20
21 A. Referenced Standards: 21
22 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 22
23 a. D1784, Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) 23
24 Compounds and Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride (CPVC) Compounds. 24
25 25
26 1.03 SUBMITTALS 26
27 27
28 A. Shop Drawings: 28
29 1. See Section 15100. 29
30 30
31 B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 31
32 1. See Section 01340. 32
33 33
34 34
35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 35
36 36
37 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 37
38 38
39 A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the manufacturers 39
40 listed in the applicable articles below are acceptable. 40
41 41
42 B. Submit requests for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 42
43 01640. 43
44 44
45 45
46 2.02 PLASTIC BALL VALVES 1/2 TO 4 IN DIA. 46
47 47
48 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 48
49 1. Chemtrol. 49
50 2. Ryan Herco 50
51 3. Or approved equal. 51
52 52
53 B. Materials: 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15104 -2
01 1. Body, stem, ball, handle, end connectors: 01
02 a. PVC ASTM D1784- 124546 02
03 2. Seat: Teflon. 03
04 3. 0- rings: Viton. 04
05 05
06 C. Design Requirements: 06
07 1. Rated at 150 psi at 75 DegF. 07
08 - 2. Double or true union design. 08
09 3. Blocks both directions, upstream and downstream. 09
10 4. External adjustment for seat wear. 10
11 5. Body with mounting pad for actuators where required. 11
12 12
13 2.03 PLASTIC BALL CHECK VALVES 1/2 TO 2 -1/2 IN DIA. 13
14 14
15 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 15
16 1. Chemtrol. 16
17 2. Ryan Herco. 17
18 3. Or approved equal. 18
19 19
20 B. Materials: 20
21 1. Body, stem, ball, end connectors: 21
22 a. PVC ASTM D1784-12454B 22
23 2. Seat: Teflon 23
24 3. 0- rings: Viton. 24
25 25
26 C. Design Requirements: 26
27 1. Rated at 150 psi at 75 DegF. 27
28 2. Double or true union design. 28
29 29
30 2.04 ACCESSORIES 30
31 31
32 A. Furnish actuator integral with valve. 32
33 33
34 B. Refer to Section 15100 for actuator requirements. 34
35 35
36 36
37 37
38 PART 3 - EXECUTION 38
39 39
40 3.01 INSTALLATION 40
41 41
42 A. See Section 15100. 42
43 43
44 44
45 END OF SECTION 45
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 SECTION 15183 01
02 02
03 PIPE INSULATION 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 SUMMARY 08
09 09
10 A. Section Includes: 10
11 1. Insulation: 11
12 a. Piping insulation. 12
13 b. Valve and fitting insulation. 13
14 c. Pump insulation. 14
15 d. Equipment insulation. 15
16 16
17 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 17
18 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 18
19 the Contract. 19
20 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 20
21 3. Section 11005 - Equipment: General Requirements. 21
22 22
23 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 23
24 24
25 A. Referenced Standards: 25
26 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 26
27 a. 396, Water Vapor Transmission of Materials in Sheet Form. 27
28 b. C177, Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by means of 28
29 Guarded Hot Plate. 29
30 c. C355, Water Vapor Transmission of Thick Materials. 30
31 d. C518, Steady -State Thermal Transmission Properties by means of 31
32 the Heat Flow Meter. 32
33 e. C534, Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation 33
34 in Sheet and Tubular Form. 34
35 f. C548, Dimensional Stability of Low Temperature Thermal Block and 35
36 Pipe Insulation. 36
37 g. C680, Heat Gain or Loss, and Surface Temperatures of Insulated 37
38 Pipe and Equipment Systems by the use of a Computer Program. 38
39 h. D1056, Flexible Cellular Sponge or Expanded Rubber. 39
40 i. E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 40
41 2. Armstrong Cork Company: 41
42 a. Bulletin 10/77 15P Mechanical Systems Insulation, Section 3. 42
43 3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 43
44 a. 255, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 44
45 b. 90A, Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 45
46 c. 90B, Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 46
47 4. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL): 47
48 a. 723, Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building 48
49 Materials. 49
50 50
51 1.03 SUBMITTALS 51
52 52
53 A. Shop Drawings: 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
15183 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
15183 -2
01 1. See Section 01340. 01
02 2. Product technical data including: 02
03 a. Acknowledgement that products submitted meet requirements of 03
04 standards referenced. 04
05 b. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 05
06 c. Submit complete specification of insulation materials, adhesives, 06
07 cement, together with manufacturer's recommended methods of 07
08 application and coverage for coatings and adhesives. 08
09 3. Submit itemized schedule by building of proposed insulation systems 09
10 showing density, thermal conductivity, thickness, adhesive, jackets 10
11 and vapor barriers. 11
12 4. Certifications: 12
13 a. Products will meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. 13
14 14
15 15
16 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 16
17 17
18 2.01 PIPE, FITTING, VALVE, AND PUMP INSULATION 18
19 19
20 A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 20
21 1. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following 21
22 manufacturer(s) are acceptable: 22
23 a. Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation 23
24 1) Carpenter Insulation Co. 24
25 2) Or approved equal. 25
26 b. PVC Jacketing: 26
27 1) Ceel -Co. 27
28 2) Or approved equal. 28
29 c. Silicone- rubber impregnated fiberglass fabric: 29
30 1) Alpha Associates, Inc. 30
31 2) Or approved equal. 31
32 d. Fiberglass mat insulation: 32
33 1) BGF Industries, Inc. 33
34 2) Or approved equal. 34
35 35
36 B. General: 36
37 1. Insulation fire and smoke hazard ratings for composite (insulation, 37
38 jacket or facing, and adhesive used to adhere the facing or jacket to 38
39 the insulation), as tested by procedure ASTM E84, NFPA 255, and UL 39
40 723, not exceeding: 40
41 a. Flame spread: 25. •• 41
42 b. Smoke developed: 100. 42
43 2. Accessories (adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes and glass or asbestos 43
44 cloth for fittings): Same component ratings as listed above. 44
45 3. Indicate on product labels or their shipping cartons: Flame and 45
46 smoke ratings do not exceed above requirements. 46
47 4. Permanent treatment of jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke 47
48 safety is required. Water - soluble treatments is prohibited. 48
49 49
50 C. Pipe and Fitting Insulation for Plastic Piping Systems (including 50
51 valves): 51
52 1. Rigid polyisocyanurate foam pipe insulation or flexible elastomeric 52
53 closed cell pipe insulation. Average thermal conductivity not to 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 exceed 0.27 (Btu -IN) per square foot -DegF -hour at mean temperature of 01
02 75 DegF, temperature range -40 to 220 DegF; permeability 0.17 by ASTM 02
03 C355; water absorption 3 percent by ASTM D1056 and ozone resistance. 03
04 2. Minimum insulation thickness: Conform to the following schedule or 04
05 as shown on the Drawings: 05
06 06
07 APPLICATION PIPE SIZE THICKNESS 07
08 08
09 09
10 All 3 IN and less 1/2 IN 10
11 Over 3 IN 3/4 IN 11
12 12
13 13
14 3. Pipe Jackets: 14
15 a. Factory preformed 0.028 IN thick PVC jackets fabricated from PVC 15
16 sheeting with proven resistance to ultraviolet degradation. 16
17 b. Piping jacket not required on concealed piping. 17
18 18
19 D. Piping and Fitting Insulation for Ductile Iron Piping Systems (including 19
20 pumps and valves): 20
21 1. Fabricate removable jackets as follows: 21
22 a. 1 IN thick fiberglass mat insulation with silicone impregnated 22
23 fiberglass cloth facing inside and out. 23
24 b. Sewn construction with heavy -duty nylon stitching. 24
25 c. Provide velcro closures with stainless steel lacing hooks and 25
26 braided nylon laces. 26
27 27
28 2.02 SUBSTITUTION 28
29 29
30 A. Submit request for substitution in accordance with Specification Section 30
31 01640. 31
32 32
33 33
34 PART 3 - EXECUTION 34
35 35
36 3.01 INSTALLATION 36
37 37
38 A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions on all 38
39 exposed pipe, fittings, valves and pumps. 39
40 40
41 B. General: 41
42 1. Piping below ground covered with earth and indoor piping (except 42
43 domestic hot water piping) will not be insulated. Insulate all other 43
44 piping. 44
45 2. Consider piping and equipment as exposed, except as 45
46 otherwise indicated. 46
47 3. Provide release for insulation application after installation and 47
48 testing is complete. Apply insulation on clean, dry surfaces after 48
49 inspection, and installation of heat tracing. 49
50 4. Provide insulation continuous through pipe hangers, supports and 50
51 sleeves. 51
52 5. Apply specified adhesives, mastics and coatings at the manufacturer' 52
53 recommended coverage per unit volume. 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
15183 -3
15183 -4
01 01
02 C. Plastic Pipe and Fittings: 02
03 1. Fabricate and install fitting cover insulation according to 03
04 manufacturer's recommendations. 04
05 2. Seal joints, slits, miter -cuts and other exposed edges of insulation 05
06 with adhesive, recommended by the insulation manufacturer, to ensure 06
07 complete vapor barrier. 07
08 3. Pipe Jackets: 08
09 a. Apply jacketing with a minimum of 1 IN overlap. Weld 09
10 longitudinal and circumferential seams with adhesives as 10
11 recommended by manufacturer. 11
12 b. Provide premolded PVC covers of same material and manufacturer as 12
13 jacket for fittings, valves, flanges, and related items in 13
14 insulated piping systems. 14
15 15
16 D. Ductile iron pipe and fittings: 16
17 1. Fabricate removable jackets in manageable sections. 17
18 a. Provide separate jackets for valves and pumps. 18
19 b. Ensure complete coverage of all pipe segments. 19
20 20
21 3.02 REPAIR 21
22 22
23 A. Whenever any factory applied insulation or job applied insulation is 23
24 removed or damaged, replace with the same quality of material and 24
25 workmanship. 25
26 26
27 END OF SECTION 27
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1 DIVISION 16
ELECTRICAL
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
SECTION 16010
ELECTRICAL GENERAL INFORMATION
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16010 -1
A. The work included under this Section consists of furnishing all
materials, labor, equipment and supplies; and performing all operations
necessary to complete the installation of an electrical system for
control, power and lighting as indicated on the Plans.
Include the following:
1. Relocate one (1) progressing cavity sludge pump and provide
electrical power and controls to the new location.
2. Provide electrical power and controls for two (2) proposed
progressing cavity sludge pumps.
3. Provide electrical power for scum pump. Note that starters and
controls will be furnished by others.
4. Electric heat tracing of proposed above ground piping additions at
the sludge pump and scum pump stations.
B. This Section shall apply to all sections covered in Division 16.
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Division 1
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Qualifications
1. All technical drawings submitted will bear the seal of a registered
Professional Engineer. The act of sealing each drawing shall be
taken to indicate that the sealing engineer has personally reviewed
the plans and specifications, and that it is his professional
opinion that the material covered in his submission meets or
exceeds the requirements of the Contract Drawings and
Specifications.
2. Workmanship shall be of the highest quality and all work shall be
done by workmen skilled in the trades involved.
3. The term "CONTRACTOR" as used herein, is intended to mean the
"Electrical Contractor," or his subcontractor.
B. Standards and Codes
1. All construction, installation, workmanship, equipment and
materials shall conform to all acts, laws, rules and regulations
having jurisdiction in the area where this project is to be
located, and to the current edition of the following standards or
codes:
1 16010 -2
1 National Electrical Code (NEC) (ANSI /NFPA 70)
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI /IEEE C2)
NECA Standards of Installation
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
Illuminating Engineering Society (IES)
Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association (IPCA)
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
' Underwriter's Laboratories (UL)
Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL)
Anti - Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association (AFBMA)
Codes and regulations are to be interpreted as minimum requirements
and shall in no way restrict the installation.
' C. Regulatory Requirements
1. Conform to ANSI /NFPA 70
2. Conform to local buildings codes.
' 3. Obtain electrical permits, and inspections from authority having
jurisdiction.
' D. Allowable Tolerances
1. Scaling dimensions from drawings may be used only for approximate
locations. All dimensions shall be verified with existing
conditions on the job site.
2. Equipment locations and conduit installation shall follow the
layouts shown on the drawings. These layouts, however, are
diagrammatic and shall be subject to such changes as may be
' necessary to complete the installation, to coordinate the work with
other trades, or to overcome obstacles encountered during
construction.
3. The CONTRACTOR shall apply for detailed information regarding the
position of equipment and outlets that are not dimensioned on the
drawings. The final or required locations must be coordinated on
the job site with other outlets or other trades.
' 4. Where a major deviation from the drawings is indicated by practical
considerations, the CONTRACTOR shall submit shop drawings showing
all deviations in such detail so as to clearly indicate the
necessity or desirability for the change.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. The drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the various
systems. If any departures from these drawings are deemed necessary by
the CONTRACTOR, detailed drawings and descriptions of these departures
and a statement of the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the
ENGINEER for approval as soon as practicable. No departures from the
arrangements shown on the drawings shall be made without prior written
approval of the ENGINEER.
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16010 -3
B. Shop drawings and required field drawings shall be submitted to the
ENGINEER for approval as required under Division 1 and any additional
requirements specified in these sections.
C. Consistent with Section 01340, all review material shall be identified
in order to identify the submittal as follows:
1. Lighting fixtures shall be identified in accordance with the
fixture schedule.
2. Sheets or drawings showing more than the particular item under
consideration shall have crossed out all but the pertinent
description of the item for which review is requested.
3. Schematics and connection diagrams for all electrical equipment
shall be submitted for review. A manufacturer's standard
connection diagram or schematic showing more than one scheme of
connection will NOT be accepted, unless it is clearly marked to
show the intended connections.
4. In addition to complete specifications and descriptive literature,
a sample of the largest and smallest size of each type of cable
shall be submitted for review before installation. Each sample
shall have full surface legible printing showing cable type, size
and manufacturer.
1.05 PRODUCT, DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. All materials and equipment furnished and /or installed under this
contract shall be received and adequately protected by the CONTRACTOR.
B. Use space heaters or lamps to prevent condensation in electrical
equipment.
C. Do not store equipment in direct contact with the ground.
1 06 JOB CONDITIONS
A. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to make a physical
survey of existing conditions pertaining to this project.
B. The drawings showing the extent and arrangement of the work of the
particular trade must be used together with the drawings showing the
extent and arrangement of the work of the other trades. The CONTRACTOR
shall lay out his work with due consideration for the other trades and
shall be responsible for calling to the attention of the ENGINEER any
interferences encountered; such interferences shall be investigated and
called to the attention of the ENGINEER before any equipment is
installed and before any material is fabricated. Relocation resulting
from interferences shall be made at no additional cost to the OWNER or
ENGINEER.
1.07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
II 16010 -4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
A. All unit equipment shall contain individual unit nameplates. Nameplates
will also be provided on all instruments, load centers, individual dry
' type transformers, individual panelboards, safety switches and
combination starters. The nameplate will describe the unit or equipment
which is served. Each nameplate will be of suitable height to get at
least three lines of 3/16 -inch high engraved laminated plastic white -on-
black- background letters, indicating the function and name of the
equipment, as identified on the drawings.
B. All pilot lights will include laminated plastic nameplates with 3/16 -
inch engraved, white letters on black background indicating what has
operated or in what state the controlled load is in.
1 C. There shall be no abbreviations on nameplates.
1
1
1
1
A. No separate or additional payment will be made for any items of work,
materials, parts, equipment, supplies or related items required to
perform and complete the requirements of this Section. The costs for
all such items required shall be included in the lump sum bid for the
Project. ,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and Equipment: Acceptable to the authority having
jurisdiction as suitable for the use intended.
B. Materials and equipment provided under these specifications must be new,
standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in production of
such equipment. Provide the manufacturer's latest standard design for
the type equipment specified.
C. Equipment shall be of domestic (U.S.A) manufacture and assembly where
the same is available.
D. Product must conform to regulations of the National Electrical Code.
Where Underwriter's Laboratories have set standards, listed product and
issued labels, products used must be listed and labeled by U.L.
E. Factory assembled equipment for electrical work must be delivered with
a hard surface, factory - applied finish so that no additional field
painting is required.
2.02 IDENTIFICATION
D. Label wiring with heat - shrunk PVC transparent shrunk -on sleeves, Brady
Type HSA or Brady Type HSB, applied over Brady Type B -700 vinyl film
wrap markers. Tag wires at both ends with the same notation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
16010 -5
A. The CONTRACTOR shall test the completed system wiring for faults, and
remove any defects prior to final inspection.
3.02 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall effectively protect his work, materials and
equipment from damage during the construction period. All openings into
any part of the conduit system, associated fixtures and equipment must
be securely covered or otherwise protected. Steel conduit and other
ferrous metal supplies shall be stored where they will not be exposed
to corrosion.
END OF SECTION
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16015 -1
SECTION 16015 1
2
SUPPORTS 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.01 SCOPE 7
8
A. Furnish all foundations and supports required for the proper installation 9
of conduit and equipment. 10
11
B. Comply with the requirements of Section 16010 as applicable. 12
13
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 14
15
2.01 CONDUIT SUPPORTS 16
17
A. Support suspended single conduits by "Caddy" or "Minerallic" hangers and 18
adequately sized rods attached to the building structure. Use one hole 19
nest back conduit clamps to support conduits run on wall or ceiling 20
surfaces. Use Korns clamps to support single conduits from structural 21
steel members. 22
23
B. Use Unistrut or equal trapeze supports to support multiple runs of 24
conduits. Secure conduits to support channel with Unistrut "Uni- Clips ". 25
26
C. Use Unistrut supports also to support multiple runs of conduit routed on 27
the walls or ceilings. 28
29
D. Do not use perforated strap iron or wire to support conduits. 30
31
2.02 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS 32
33
A. Provide supports for all control stations, disconnect switches, pull 34
boxes, panels, receptacles and other equipment as shown on the Plans and 35
as required otherwise. 36
37
B. Supports are to be constructed from structural steel members, or from 38
Unistrut, or equal, as shown on the Plans. Members shall be sized as 39
shown on the Plans. Where details are not shown, use minimum 3 inch by 40
1 -1/2 inch channel structural steel sections 1/4 inch thick. Weld all 41
structural steel members. All supports are to be corrosion resistant, 42
hot dipped, galvanized steel. 43
44
C. Use expansion shields to attach supports to floor slab or pad. 45
46
D. All fastenings are to be corrosion - resistant. 47
16015 -2
1
PART 3 - EXECUTION 2
3
3.01 CONDUIT SUPPORTS, HANGERS, ANCHORS AND GUIDES 4
5
A. Provide supports, hangers, anchors and guides as indicated on the Plans 6
and, additionally, as required by the National Electrical Code. 7
8
B. Review all drawings, including structural drawings, for details regarding 9
supports, anchors, hangers and guides. 10
11
C. All supports are to be of type and arrangement to prevent excessive 12
deflection, to avoid excessive bending stresses between supports, and to 13
eliminate transmission of vibration. 14
15
D. All rod sizes indicated in this Specification are minimum sizes only. 16
Contractor shall be responsible for structural integrity of all supports, 17
anchors, guides, etc. All structural hanging materials are to have a 18
safety factor of 5 built in. 19
20
E. Locate anchor points as indicated on drawings or as required and 21
construct to permit the conduit system to take up its expansion and 22
contraction freely in opposite directions away from the anchored points. 23
24
F. Locate guide points where required and at expansion joints, joint, to 25
permit free axial movement only. 26
27
G. Spacing of hangers to be adequate for the weight and rigidity of the 28
conduits involved, and, in any case, no greater than 8'- 0" centers. 29
30
3.02 ATTACHMENTS 31
32
A. Where conduits are supported under poured -in -place concrete construction, 33
fit each hanger rod with a nut at its upper end, set into an 34
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., listed universal concrete insert placed 35
in the form work before concrete is poured. Where inserts are placed in 36
the bottom faces of concrete joists which are too narrow to provide 37
adequate strength of concrete to hold the insert properly, or where a 38
larger insert would require displacement of the bottom joist steel, 39
suspend the hanger rod from the center of a horizontal angle iron, 40
channel iron, I -beam, etc., spanning across two adjacent joists. Bolt 41
the horizontal support to non - adjustable concrete inserts of the "spot" 42
type, of physical size small enough to avoid the bottom joist steel. 43
44
B. Where conduits are supported under bar joists, hanger rods may be run 45
through the space between the bottom angles and secured with a washer and 46
two nuts. Where larger lines are supported beneath bar joists, secure 47
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
hanger rods to angle irons of adequate size; each angle to span across 1
two or more joists as required to distribute the weight properly and to 2
be welded to the joists or otherwise permanently fixed thereto. 3
4
C. Where pipes and loads are supported under steel beams, use approved type 5
beam clamps. 6
7
END OF SECTION 8
9
10
11
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16015 -3
SECTION 16111 1
2
CONDUIT SYSTEMS 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7
8
A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9
material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish, and 10
install all of the following conduit systems: 11
1. Heavy wall rigid galvanized steel conduit 12
2. Nonmetallic rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) 13
3. Flexible conduit 14
15
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 16
17
A. Submittals: Section 01340 18
19
B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 20
21
C. Wire and Cable: Section 16120 22
23
D. Boxes and Fittings: Section 16130 24
25
E. Grounding: Section 16450 26
27
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 28
29
A. Governing Standards: 30
1. The National Electrical Code as adopted by the authority having 31
jurisdiction. 32
2. Nonmetallic rigid PVC NEMA Standard TC -2 33
3. Rigid galvanized steel conduit ANSI C80.1 -1971 34
35
1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 36
37
A. Allied Tube and Conduit 38
39
B. Triangle 40
41
C. Wheatland 42
43
D. ENGINEER Approved Equal 44
45
1.05 SUBMITTALS 46
47
A. The submittal shall comply with the requirements of Section 01340. 48
49
B. The submittal shall include the following: 50
1. Conduit manufacturer's name as used on this project. 51
2. Conduit type and technical specifications. 52
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16111 -2
3. Couplings and fittings. 1
4. Complete technical description of conduit coatings where applicable. 2
3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4
5
2.01 HEAVY WALL RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT 6
7
A. Heavy wall rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized 8
or electro- galvanized inside and outside. All couplings and fittings 9
will conform to this requirement. 10
11
2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT 12
13
A. Nonmetallic rigid polyvinyl chloride shall be type EPC -40 -PVC where 14
installed underground. 15
16
2.03 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 17
18
A. Flexible conduit shall be flexible steel with liquid tight jacket. 19
Appleton Type ST, or equal. 20
21
PART 3 - EXECUTION 22
23
3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 24
25
A. Storage and Handling at Job Site. The CONTRACTOR shall store and handle 26
all conduit at the job site, while such materials are awaiting 27
installation, in conformance with the following: 28
1. Store conduit and accessories in an area protected from weather, 29
moisture or possible damage. 30
2. Do not store materials directly on the ground. 31
3. If items are stored inside the proposed building, consideration 32
shall be given to weight of the items and the effect of concentrated 33
loads on the building slabs, foundation, and other structural 34
members. CONTRACTOR shall contact ENGINEER or OWNER for permission 35
to store materials with a load exceeding 200 pounds per square foot. 36
37
3.02 HEAVY WALL RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL CONDUIT 38
39
A. Heavy wall rigid galvanized steel conduit shall be used for all conduits 40
installed above ground unless otherwise noted. 41
42
B. No trade size shall be smaller than 3/4 -inch. 43
44
C. A conduit's ends shall be cut square with a saw and reamed. Threads 45
shall be cut to effect full thread joint engagement. No running threads 46
are permitted. 47
48
D. Pull boxes shall be installed in appropriate intervals for long conduit 49
runs. 50
51
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
E. Exposed rigid conduit shall be installed parallel to structural members 1
and surfaces and multiple runs in the same direction shall be parallel 2
with symmetrical bends. Each run or group of runs shall be rigidly 3
supported with galvanized hardware and framing materials including nuts 4
and bolts. No wire ties shall be permitted. 5
6
F. Conduits crossing structural expansion joints shall have OZ type DX 7
bonded watertight expansion and deflection fittings. 8
9
G. All conduits shall be installed clear of structural openings. 10
11
H. Every necessary measure shall be taken to prevent the entry of dirt, 12
stones, trash or water in the conduit system. 13
14
I. Future conduits shall be capped with threaded cap if exposed, or 15
terminated in equipment or by galvanized couplings plugged flush with the 16
structural surfaces if concealed. Provide all future conduits with a 17
0.125 inch nylon fish cord pull string. 18
19
J. Where drawings indicate future equipment, the concealed portions of 20
conduits shall be provided unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. 21
22
K. Minimum separation of twelve inches shall be maintained between hot pipes 23
and electrical conduits. 24
25
L. All conduits passing through inside masonry walls or floor slabs except 26
curbed or framed openings, shall be provided with galvanized pipe 27
sleeves, 1 pipe size larger than the conduit trade diameter and cut off 28
flush with the wall or slab. Open space between sleeves and conduits 29
shall be packed and sealed. 30
31
M. Conduits 1 -inch or less may be installed between reinforcing steel in 32
concrete walls and slabs and if there is only 1 layer of reinforcing 33
steel in slabs, the conduits shall be placed under the reinforcement, 34
unless otherwise directed by the structural Engineer. Provide 3 inch 35
spacing between adjacent conduits. 36
37
N. Structural members and reinforcing steel shall not be cut, burned or 38
damaged in any way. 39
40
0. Trapped runs and vertical loops in conduits shall be avoided, but where 41
necessary, shall be drained with proper fittings. 42
43
P. For above ground runs of conduits space supports not more than 5 feet 44
apart and install with the runs parallel or perpendicular to walls and 45
structural members. Use right angle turns and symmetrical bends. Do not 46
use diagonal runs except to avoid two 90 degree bends. Do not locate 47
conduit so as to reduce the strength of structural members. 48
49
Q. Support and secure groups of conduits on wall hangers using toggle bolts 50
in hollow masonry, expansion bolts in concrete or solid masonry, machine 51
screws on metal surfaces and wood screws on wood construction. Space 52
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16111 -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
16111 -4
conduits from mounting surfaces using conduit clampbacks. Provide 1
plastic sleeves for conduits passing through masonry or concrete. Single 2
conduits shall be supported by one -hole malleable clamps. 3
4
R. Where rigid conduits enter sheet metal boxes, secure with lock nuts and 5
bushings. 6
7
S. Enter outside electrical enclosures from the bottom, unless shown 8
otherwise on the Plans. Terminate conduit connections to exterior sheet 9
metal cabinets and enclosures with Myers Scru -Tite, or equal, threaded 10
hubs. 11
12
3.03 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT 13
14
A. Schedule 40 PVC conduits shall be used for all circuits installed 15
underground. All penetrations out of ground shall be rigid steel. Rigid 16
steel shall be PVC - coated. 17
18
B. No PVC will be used in any location where it is exposed to direct 19
sunlight, extreme heat, or within the building. 20
21
3.04 FLEXIBLE CONDUIT 22
23
A. Use flexible conduit to connect to motors, solenoid valves, transformers 24
and any other equipment subject to vibration. 25
26
B. Maximum length not to exceed 18 inches. 27
28
3.05 UNDERGROUND INSTALLATION 29
30
A. Bury underground conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade, unless 31
indicated otherwise. If underground conduit must be installed in solid 32
rock, follow NEC Article 300 -5. 33
34
B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for excavating, draining trenching, 35
backfilling and removing excess earth in connection with installation of 36
underground conduit. 37
38
C. Waterproof all underground conduit joints in accordance with the 39
manufacturer's recommendation. 40
41
D. Provide a 3" sand bedding under the conduit and a 3" sand cover over the 42
top of the conduits. Place 21" of compacted selected backfill over the 43
sand layer. The backfill shall be free of any rocks and debris larger 44
than 1/2" measured in any direction. 45
46
E. Backfilling shall be done in such a manner that voids will be minimized. 47
Excess soil shall be piled on top and shall be well tamped. All rock and 48
debris shall be removed from the site. Backfill shall be compacted to 49
98% density. 50
51
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
F. Install a warning tape the entire length of every conduit run. Locate 1
tape 12 inches below grade. Tape is to be 4 mil polyethylene 3 inches 2
wide, colored red, with the legend "CAUTION BURIED HIGH VOLTAGE LINE ". 3
Stranco #PUWT -309, or approved equal. 4
5
G. Provide a red colored concrete encasement for service conduits and for 6
all conduits installed under roadways and parking lots. Concrete to be 7
3000 psi /28 day strength per ASTM 039 -44. Add a red admixture "Sonabrite 8
Red" by L. Sonneborn Sons, Inc., or equal, to the concrete at a rate of 9
5 pounds per 94 pound sack of cement or 16 pounds per cubic yard of 10
concrete. 11
12
H. Make transition from PVC to rigid steel conduit where conduit leaves the 13
ground. Transitions shall consist of a PVC -to -steel adapter and a 90 14
degree PVC - coated steel bend. Continue coating for 6 inches above grade. 15
16
17
END OF SECTION 18
19
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16111 -5
SECTION 16120 1
2
WIRE AND CABLE 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7
8
A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing labor, 9
material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish, install 10
and place into operation all wire and cable systems. 11
12
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 13
14
A. Submittals: Section 01340 15
16
B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 17
18
C. Conduits: Section 16111 19
20
D. Grounding: Section 16450 21
22
E. Mechanical: Division 15 23
24
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 25
26
A. UL 27
28
B. IPCA 29
30
C. IEEE 31
32
1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 33
34
A. Building Wire - Okonite, Cablec, Rome Cable Corp., or Engineer Approved 35
Equal 36
37
B. Instrument Wire - Alpha, Belden, Dekoron, or Engineer Approved Equal 38
39
1.05 SUBMITTALS 40
41
A. The submittals shall be made in complete conformance with Section 01340, 42
and the following: 43
1. Furnish technical specifications and factory and field test reports. 44
45
1.06 DELIVERY 46
47
A. Deliver wire and cable in unbroken packages bearing UL and manufacturers' 48
labels and showing date of manufacture and maximum allowable voltage. 49
50
51
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16120 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
16120 -2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1
2
2.01 600 VOLT INSULATION 3
4
A. Unless otherwise noted, power and /or control cable shall be single 5
conductor, soft drawn, annealed copper conductors, with type THWN 6
insulation, 90 °C in dry locations and 75 °C in wet locations. 7
8
B. Cable to connect the aerator motors shall be three - conductor round Type 9
G consisting of three 600 volt insulated copper phase conductors and one 10
insulated copper grounding conductor. Each phase conductor shall have 11
Class H stranding and 600 volt EPR insulation. The conductors shall be 12
twisted together and enclosed by a two -layer reinforced neoprene jacket 13
extruded over the assembly. 14
15
2.02 INSTRUMENT WIRE 16
17
A. Twisted pair 16 AWG copper conductors (7 strand, Class B); 15 mil 105 18
deg. C PVC primary insulation; color coded; 1.25 mil aluminum Mylar tape 19
shield; 18 gauge, 7 strand tinned copper drain wire; 35 mil FR PVC 20
jacket. 21
22
PART 3 - EXECUTION 23
24
3.01 WIRE AND CABLE RATED 600 VOLTS AND BELOW 25
26
A. Color coded wire shall be used on 600 volts and below. Color coding 27
shall match existing used by OWNER. 28
29
B. A wire run in conduit solely for grounding shall have an identifying 30
green covering. 31
32
C. A green 600 volt conductor used for grounding purposes with single 33
conductor cables of higher voltage requirements will be permitted. 34
35
D. Conductor terminations, No. 8 AWG and smaller, shall be made with 36
pressure connected lugs, Buchanan "Termend" or equal. Conductor 37
terminations, larger than No. 8 AWG, shall be made with solderless, 38
compression type copper terminals equivalent to Burndy type YA -L. 39
Compression shall be made with a die set that will make a circumferential 40
crimp. Wire strands shall be thoroughly cleaned before lug is applied. 41
42
E. Bolted connections for electrical conductors, without noncorrosive 43
surfaces, shall be thoroughly cleaned and tinned or covered with a light 44
film of commercial paste to prevent oxidation. 45
46
F. Where mechanical assistance is used for pulling conductors, a wire 47
pulling compound, Polywater J, or equal, having inert qualities that do 48
not harm the wire insulation or covering shall be applied to the 49
conductors before they are pulled into raceways. Interior of all 50
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
raceways shall be free from grease, filings or foreign matter before 1
conductors are pulled. 2
3
G. No wire smaller than No. 12 shall be installed, except as furnished with 4
standard packaged equipment, or specified herein, for low voltage control 5
systems, or fixture wiring. No. 14 may be used for control wiring where 6
adequately protected by properly sized fuses. 7
8
H. All wiring, except in special cases, shall be run in conduits or 9
raceways. No wire shall be installed until the conduit system is 10
completed and the construction work has progressed beyond the stage where 11
the wire may be damaged. 12
13
I. Where the capacity of a single feeder is so great as to require parallel 14
conductors in more than 1 conduit, each conduit must contain the same 15
number and length of conductors in all phases (legs) of the feeder, 16
including any neutral conductors. 17
18
J. In circuits of 600 volts and below, control wiring may be pulled in the 19
same conduit with the power wiring if the control wiring is rated for the 20
same voltage as the power wiring and if the conduit size is adequate. 21
Generally, motors 30 HP and larger shall have separate conduit systems 22
for the motor leads and control wiring. 23
24
K. Keep splices to a minimum. Splice only in accessible junction boxes. 25
Make splices to carry full capacity of conductors without perceptible 26
temperature rise. Do not pull splices into conduit. 27
28
L. Identify all wires in accordance with Section 16010. 29
30
M. Perform continuity tests on all power and control circuit conductors 31
using an ohmmeter and megohmeter. Verify proper phasing connections. 32
33
3.02 INSTRUMENTATION WIRING 34
35
A. Physically separate analog signals from control and power wiring. Use 36
separate conduit for each. 37
38
B. Run 24 and 48 Vdc in separate conduits from 115 VAC wiring. 39
40
C. Neatly arrange wiring with terminations located directly opposite the 41
terminals. Leave wire loops not less than 6 inches long in each outlet 42
box. Tape frayed terminals and exposed wire. 43
44
D. Ground shields at only one end of each cable run. Shields to be 45
continuous throughout the run. Provide jumpers at terminals blocks to 46
ensure continuity. 47
48
49
END OF SECTION 50
51
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16120 -3
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16130 -1
SECTION 16130 1
2
BOXES AND FITTINGS 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7
8
A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9
material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish, and 10
install all junction boxes, pull boxes, outlet boxes and ceiling boxes 11
installed outdoor or indoor. 12
13
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 14
15
A. Submittals: Section 01340 16
17
B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 18
19
C. Conduits: Section 16111 20
21
D. Grounding: Section 16450 22
23
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 24
25
A. UL 26
27
B. NEC 28
29
1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 30
31
A. Galvanized Boxes and Gutters 32
1. Circle AW 33
2. Universal 34
3. AMF 35
4. Hoffman 36
5. Engineer Approved Equal 37
38
B. Cast Iron Boxes and Fittings 39
1. 0 -Z /Gedney Company 40
2. Appleton Electric 41
3. Crouse -Hinds 42
4. Engineer Approved Equal 43
44
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 45
46
2.01 MATERIALS 47
48
A. Pull and junction boxes shall be galvanized after fabrication furnished 49
with a cellular neoprene gasket and sized according to the requirements 50
of the National Electrical Code. 51
16130 -2
B. The CONTRACTOR shall size all pull and junction boxes in accordance with 1
the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 2
3
C. Use standard threaded type couplings and connectors, galvanized outside 4
and inside by hot dipping. Do not use set screw type connectors. 5
6
D. For rigid bushings 1.25 inch and larger, use the insulating type. Use 7
double locknuts and bushings on smaller conduits. Use 0.Z. Type BLG 8
grounding bushings at panel boards, motor control centers and control 9
panel entries for conduits 1.25 inch and larger. 10
11
E. Use galvanized malleable iron conduit clamps and supports appropriately 12
sized for each application. Use conduit clampbacks to provide air space 13
between the conduit and the surface to which it is mounted. 14
15
F. Use threaded malleable iron conduit fittings with gasketed cover for 16
rigid steel. Crouse Hinds Obround Series, or equal. 17
18
G. Device or utility boxes shall be of unit construction of a size required 19
for the number of switches or outlets required. No sectional device 20
boxes will be permitted. 21
22
H. All boxes in exposed conduit runs shall be Crouse Hinds Type FS or FD, 23
as applicable, or approved equal. 24
25
I. Use PVC- coated fittings on PVC - coated conduit. 26
27
PART 3 - EXECUTION 28
29
3.01 DELIVERY AND STORAGE 30
31
A. Delivery. Prepare boxes, fittings, and accessories for shipment. 32
33
B. Storage and Handling at Job Site. The CONTRACTOR shall store and handle 34
all boxes and fittings at the job site, while such materials are awaiting 35
installation, in conformance with the following: 36
1. Store boxes, fittings, and accessories in an area protected from 37
weather, moisture or possible damage. 38
2. Do not store material directly an the ground. 39
3. If items are stored inside the proposed building, consideration 40
shall be given to weight of the items and the effect of concentrated 41
loads on the building slabs, foundation and other structural 42
members. CONTRACTOR shall contact ENGINEER or OWNER for permission 43
to store materials with a load exceeding 200 pounds per square foot. 44
45
3.02 INSTALLATION 46
47
A. All outlet boxes shall be mounted with suitable fasteners and they shall 48
contain the proper knockouts. On sheet metal boxes, all unused knockouts 49
shall remain closed. Outlet or utility boxes concealed in construction 50
shall be firmly secured in place, set true, square and flush with the 51
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
finished surface for the correct application of cover plates or other 1
devices. 2
3
4
5
6
END OF SECTION 7
8
9
B. Exposed outlet boxes shall not have knockouts.
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16130 -3
16180 -1
SECTION 16180 1
2
SAFETY SWITCHES 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7
8
A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9
material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish and 10
install safety switches. 11
12
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 13
14
A. Submittals: Section 01340 15
16
B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 17
18
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 19
20
A. NEMA KSI -1990 21
22
B. ANSI 23
24
C. NEC 25
26
D. OSHA 27
28
E. UL 29
30
F. Fed. Spec. WS -865c 31
32
1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 33
34
A. Square D Company 35
36
B. General Electric Company 37
38
C. Westinghouse Electric Corporation 39
40
D. Engineer Approved Equal 41
42
1.05 SUBMITTALS 43
44
A. Make submittals in conformance with Section 01340. 45
46
B. Include the following: 47
1. Manufacturer's catalog number. 48
2. Voltage and current rating. 49
3. Enclosure type. 50
4. Nameplate designation. 51
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16180 -2
5. Technical data including fuse curve plotted on 5 cycle log -log paper. 1
2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3
4
2.01 MATERIAL 5
6
A. Type: Heavy duty Type HD fused or non -fused as shown on the Plans. U.L. 7
labeled. 8
9
B. Construction: Quick -make, quick -break non - teasible operating handles 10
with provisions for padlocking in the "off" position. Handle interlocked 11
with door to prevent unauthorized opening with the switch in the "on" 12
position. Provide with equipment ground lug. Furnish with line terminal 13
shields. 14
15
C. Enclosure: NEMA 1 indoors. NEMA 3R surface mounted outdoors. 16
17
D. Ratings: Horsepower rated for 250 volts A.C. or 600 volts A.C. as 18
required for their service. 19
20
E. Fuses: Dual element type sized per N.E.C., Bussman, Chase Shawmut, or 21
equal. 22
23
F. Nameplate: Furnish each switch with a nameplate as specified in Section 24
16010. 25
26
PART 3 - EXECUTION 27
28
3.01 INSTALLATION 29
30
A. Install at locations shown on the Plans. 31
32
B. Mounting height to be 4'- 6" above finished floor unless otherwise noted. 33
34
C. Provide channel iron or Unistrut supports for mounting. 35
36
37
END OF SECTION 38
39
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 16450 1
2
GROUNDING 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7
8
A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9
material, tools, equipment and related items required to furnish and 10
install a radial electrical grounding system in conduits and connect to 11
the exilsting grounding system. 12
13
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 14
15
A. Submittals: Section 01340 16
17
B. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 18
19
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 20
21
A. NEC 22
23
B. IEEE Standard 142 -1972 (Recommended Grounding) 24
25
C. UL 26
27
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 28
29
2.01 MATERIAL 30
31
A. All wire and fittings shall be 98 percent conductivity copper. 32
33
PART 3 - EXECUTION 34
35
3.01 SYSTEM GROUNDING 36
37
A. The secondary of all alternating current distribution systems which are 38
to be grounded shall have the common conductor connected directly to the 39
grounding conductor at the point of supply. 40
41
3.02 SAFETY GROUNDING OF EQUIPMENT 42
43
A. Safety grounding of equipment will be accomplished by providing an 44
equipment ground wire, as shown on the drawings which will be no less 45
than the size recommended in Article 250 of the National Electric Code. 46
This ground will extend throughout the system by means of insulated green 47
ground wires connected to ground buses in each switchgear, motor control 48
center, panelboard and terminal on each outlet box, light fixture housing 49
or grounding terminal of the motor. Install bonding jumpers from ground 50
lugs on conduit grounding bushings to ground buses. 51
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16450 -1
' 16450 -2
1
B. Connect ground wires entering outlet boxes in a manner which will allow 2
removal of the receptacle without interrupting the continuity of the 3
grounding circuit. A grounding screw attached to the box, and used for 4
no other purpose, will accomplish this. 5
6
C. Where the equipment has no facility to attach an equipment ground wire, 7
use a Burndy Quicklug or equal. Clean the metal surface under the lug 8
to bright metal so that good contact can be made. 9
10
D. Connect equipment grounds to motors using a grounding stud threaded into 11
the stationary frame of the motor and not the end bell. 12
13
E. Make ground connections to equipment by using ground lugs or ground bars 14
where they are provided. Do not make connections to equipment anchor 15
bolts. 16
17
F. General items to be grounded shall consist of enclosures and /or frames 18
for motor starters, circuit breakers, transformers, safety switches, 19
switchgear, panelboards, motors, capacitors and exposed metal parts of 20
similar equipment. These items shall have solidly grounded cable 21
connections to the grounding system. 22
23
G. Ground cable termination to enclosure and frames shall be similar to 24
Thomas and Betts 71000 Series. 25
26
H. Ground wires installed above grade to be insulated and in conduit for 27
protection. 28
29
I. Resistance to ground shall not exceed 25 Ohms. 30
31
32
END OF SECTION 33
34
35
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 16610 1
2
ELECTRIC HEAT TRACING 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7
8
A. The work performed under this Section consists of providing all labor, 9
material, tools and related items necessary to furnish and install a 10
heat tracing system. 11
12
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 13
14
A. Electrical General Information: Section 16010 15
16
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 17
18
A. NEC 19
20
B. IEEE 21
22
C. UL 23
24
1.04 SUBMITTALS 25
26
A. Submit the following information inaccordance with the reuirements of 27
Section 16010: 28
1. Catalog data. 29
2. Calculations for each circuit. 30
3. Circuit drawings and schedules. 31
32
1.05 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 33
34
A. Chemelex 35
36
B. Briskheat 37
38
C. Engineer Approved Equal 39
40
41
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 42
43
2.01 DESCRIPTION 44
45
A. Furnish and install heat tracing for piping and instrumentation as 46
indicated on the Drawings or otherwise required by the Specifications. 47
48
B. Heat tracing is to be self limiting type equal to Raychem Chemelex Auto- 49
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16610 -1
16610 -2
Trace or Briskheat, or approved equal. 1
2
C. Heat tracing shall be per manufacturer's design guide to maintain a pipe 3
temperature of 45° F on water piping and, 62° F on caustic solution 4
piping, with an outside air temperature of 0 F and a wind of 20 mph. 5
6
D. Furnish one thermostat for each heat tracing circuit. Set thermostat 7
to actuate when outside air temperature reaches 45 F. Thermostat is 8
to be furnished by the heat tracing manufacturer. 9
10
11
PART 3 - EXECUTION 12
13
3.01 INSTALLATION 14
15
A. Install heat tracing per manufacturer's recommendations allowing 16
additional cable at valves and fittings to compensate for increased heat 17
loss and to allow for removal of the valve or fitting without disturbing 18
the heat tracing. 19
20
B. Connect heat tracing to power supply wiring in a weatherproof junction 21
box. 22
23
3.02 TESTING 24
25
A. Test each heat tracing circuit for proper operation of thermostat and 26
heating capabilities. 27
28
29
30
END OF SECTION 31
32
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 16900 1
2
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.01 SCOPE 7
8
A. Furnish an instrumentation and controls system which will perform the 9
functions specified herein. The system is to be composed of the 10
components described in this Section and shown on the Plans. 11
12
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 13
14
A. Electrical General Information: Section 16010. 15
16
B. Submittals: Section 01340. 17
18
19
1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 20
21
A. ANSI (American National Standards Institute) 22
23
B. AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) 24
25
C. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials) 26
27
D. AWWA (American Waterworks Association) 28
29
E. JIC (Joint Industrial Council) 30
31
F. NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) 32
33
G. NEC (National Electrical Code) 34
35
H. ISA (Instrument Society of America) 36
37
I. SAMA (Scientific Apparatus Manufacturers Association) 38
39
1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 40
41
A. Acceptable manufacturers for the various instrument and control 42
components are specified herein. 43
44
45
46
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16900 -1
16900 -2
1.05 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1
2
A. All components to be used in the instrument and control systems are to 3
be new (not used) and the current model produced by the manufacturer. 4
5
B. All equipment of a common type is to be the product of a single 6
manufacturer. 7
8
1.06 SYSTEM COORDINATION 9
10
A. Design instrument system and subsystems in accordance with Plans and 11
Technical Specifications and all applicable codes and standards. 12
13
B. Coordinate installation of instrumentation with mechanical and 14
electrical systems. 15
16
C. Plans and Technical Specifications do not necessarily show or specify 17
all components, wiring, piping and accessories required for a complete 18
and workable system. CONTRACTOR responsible for all materials, 19
supplies, labor and supervision to ensure a completely integrated and 20
coordinated instrumentation system. 21
22
D. Coordinate subsystems to provide a complete operational and functional 23
instrumentation system. 24
25
1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 26
27
A. Temperature: 0 deg. to 120 deg. F. 28
29
B. Relative Humidity: 98 percent maximum. 30
31
C. Process Fluid Temperature: 32 deg. to 150 deg. F. 32
33
1.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 34
35
A. Factory test each instrument over its full operating range. 36
37
1.09 WARRANTY 38
39
A. Guarantee the additions to operate in the manner prescribed herein for 40
a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. 41
42
43
44
45
46
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1
2
2.01 GENERAL 3
4
A. Each system shall operate in the manner described herein. 5
6
2.02 SLUDGE PUMP CONTROLS (PUMPS P -01 AND P -03) 7
8
A. A H -O -A switch shall be furnished for each pump. The H -O -A switch shall 9
be furnished in the pump control cabinet. In addition, a multi- circuit 10
timer shall be furnished. The timer shall be furnished and mounted in 11
the control cabinet. With the H -O -A switch in the "Auto" position, the 12
pumps shall turn on and off in response to the timer. When the switch 13
is in the "Hand" position, the timer controls shall be locked out. 14
15
B. The H -O -A switch shall be heavy duty oil tight type. 16
17
C. The time switch shall be a microprocessor based digital time switch with 18
the following features: 19
1. Four (4) individual output circuits, each independently programma- 20
ble with a one minute resolution. 21
2. Program entries made by pushbuttons with audible acknowledgement. 22
3. Manual override for each circuit. 23
4. Visual On /Off indication for each circuit. 24
5. Open construction for panel mounting. 25
6. Four (4) independent unpowered NO /NC output contacts capable of 26
switching 120 Volts at 3 Amps max. 27
7. Rechargeable battery and charger to provide 10 hours continuous 28
operation in the even of normal power failure. 29
8. A total of 256 On /Off events. 30
9. LED display. The time switch shall be Tork Model Z 400, or equal, 31
by Intermatic or Paragon, or approved equal. 32
33
34
PART 3 - EXECUTION 35
36
3.01 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 37
38
A. Delivery: Deliver materials and equipment to jobsite with sufficient 39
protection to ensure arrival in an undamaged condition. 40
41
B. Storage: All materials and equipment to be stored above the floor of 42
a trailer or other weather - protected structure. 43
44
C. Handling: Handle so as not to sustain damage of any kind to equipment 45
during unloading, storage or installation. 46
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16900 -3
16900 -4
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install all equipment in accordance with the Plans and
instructions furnished by the manufacturer. Inspect each new instru-
ment, control component, etc., before installation. Replace deficient
items.
3.03 FIELD CALIBRATION AND TESTING
A. Instrument Calibration: Calibrate instruments and prepare calibration
reports. All calibration to be performed by a factory- trained technical
representative.
B. System Testing: Test each system. Perform the following tests using
simulated inputs:
1. Check the overall system and each subsystem to see that they
function as specified based on simulated inputs at each sensor and
at each set of field contact monitored. This check to include the
testing of all automatic functions, sounding of alarms, etc.
C. If defects are found under simulated conditions, make corrections and
retest.
D. After start -up, test the complete system under
determine that all specified functions can be pe
E. After completion of testing, submit a System Test
following:
1. Certification that the system is operating
tolerances.
3.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
actual conditions to
rformed.
Report to include the
correctly and within
A. No separate payment for work performed under this Item. Include cost
of same in Contract price bid for work of which this is a component
part.
END OF SECTION
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
SECTION 16950 1
2
CALIBRATION AND TESTING 3
4
PART 1 - GENERAL 5
6
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 7
8
A. Provide all equipment and labor required for calibration, setting and 9
testing as described herein or otherwise required. All tests are to be 10
witnessed by the OWNER and ENGINEER. Give written notification of the 11
tests at least seven days prior. Repair or replace all defective 12
material, equipment or workmanship disclosed as a result of these tests 13
at no additional cost to the OWNER. 14
15
1.02 RECORDS 16
17
A. Provide the OWNER with a tabulation of all tests including the piece of 18
equipment tested, the date tested, weather conditions, and test values 19
results. 20
21
22
PART 2 PRODUCTS 23
24
2.01 MATERIALS 25
26
A. Use meters, meggers and other test devices specifically approved for the 27
test. 28
29
B. Test devices to be provided with calibration certificate. 30
31
32
PART 3 - EXECUTION 33
34
3.01 MEGGER TESTS 35
36
A. Use a minimum 500 volt megohmmeter. 37
38
B. Take each reading for at least one minute. 39
40
C. Include the following tests: 41
1. 115 and 230 volt motors 5.0 Megohms 42
2. 460 volt motors 7.0 " 43
3. 600 volt transformer windings 100.0 " 44
4. 600 volt wiring up to 1000 ft 25.0 45
46
D. Test all transformer windings as follows: 47
1. Primary to ground 48
2. Secondary to ground 49
3. Primary to secondary 50
51
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16950 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
16950 -2
3.02 GROUND TESTING 1
2
A. Take ground resistance measurements in normally dry weather, not less 3
than 48 hours after rainfall, with the ground under test isolated from 4
other grounds. 5
6
B. Measure the resistance of each ground rod. Submit in writing to the 7
OWNER a record indicating the rod location, the resistance measured and 8
the soil condition at the time. 9
10
C. Take ground resistance measurements on the building water service where 11
it is used as a ground also. 12
13
D. Install additional grounding if the resistance to ground measures more 14
than 25 OHM's at any location. 15
16
3.03 MOTOR TESTING 17
18
A. Megger test motors. 19
20
B. Dry out any wet insulation by use of space heaters or other approved 21
methods. 22
23
C. Check coupling alignment, shaft end play, lubrication and other 24
mechanical checks as required. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 25
26
D. Check for proper rotation. 27
28
3.04 RECEPTACLES 29
30
A. Test all receptacles for proper connections and grounding. Use an 31
approved plug in tester. 32
33
3.05 CONTROL CIRCUITS 34
35
A. Check all circuits for continuity, proper connection and proper 36
operations. 37
38
B. Set all time delay relays and timers for the desired operation. Record 39
the settings, indicating the relay or timer, its location and the 40
setting used. Verify all settings with a stopwatch. 41
42
3.06 LIGHTING 43
44
A. Turn on all lights after lamping them with new lamps. 45
46
B. Turn on all lights at each panelboard with lights on and submit 47
typewritten results to the OWNER. Results to include panelboard number 48
and location, branch circuit number and load served, and amperage 49
reading. 50
51
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
C. Allow outdoor lights to remain on for 72 hours to check ballasts as well 1
as lamps. Replace any defective components. 2
3
4
END OF SECTION 5
6
ROUND ROCK 1993 WEST WWTP IMPROVEMENTS
16950 -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00805 -4
01 implement to accomplish work in shortest schedule. 01
02 Information shall be submitted to Engineer in writing 02
03 with revised schedule. 03
04 04
05 C. If Contractor does not take necessary action to accomplish 05
06 work according to schedule, he may be ordered by Owner in 06
07 writing to take necessary and timely action to improve work 07
08 progress. Order may require increased work forces, extra 08
09 equipment, extra shifts or other action as necessary. 09
10 Should Contractor refuse or neglect to take such action 10
11 authorized, under provisions of this contract, Owner may 11
12 take necessary actions including, but not necessarily 12
13 limited to, withholding of payment and termination of 13
14 contract. 14
15 15
16 G. In Paragraph 22. COST INFORMATION, at the beginning of the 16
17 existing text add "A. ", and add the following: 17
18 18
19 "B. Within 14 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed, provide Engineer 19
20 with cost breakdown of each lump sum bid item for use in determining 20
21 value completed each month for partial pay estimates. Breakdown 21
22 cost itemized by trade and specification section and distribute cost 22
23 to individual applicable units and structures. Provide separate 23
24 breakdown for change order items, or items requested. Provide an 24
25 additional breakdown sheet, equivalent to AIA document G703, showing 25
26 the tabulation format for stored materials. Submit this sheet each 26
27 month with Contractor's pay request breakdown. The detail and format 27
28 of cost breakdown and stored materials tabulation sheet shall be 28
29 fully approved by Engineer." 29
30 30
31 H. In Paragraph 25. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS, delete 31
32 subparagraph A and substitute the following: 32
33 33
34 "A. Drawings and Contract Documents for Contractor Use: 34
35 1. The Owner will provide the Contractor with up to 35
36 four sets of Drawings and Specifications after the 36
37 execution of the Contract. If additional Drawings and 37
38 Specifications are required, the Contractor shall 38
39 compensate the Owner for same. 39
40 2. See Section 01060 for additional conditions for 40
41 obtaining Contract Documents for Contractor use." 41
42 42
43 I. In Paragraph 31, TAXES, add the following new text: 43
44 44
45 "C. Sales Taxes: In order for the contractor performing this contract 45
46 to purchase consumable materials by issuing a resale certificate in lieu 46
47 of payment of sales tax: 47
48 48
49 The contract will transfer title of consumable, but not incorporated, 49
50 materials to the Owner at the time and point of receipt by the 50
51 Contractor, and no use may be made of the materials prior to passage of 51
52 title. 52
53 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 The Contractor will be paid for these materials by the Owner as soon as 01
02 practical. Payment will not be made directly but considered subsidiary 02
03 to the pertinent bid item. The Contractor's monthly estimate will state 03
04 that the estimate includes consumables that were received during the 04
05 month covered by the estimate. 05
06 06
07 A representative of the Owner must be notified as soon as possible of the 07
08 receipt of these materials so that an inspection may be made by the 08
09 representative. Where practical, the materials will be labeled as the 09
10 property of the City of Round Rock, Texas." 10
11 11
12 J. In Paragraph 40. SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, OPERATOR'S 12
13 INSTRUCTIONS, SERVICE AND PARTS MANUALS, after subparagraph 13
14 15 P, add the following new subparagraph: 15
16 "Q. Refer to Section 01340 of the Specifications for 16
17 additional requirements." 17
18 18
19 K. In Paragraph 41, DRAWINGS SHOWING CHANGES DURING 19
20 CONSTRUCTION, after the paragraph number and title, delete 20
21 the text and substitute the following: 21
22 22
23 "Contractor shall post and keep current a complete set 23
24 of Contract Documents, including all Addenda, Field Orders, 24
25 Change Orders, and pertinent data on site at all times. 25
26 Throughout the progress of construction, the Contractor 26
27 shall maintain an accurate, thorough and up -to -date record 27
28 of all changes to the Drawings that occur during actual 28
29 construction. Upon completion of work and prior to 29
30 acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall file with the 30
31 Engineer one complete set of reproducible drawings with all 31
32 changes and Contractor's field construction notes neatly and 32
33 legibly recorded thereon. Such drawings shall indicate in 33
34 part the exact routing, if changed from drawing location, of 34
35 all buried or imbedded Work. These Drawings will be 35
36 transmitted by the Engineer to the Owner as Record Drawings." 36
37 37
38 L. In Paragraph 66. EXTENSION OF CONTRACT PERIOD, after 38
39 subparagraph G, add the following new subparagraph: 39
40 40
41 "H. No extension of the Contract Period will be allowed for 41
42 additional Work or for claimed delay unless the additional 42
43 Work contemplated or claimed delay is shown to be on the 43
44 critical path of the Project's schedule of construction or 44
45 the Contractor can show by Critical Path Method analysis 45
46 how the additional Work or claimed delay adversely affects 46
47 the critical path." 47
48 48
49 M. In Paragraph 72, PROGRESS PAYMENTS, add sub - paragraphs G and H as 49
50 follows: 50
51 51
52 "G. All payment requests shall be presented to the City Council for 52
53 approval on the second Thursday of each month. Contractor shall 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
00805 -5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
00805 -6
01 submit partial payment requests to the Engineer on or before the 01
02 Monday preceding the first Thursday of the month in which payment is 02
03 to be made. The Engineer shall submit the approved statement to the 03
04 City on or before the Friday preceding the second Thursday of the 04
05 month in which payment is to be made. Payment will normally be made 05
06 the Friday of the week following the week of the scheduled meeting of 06
07 the City Council. 07
08 08
09 H. The payment will be the total amount of the approved payment request, 09
10 less ten percent (10%) of the amount thereof, which ten percent (10%) 10
11 shall be retained until final payment, and further less all previous 11
12 payments and all future sums that may be retained by the Owner under 12
13 the terms of the Agreement. It is understood, however, that in case 13
14 the whole work be near to completion and some unexpected and unusual 14
15 delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the Engineer, pay a 15
16 reasonable and equitable portion of the retained percentage to the 16
17 Contractor; or the Contractor at the Owner's option, may be relieved 17
18 of the obligation to fully complete the work and, thereupon, the 18
19 Contractor shall receive payment of the balance due him under the 19
20 contract subject only to the conditions stated under "Acceptance and 20
21 Final Payment" (paragraph 76)." 21
22 22
23 N. Revised Paragraph 76, ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT, subparagraph A, to 23
24 read as follows. 24
25 25
26 "A. Upon the issuance of the Certificate of Completion, the Engineer 26
27 shall proceed to make final measurements and prepare final statement 27
28 for the value of all work performed and materials furnished under the 28
29 terms of the Agreement and shall certify same to the Owner. The 29
30 Application for Final Payment will be submitted to the City Council 30
31 for approval on the second Thursday of the month immediately 31
32 following the receipt of the Application of Final Payment. Payment 32
33 will normally be made the Friday of the week following the week of 33
34 the scheduled meeting of the City Council." 34
35 35
36 0. Add Paragraph 85, WAGE RATES, to read as follows: 36
37 37
38 "A. Contractors are required to pay the prevailing wage rates to 38
39 laborers, workmen and mechanics employed on behalf of the Owner 39
40 engaged in the construction of public works. The wage rate of these 40
41 jobs shall be the general prevailing wage rates for work of a similar 41
42 character. This applies to contractors and subcontractors. The 42
43 contractor and subcontractors shall keep and make available records 43
44 of workers and their wages. Prevailing wage rates are published by 44
45 the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of Labor Statistics, 45
46 Southwestern Division and the Texas Employment Commission of the 46
47 Austin Job Bank Area. The wage rate shall not be less than the 47
48 minimum wage rates set by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment 48
49 Standards Administration, Wage and Hour Division. There is penalty 49
50 of $10.00 per worker per day or portion of a day that the prevailing 50
51 wage rate is not paid by the Contractor or any Subcontractor." 51
52 52
53 END OF SECTION 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
DIVISION 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 92803 SECTION 01060 01
02 02
03 GENERAL PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 03
04 04
05 05
06 PART 1 - GENERAL 06
07 07
08 1.01 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 08
09 09
10 A. A preconstruction conference shall be held after award of Contract. 10
11 Engineer will notify the Contractor as to the date, time, and location, 11
12 of the conference 1 week in advance of the proposed date. Contractor's 12
13 Project Manager and Project Superintendent and Contractor's Subcontractor 13
14 Representatives shall attend. 14
15 15
16 1.02 DRAWINGS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONTRACTOR USE 16
17 17
18 A. Refer to General Conditions. 18
19 19
20 B. Contractor shall pick up all "no- charge" documents within 10 days from 20
21 date of Notice to Proceed. 21
22 22
23 C. Additional documents after "no- charge" documents will be furnished to 23
24 Contractor at cost. 24
25 25
26 1.03 TESTING 26
27 27
28 A. Payment for Soil, Concrete and Other Testing: 28
29 1. Soils and concrete testing: The Owner will pay for "Passing" soils 29
30 and "Passing" concrete tests on the Project. Costs of corrective 30
31 action, costs of "Failing" soils and concrete tests, and cost of 31
32 testing associated with establishment of mix design are the sole 32
33 responsibility of the Contractor. 33
34 2. Other testing: Required testing, testing procedures, reports, 34
35 certificates, and costs associated with all phases of securing 35
36 required satisfactory test information which may be required by 36
37 individual sections of Specifications or Drawings are the full 37
38 responsibility of the Contractor. 38
39 39
40 1.04 ORDER OF CONSTRUCTION 40
41 41
42 A. Construction operations will be scheduled to allow the Owner 42
43 uninterrupted operation of existing adjacent facilities. Coordinate 43
44 connections with existing work to ensure timely completion of interfaced 44
45 items. • 45
46 46
47 B. At no time shall Contractor or his employees modify operation of the 47
48 existing facilities or start construction modifications without approval 48
49 of the Owner except in emergency to prevent or minimize damage. 49
50 50
51 C. Coordinate all construction activities to minimize disruption of existing 51
52 plant operations. Do not commence any work which affects the operation 52
53 of existing facilities without contacting the Owner at least two working 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01060 -1
01060 -2
01 days prior to the time such activities are anticipated to begin. Provide 01
02 all temporary pumps, connections, and other facilities necessary to allow 02
03 continuous operation of existing facilities while making connections. 03
04 04
05 05
06 1.09 PROJECT MEETINGS 06
07 07
08 A. The Engineer shall conduct construction meetings involving: 08
09 1. Contractor's project manager. 09
10 2. Contractor's project superintendent. 10
11 3. Owner's designated representative(s). 11
12 4. Engineer's designated representative(s). 12
13 5. Contractor's subcontractors as appropriate to the work in progress. 13
14 14
15 B. Conduct meetings monthly. 15
16 16
17 C. Take meeting minutes and submit copies of meeting minutes to participants 17
18 and designated recipients identified at the Preconstruction Conference. 18
19 Corrections, additions or deletions to the minutes shall be noted and 19
20 addressed at the following meeting. 20
21 21
22 D. Schedule meetings for most convenient time frame. 22
23 23
24 E. The Contractor shall have available at each meeting up -to -date record 24
25 drawings. P5
26 26
27 27
28 END OF SECTION 28
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1 01340 -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 91C06 SECTION 01340 01
02 02
03 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA & SAMPLES, OPERATION AND 03
04 MAINTENANCE MANUALS, EQUIPMENT RECORD SHEETS 04
05 05
06 06
07 PART 1 - GENERAL 07
08 08
09 1.01 SUMMARY 09
10 10
11 A. General: 11
12 1. Section Addresses: 12
13 a. Mechanics of Shop Drawing Process. 13
14 14
15 B. Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to: 15
16 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of 16
17 the Contract. 17
18 2. Division 1 - General Requirements. 18
19 3. Sections in Divisions 2 through 16 identifying submittal 19
20 requirements. 20
21 21
22 1.02 SUBMITTALS: GENERAL 22
23 23
24 A. Transmit all submittals to: 24
25 25
26 HDR Engineering, Inc. 26
27 3000 South IH -35, Suite 400 27
28 Austin, TX 78704 28
29 Attn: Duwain Whitis, P.E. 29
30 30
31 B. Utilize two copies of attached Exhibit "A" to transmit all shop drawings 31
32 and samples. 32
33 33
34 C. Utilize two copies of attached Exhibit "B" to transmit all Operation and 34
35 Maintenance Manuals and Equipment Record Sheets (Exhibits "Cl" and "C2 "). 35
36 36
37 D. All transmittals must be from Contractor and bear his approval stamp. 37
38 Transmittals will not be received from or returned to subcontractors. 38
39 1. Shop drawing transmittal stamp shall read "(Contractor's Name) 39
40 represents that we have determined and verified all field dimensions 40
41 and measurements, field construction criteria, materials, catalog 41
42 numbers, and similar data, and that we have checked with the 42
43 requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents as stipulated in 43
44 General Conditions Paragraph 40G." Transmittals will not be received 44
45 from or returned to subcontractors. 45
46 2. Operation and Maintenance Manual transmittal stamp may be 46
47 Contractor's standard approval stamp. 47
49 E. Provide submittal information defining specific equipment or materials 49
50 utilized on the project. Generalized product information not clearly 50
51 defining specific equipment or materials to be provided will be rejected. 51
52 52
53 F. Calculations required in individual specification sections will be 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01340 -2
01 received for information purposes only and will be returned stamped "E. 01
02 Engineer's Review Not Required" to acknowledge receipt. 02
03 03
04 G. Submittal Schedule: 04
05 1. Schedule of shop drawings: 05
06 a. Submitted and approved within 14 days of receipt of 06
07 Notice to Proceed. 07
08 2. Shop drawings: 08
09 a. Submittal and approval prior to 50 percent 09
10 completion. 10
11 3. Operation and Maintenance Manuals and Data Record Sheets: 11
12 a. Initial submittal within 45 days after date shop 12
13 drawings are approved. 13
14 b. Full payment will not be made on any equipment or 14
15 materials until an approved Operation and Maintenance 15
16 Manual is received. 16
17 17
18 H. Final payment on the project shall not be made until final approved 18
19 copies of all Operation and Maintenance Manuals including Equipment 19
20 Record Sheets (with equipment serial numbers) have been received. 20
21 21
22 1.03 SUBMITTALS: SHOP DRAWINGS 22
23 23
24 A. Transmittal Mechanics: 24
25 1. Number transmittals consecutively beginning with 1. 25
26 2. Assure resubmitted items retain the original number but with an added 26
27 suffix letter starting with "A." 27
28 3. Restrict each letter of transmittal to only one Specification Section 28
29 or portion thereof. 29
30 4. Provide breakout of each transmittal component on transmittal form 30
31 "A." Each component thus defined will receive specific action by the 31
32 Engineer. Define manufacturer, item, tag number, and Drawing/ 32
33 Specification reference. 33
34 5. Do not change the scope of any resubmittal from the original 34
35 transmittal scope. If some components of the original transmittal 35
36 received "A" or "B" Action and others did not, resubmit the "A" or 36
37 "B" Action components in subsequent resubmittal packages. Provide a 37
38 summary sheet containing all components of the original transmittal 38
39 at the front of each resubmittal. Indicate each component as either 39
40 A or B, "outstanding," or "submitted for action." Reference items 40
41 previously receiving "A" or "B" Action to the transmittal in which 41
42 A" or "B" Action was received. "Outstanding" items are defined as 42
43 items previously not receiving "A" or "B" Action and not yet 43
44 resubmitted for re- review. Use this term "Submitted for action" to 44
45 indicate items which are included for review in the transmittal. 45
46 6. For 8 -1/2 x 11 IN size sheets, provide three copies of each page for 46
47 Engineer plus the number required by the Contractor. The number of 47
48 copies required by the Contractor will be defined at the 48
49 Preconstruction Conference, but shall not exceed 7. 49
50 7. For items not covered in paragraph 6, submit one reproducible 50
51 transparency and one print of each drawing until approval is 51
52 obtained. Utilize mailing tube; do not fold. The Engineer will mark 52
53 and return the reproducible to the Contractor for his reproduction 53
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01340 -3
01 and distribution. 01
02 8. Provide clear space (3 IN SQ) for Engineer stamping of each component 02
03 defined in A.5. 03
04 9. Contractor shall not use red color for marks on transmittals. 04
05 Duplicate all marks on all copies transmitted, and ensure marks are 05
06 photocopy reproducible. Outline Contractor marks on reproducible 06
07 transparencies with a rectangular box. 07
08 08
09 B. Transmittal Contents: 09
10 1. Coordinate and identify shop drawing contents so that all items can 10
11 be easily verified by the Engineer. 11
12 2. Identify equipment or material use, tag number, drawing detail 12
13 reference, weight, and other project specific information. 13
14 3. Provide sufficient information together with technical cuts and 14
15 technical data to allow an evaluation to be made to determine that 15
16 the item submitted is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 16
17 4. Submit items like equipment brochures, cuts of fixtures, product data 17
18 sheets or catalog sheets on 8 -1/2 x 11 IN pages. Indicate exact item 18
19 or model and all proposed options. 19
20 5. Include legible scale details, sizes, dimensions, performance 20
21 characteristics, capacities, test data, anchoring details, 21
22 installation instructions, storage and handling instructions, color 22
23 charts, layout drawings, parts catalogs, rough -in diagrams, wiring 23
24 diagrams, controls, weights and other pertinent data. Arrange data 24
25 and performance information in format similar to that provided in 25
26 Contract Documents. Provide, at minimum, the detail provided in the 26
27 Contract Documents. 27
28 6. If proposed equipment or materials deviate from the Specifications or 28
29 Drawings in any way, clearly note the deviation and justify the said 29
30 deviation in detail in a separate letter immediately following 30
31 transmittal sheet. If explanation is not given, shop drawings will be 31
32 returned without action. 32
33 33
34 1.04 SUBMITTALS: SAMPLES 34
35 35
36 A. Identify sample as to: manufacturer, item, use, type, project 36
37 designation, tag number, specification section or drawing detail 37
38 reference, color, range, texture, finish and other pertinent data. 38
39 39
40 B. Include application specific brochures, and installation instructions. 40
41 41
42 C. Provide Contractor's stamp of approval on samples as indication of his 42
43 checking and verification of dimensions and coordination with 43
44 interrelated work. 44
45 45
46 D. Resubmit samples of rejected items. 46
47 47
48 E. Approved samples submitted or constructed, constitute criteria for 48
49 judging completed work. Finished work or items not equal to samples will 49
50 be rejected. 50
51 51
52 F. Samples may be retained for comparison purposes. Remove samples when 52
53 directed. Include in bid all costs of furnishing and removing samples. 53
01340 -4
I 01 01
02 1.05 SUBMITTALS: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS AND EQUIPMENT 02
03 RECORD SHEETS 03
I 04 04
05 A. Transmittal Mechanics: 05
06 1. See Paragraph 1.02 C. 06
II 08
2. Provide transmittal form for Operation and Maintenance Manual with 07
08 original number of the approved item plus a suffix "0 -M." 08
09 3. Submit one copy until approval is received. 09
10 4. Acceptable submittals will be retained with the transmittal form 10
' 11 returned with a request for two additional copies. 11
12 5. Deficient submittals will be returned along with the transmittal form 12
13 which will be marked to indicate deficient areas. 13
I 14
15 6. Identify resubmittals with the original number plus a suffix letter 14
starting with "A." 15
16 7. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals printed on 8 -1/2 x 11 IN 16
II 18
size heavy first quality paper with standard three -hole punching and 17
18 bound in stiff binder constructed as a three -ring style. Provide 18
19 binders with titles on front and on spine of binder. Tab each 19
20 section of manuals for easy reference with plastic- coated dividers. 20
I 21 Provide index for each manual. Provide plastic sheet lifters prior 21
22 to first page and following last page. 22
23 8. Reduce drawings or diagrams bound in manuals to an 8 -1/2 x 11 IN or 23
' 24
25 11 x 17 IN size. However, where reduction is not practical to ensure 24
readability, fold larger drawings separately and place in vinyl 25
26 envelopes which are bound into the binder. Identify vinyl envelopes 26
27 with drawing numbers. 27
I
28 28
29 B. Transmittal Content: 29
30 1. Submission of Operation and Maintenance Manuals is applicable but not 30
I 31 necessarily limited to: 31
32 a. Major equipment. 32
33 b. Equipment used with electrical motor loads of 1/6 HP nameplate or 33
II 34 greater. 34
35 c. Specialized equipment including valves and instrumentation and 35
36 control system components for HVAC and process systems such as 36
I 37 meters, recorders, and transmitters. 37
38 d. Valves greater than 12 IN DIA. 38
39 e. Water control gates. 39
40 2. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals which include, but are not 40
I 41 necessarily limited to, the following detailed information, as 41
42 applicable: 42
43 a. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, limiting 43
I 44 operations. 44
45 b. Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and 45
46 checking instructions. 46
47 c. Operating instructions for start -up, routine and normal 47
I
48 operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency 48
49 conditions. 49
50 d. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. 50
' 51 e. Guide to "troubleshooting." 51
52 f. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 52
53 g. Outline, cross - section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; 53
I WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01340 -5
I 01 and electrical diagrams, including elementary diagrams, wiring 01
02 diagrams, connection diagrams, word description of wiring 02
03 diagrams and interconnection diagrams. 03
t 04
05 h. Test data and performance curves. 04
i. A list of recommended spare parts with a price list and a list of 05
06 spare parts provided under these specifications. 06
II 08
j. Copies of installation instructions, parts lists or other 07
08 documents packed with equipment when delivered. 08
09 k. Instrumentation or tag numbers relating the equipment back to the 09
10 Contract Documents. 10
11 1. Include a filled -out copy of the Equipment Record Sheet as the 11
12 first pages) of each Operation and Maintenance Manual. Complete 12
13 maintenance requirements in detail. Simple reference to the 13
I 14 Manual is not acceptable. 14
15 m. For equipment items involving components or subunits, an 15
16 Equipment Record Sheet for each operating component or subunit is 16
I 17 required. 17
18 18
19 1.06 SUBMITTALS: SHOP DRAWINGS: ENGINEER'S REVIEW ACTION 19
20 20
I 21 A. Items within transmittals will be reviewed for overall design intent and 21
22 will receive one of the following actions: 22
23 23
' 24 A - FURNISH AS SUBMITTED 24
25 B FURNISH AS NOTED (BY ENGINEER) 25
26 C - REVISE AND RESUBMIT 26
27 D - REJECTED 27
I 28 E - ENGINEER'S REVIEW NOT REQUIRED 28
29 29
30 B. Transmittals received will be initially reviewed to ascertain inclusion 30
I 31 of Contractor's approval stamp. Drawings not stamped by the Contractor 31
32 or stamped with a stamp containing language other than that specified in 32
33 Paragraph 1.02 D will not be reviewed for technical content and will be 33
I 34
35 returned without any action. 34
35
36 C. Transmittals returned with Action AN or "B" are considered ready for 36
37 fabrication and installation. If for any reason a transmittal that has 37
I
38 an "A" or "B" Action is resubmitted, it must be accompanied by a letter 38
39 defining the changes that have been made and the reason for the 39
40 resubmittal. Destroy or conspicuously mark "SUPERSEDED" all documents 40
I 41 having previously received "A" or "B" Action that are superseded by a 41
42 resubmittal. 42
43 43
I 44 D. Transmittals with Action "A" or "B" combined with Action "C" (Revise and 44
45 Resubmit) or "D" (Rejected) will be individually analyzed giving 45
46 consideration as follows: 46
47 1. The portion of the transmittal given "C" or "D" will not be 47
I
48 distributed (unless previously agreed to otherwise at the 48
49 Preconstruction Conference). One copy or the one transparency of the 49
50 "C" or "D" drawings will be marked up and returned to the Contractor. 50
' 51 Correct and resubmit items so marked.
2. 51
52 Items marked "A" or "B" will be fully distributed.' 52
53 3. If a portion of the items or system proposed are acceptable, however, 53
' WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
01340 -6
01 the major part of the individual drawings or documents are incomplete 01
02 or require revision, the entire submittal may be given "C" or "D" 02
03 Action. This is at the sole discretion of the Engineer. In this 03
04 case, some drawings may contain relatively few or no comments or the 04
05 statement, "Resubmit to maintain a complete package." Distribution to 05
06 the Owner and field will not be made (unless previously agreed to 06
07 otherwise). 07
08 08
09 E. Failure to include any specific information specified under the submittal 09
10 paragraphs of the specifications will result in the transmittal being 10
11 returned to the Contractor with "C" or "D" Action. 11
12 12
13 F. In addition to calculations stamped and returned "E. Engineer's Review 13
14 Not Required," other transmittals such as submittals which the Engineer 14
15 considers as "Not Required," submittal information which is supplemental 15
16 to but not essential to prior submitted information, or items of 16
17 information in a transmittal which have been reviewed and approved in a 17
18 prior transmittal, will be returned with Action "E. Engineer's Review 18
19 Not Required." 19
20 20
21 END OF SECTION 21
WEST WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT SLUDGE PUMPING IMPROVEMENTS
1-0A
I Project Name:
'Project Owner:
'Contractor:
Address:
Attn.:
Date Transmitted:
No. Description
Copies
I
I
� — I
I
I
I
Remarks:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Comments:
Distribution:
A-
B-
C-
Revise and Submitt
Contractor U -
HDR Engineering, Inc.
Address:
Attn.:
Not enough information for review.
No reproducibles submitted.
Copies illegible.
Not enough copies submitted.
Wrong sequence number.
Wrong resubmittal suffix.
Wrong spec. section.
Wrong form used.
See comments.
File U
Exhibit A
Shop Drawing Transmittal No.
Previous Transmittal Date:
Date Received:
'Checked By
I Log Page:
I HDR No.:
Spec. Section:
The Action Designated Above is in Accordance with the Following Legend:
Furnish as Submitted D. Rejected
Furnish as Noted E - Engineers review not required
1st. Sub. U ReSub. U
Manufacturer Dwg. or Data Action Taken -
No.
1. Submittal not Required.
2. Supplemental Information. Submittal
retained for informational purposed only.
3. Information reviewed and approved on
prior submittal.
4. See comments.
By Date
Field LI Owner Li Other U
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
f I
II
II
II
I
I I
I I
Remarks:
Project Name:
Project Owner:
Contractor:
Address:
Date Transmitted:
No. Description of Item
C opies
To:
Owner:
Address:
A - Acceptable, Provide five additional Copies
B - Furnish as Noted
Distribution: Contractor Li File Li
Exhibit B
0 & M Manual Transmittal No.
Previous Transmittal Date:
C- Revise and Resubmit.
This Operation and Maintenance Manual Submittal
is deficient in the following areas:
1. Equipment record sheets.
2. Functional description.
3. Assembly, disassembly, installation, alignment,
adjustment & checkout instructions.
4. Operating instructions
Comments:
From:
Date:
The Action Designated Above is in Accordance with the Following Legend:
Manufacturer Dwg. or Data Acti Taken'
No.
NOR Engineering, Inc.
5. Lubrication & maintenance instructions.
6. Troubleshooting guide.
7. Parts list and ordering instructions.
8. Organization (index and tabbing).
9. Wiring diagrams & schematics specific to
installation.
10. Outline, cross section & assembly diagrams.
11. Test data & performance curves.
12. Tag or equipment identification numbers.
13. Other - see comments.
D - Rejected
I Date Received:
'Checked By:
I Log Page:
11-10F1 No.:
I Spec. Section:
1st. Sub. U
ReSub. LJ
By Date
Field Li Owner L Other U
Equipment Maintenance Data Summary
Project Name Page of
Equip. Cosalpocn 'Date Installed Date Started
Equip. Lotatlon 'Cost Estimated Life
Project Equip. Tag No. I Shop Dwg. Trans. No. Spec. Sec.
Equip. Manuf.
Manut. Address Phme
Local Vendor
Vendor Address
Phone
BREAK -IN MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS (INITIAL OIL CHANGES, ETC.)
D W
M Q
S A I HOurS
I
I
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
D W
M o
s A
Hour:
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
ELECTRICAL NAMEPLATE DATA
Part No.
Part Name
Ou0noty
Equip.
Make
Serial No. I ID No.
Model No. I Frame No.
I
I
HP V. 'APT' IHZ
PH IRPM i SF I Duty
Code IIns CI Des Type
Nema IC Amb. • ITemp. Rise I Rating
M isc. _ ,.
MECHANICAL NAMEPLATE DATA
Equip.
Make
Serial No. 110 No.
--
Model No. 'Frame No.
'
HP IRPM 'Cap. !Size
'--
TDH Imp. Sz. IDes. ICFM
PSI IASSy• No. I Case No.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Exhibit Cl
Lubricant Information on following page
Equipment Record
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Equipment Description
Lubricant Pant
$F S
Lubricant P0151
I'
Lubricant Pant
I
J l I
I Lubricant Point
S ir
I° I
J AI
Lubricant Pant
f� I
3 FI
Lubricant Pant
alI
I mo ' -
J I"
I Lubricant Point
II' I
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Manufacturer
Exhibit C2
Lubrication Summary
Prod
Product AGM* 1 SAE* I ISO
Product
Product
Product
'Project Equip. Tag No.
Product I ALMA 0
Equipment Record
Page of
AGMA i SAES I ISO
AGMA it 1 SAE I I ISO
SAE 0 1 ISO
AGMA rl 1 SAE 0 1 ISO
Product 1 AGMA 0 1 SAE 0 1 ISO
AGMA 0 1 SAE 0 1 ISO
DATE: July 6, 1993
SUBJECT: City Council Meeting, July 8, 1993
ITEM: 9.F. Consider a resolution authorizing the Mayor to enter
into an agreement for the installation of ballfield lights
in Old Settlers Park at Palm Valley.
STAFF RESOURCE PERSON: Sharon Prete
STAFF RECOMMENDATION: Approval
Two Bids were received and opened on June 29.
Sports Facilities Co. $ 35,850.00
Stence Electric
Alt #1
Alt #2
S
$ 39,500.00
$ 27,796.00
$ 32,500.00
Neither alternate bid met the specifications. Staff
recommends the bid be awarded to Sports Facilities
Co.
ECONOMIC IMPACT: The Kiwanis Little League Association will reimburse
the City half the cost of the lights.